CHAPTER I_Manual of Military Training Second, Revised Edition

Produced by Brian Sogard, Chris Logan and the Online

Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net

Manual of Military Training

(SECOND, REVISED EDITION)

COLONEL JAMES A. MOSS

UNITED STATES ARMY

(Officially adopted by ONE HUNDRED AND FIVE [105] of our military

schools and colleges.)

Intended, primarily, for use in connection with the instruction and

training of Cadets in our military schools and colleges and of COMPANY

officers of the National Army, National Guard, and Officers' Reserve

Corps; and secondarily, as a guide for COMPANY officers of the Regular

Army, the aim being to make efficient fighting COMPANIES and to

qualify our Cadets and our National Army, National Guard and Reserve

Corps officers for the duties and responsibilities of COMPANY officers

in time of war.

[Illustration]

Price $2.25

GENERAL AGENTS

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING COMPANY

Army and College Printers

MENASHA--WISCONSIN

_By_

JAS. A. MOSS

FIRST EDITION

First impression (October, 1914) 10,000

Second impression (September, 1915) 10,000

Third impression (March, 1916) 10,000

Fourth impression (July, 1916) 10,000

Fifth impression (February, 1917) 3,000

Sixth impression (April, 1917) 4,000

SECOND EDITION

First impression (May, 1917) 40,000

Second impression (August, 1917) 30,000

Third impression (November, 1917) 50,000

-------

Total 167,000

Publishers and General Distributers

GEORGE BANTA PUBLISHING CO., MENASHA, WIS.

OTHER DISTRIBUTERS

(Order from nearest one)

=Boston, Mass.= The Harding Uniform and Regalia Co., 22 School St.

=Chicago, Ill.= A. C. McClurg & Co.

=Columbus, Ohio.= The M. C. Lilley & Co.

=Fort Leavenworth, Kan.=

U. S. Cavalry Association.

Book Dept., Army Service Schools.

=Fort Monroe, Va.= Journal U. S. Artillery.

=Kalamazoo, Mich.= Henderson-Ames Co.

=New York.=

Baker & Taylor Co., 4th Ave.

Army and Navy Cooeperative Co., 16 East 42nd St.

Ridabock & Co., 140 West 36th St.

Warnock Uniform Co., 16 West 46th St.

=Philadelphia, Pa.= Jacob Reed's Sons, 1424 Chestnut.

=Portland, Ore.= J. K. Gill Co.

=San Antonio, Tex.= Frank Brothers Alamo Plaza.

=San Francisco, Cal.= B. Pasquale Co., 115-117 Post St.

=Washington, D. C.=

Army and Navy Register, 511 Eleventh St. N. W.

Meyer's Military Shops, 1331 F. St. N. W.

U. S. Infantry Association, Union Trust Bldg.

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS: Philippine Education Co., Manila, P. I.

HAWAIIAN ISLANDS: Hawaiian News Co., Honolulu, H. T.

CANAL ZONE: Post Exchange, Empire, C. Z.

NOTE

In order to learn thoroughly the contents of this manual it is

suggested that you use in connection with your study of the book the

pamphlet, "QUESTIONS ON MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING," which, by means

of questions, brings out and emphasizes every point mentioned in the

manual.

"QUESTIONS ON MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING" is especially useful to

students of schools and colleges using the manual, as it enables them,

as nothing else will, to prepare for recitations and examinations.

The pamphlet can be gotten from the publishers, Geo. Banta Publishing

Co., Menasha, Wis., or from any of the distributers of "MANUAL OF

MILITARY TRAINING." Price 50 cts., postpaid.

PREFATORY

Not only does this manual cover all the subjects prescribed by War

Department orders for the Junior Division, and the Basic Course,

Senior Division, of the Reserve Officers' Training Corps, but it also

contains considerable additional material which broadens its scope,

rounding it out and making it answer the purpose of a general,

all-around book, complete in itself, for training and instruction in

the fundamentals of the art of war.

The Company is the _basic fighting tactical unit_--it is the

foundation rock upon which an army is built--and the fighting

efficiency of a COMPANY is based on systematic and thorough training.

This manual is a presentation of MILITARY TRAINING as manifested in

the training and instruction of a COMPANY. The book contains all the

essentials pertaining to the training and instruction of COMPANY

officers, noncommissioned officers and privates, and the officer who

masters its contents and who makes his COMPANY proficient in the

subjects embodied herein, will be in every way qualified, _without the

assistance of a single other book_, to command with credit and

satisfaction, in peace and in war, a COMPANY that will be an

_efficient fighting weapon_.

This manual, as indicated below, is divided into a Prelude and nine

Parts, subjects of a similar or correlative nature being thus grouped

together.

PRELUDE. THE OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING.

PART I. DRILLS, EXERCISES, CEREMONIES, AND INSPECTIONS.

PART II. COMPANY COMMAND.

PART III. MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY TRAINING

AND INSTRUCTION.

PART IV. RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION.

PART V. HEALTH AND KINDRED SUBJECTS.

PART VI. MILITARY COURTESY AND KINDRED SUBJECTS.

PART VII. GUARD DUTY.

PART VIII. MILITARY ORGANIZATION.

PART IX. MAP READING AND SKETCHING.

A schedule of training and instruction covering a given period and

suitable to the local conditions that obtain in any given school or

command, can be readily arranged by looking over the TABLE OF

CONTENTS, and selecting therefrom such subjects as it is desired to

use, the number and kind, and the time to be devoted to each,

depending upon the time available, and climatic and other conditions.

It is suggested that, for the sake of variety, in drawing up a program

of instruction and training, when practicable a part of each day or a

part of each drill time, be devoted to theoretical work and a part to

practical work, theoretical work, when possible, being followed by

corresponding practical work, the practice (the _doing_ of a thing)

thus putting a clincher, as it were, on the theory (the explaining of

a thing). The theoretical work, for example, could be carried on in

the forenoon and the practical work in the afternoon, or the

theoretical work could be carried on from, say, 8 to 9:30 a. m., and

the practical work from 9:30 to 10:30 or 11 a. m.

Attention is invited to the completeness of the Index, whereby one is

enabled to locate at once any point covered in the book.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

The author wishes to acknowledge the assistance received in the

revision of this Manual in the form of suggestions from a large number

of officers on duty at our military schools and colleges, suggestions

that enabled him not only to improve the Manual in subject-matter as

well as in arrangement, but that have also enabled him to give our

military schools and colleges a textbook which, in a way, may be said

to represent the consensus of opinion of our Professors of Military

Science and Tactics as to what such a book should embody in both

subject-matter and arrangement.

Suggestions received from a number of Professors of Military Science

and Tactics show conclusively that local conditions as to average age

and aptitude of students, interest taken in military training by the

student body, support given by the school authorities, etc., are so

different in different schools that it would be impossible to write a

book for general use that would, in amount of material, arrangement

and otherwise, just exactly fit, in toto, the conditions, and meet the

requirements of each particular school.

Therefore, the only practical, satisfactory solution of the problem is

to produce a book that meets _all_ the requirements of the strictly

military schools, where the conditions for military training and

instruction are the most favorable, and the requirements the greatest,

and then let other schools take only such parts of the book as are

necessary to meet their own particular local needs and requirements.

"MANUAL OF MILITARY TRAINING" is such a book.

[Illustration: (Signature) Jas. A. Moss]

Camp Gaillard, C. Z.,

March 4, 1917.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PRELUDE

OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING

Par. No.

=Object of:= Setting-Up Exercises, Calisthenics, Facings 1-23

and Marchings, Saluting, Manual of Arms, School of the

Squad, Company Drill, Close Order, Extended Order,

Ceremonies, Discipline--=Advantages:= Handiness,

Self-Control, Loyalty, Orderliness, Self-Confidence,

Self-Respect, Training Eyes, Teamwork, Heeding Law and

Order, Sound Body.

PART I

CHAPTER I. =INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS=--Definitions-- 24-710

General Remarks--General Rules for Drills and Formations--

Orders, Commands, and Signals--School of the Soldier--

School of the Squad--School of the Company--School of the

Battalion--Combat--Leadership--Combat Reconnaissance--Fire

Superiority--Fire Direction and Control--Deployment--

Attack--Defense--Meeting Engagements--Machine Guns--

Ammunition Supply--Mounted Scouts--Night Operations--

Infantry Against Cavalry--Infantry Against Artillery--

Artillery Supports--Minor Warfare--Ceremonies--Inspections--

Muster--The Color--Manual of the Saber--Manual of Tent

Pitching--Appendices A and B.

CHAPTER II. =MANUAL OF THE BAYONET=--Nomenclature and 711-824

Description of the Bayonet--Instruction without the

Rifle--Instruction with the Rifle--Instruction without

the Bayonet--Combined Movements--Fencing Exercises--Fencing

at Will--Lessons of the European War--The "Short point"--

The "Jab."

CHAPTER III. =MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING=--Methods-- 825-860

Commands--Setting-Up Exercises--Rifle Exercises.

CHAPTER IV. =SIGNALING=--General Service Code--Wigwag-- 861-866

The Two-Arm Semaphore Code--Signaling with Heliograph,

Flash Lanterns, and Searchlight--Sound Signals--Morse Code.

PART II

COMPANY COMMAND

CHAPTER I. =GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF A 867-909

COMPANY=--Duties and Responsibilities of the Captain and

the Lieutenants--Devolution of Work and

Responsibility--Duties and Responsibilities of the First

Sergeant and other Noncommissioned Officers--Contentment

and Harmony--Efficacious Forms of Company

Punishment--Property Responsibility--Books and Records.

CHAPTER II. =DISCIPLINE=--Definition--Methods of 910-916

Attaining Good Discipline--Importance--Sound Discipline--

Punishment--General Principles.

PART III

MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY

TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

CHAPTER I. =GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY TRAINING AND 917-941

INSTRUCTION=--Object of Training and Instruction--Method

and Progression--Individual Initiative--The Human Element--

Art of Instruction on the Ground--Ocular Demonstration.

CHAPTER II. =GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED 942-953

MINOR TACTICS=--Art of War Defined--Responsibilities of

Officers and Noncommissioned Officers in War--General

Rules and Principles of Map Problems, Terrain Exercises,

the War Game, and Maneuvers--Estimating the Situation--

Mission.

CHAPTER III. =GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS 954-958

FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES--INSTRUCTION

IN DELIVERING MESSAGES.=

CHAPTER IV. =THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION=--General 959-1019

Principles of Patrolling--Sizes of Patrols--Patrol

Leaders--Patrol Formations--Messages and Reports--

Suggestions for Gaining Information about the Enemy--

Suggestions for the Reconnaissance of Various Positions

and Localities--Demolitions--Problems in Patrolling.

CHAPTER V. =THE SERVICE OF SECURITY=--General 1020-1079

principles--Advance Guard--Advance Guard Problems--

Flank Guards--Rear Guard--Outposts--Formation of

Outposts--Outguards--Flags of Truce--Detached Posts--

Examining Posts--Establishing the Outpost--Outpost

Order--Intercommunication--Outpost Problems.

CHAPTER VI. =THE COMPANY ON OUTPOST=--Establishing 1080

the Outpost.

CHAPTER VII. =THE COMPANY IN SCOUTING AND PATROLLING= 1081-1090

--Requisites of a Good Scout--Eyesight and hearing--

Finding Way in Strange Country--What to do when Lost--

Landmarks--Concealment and Dodging--Tracking--The Mouse

and Cat Contest--Flag Stealing Contest.

CHAPTER VIII. =NIGHT OPERATIONS=--Importance--Training 1091-1108

of the Company--Individual Training--Collective

Training--Outposts.

CHAPTER IX. =FIELD ENGINEERING=--Bridges--Corduroying-- 1109-1139

Tascines--Hurdles--Brush Revetment--Gabions--Other

Revetments--Knots--Lashings.

CHAPTER X. =FIELD FORTIFICATIONS=--Object-- 1140-1172

Classification--Hasty Intrenchments--Lying Trench--

Kneeling Trench--Standing Trench--Deliberate

Intrenchments--Fire Trenches--Traverses--Trench

recesses; sortie steps--Parados--Head Cover--Notches

and Loopholes--Cover Trenches--Dugouts--Communicating

Trenches--Lookouts--Supporting Points--Example of Trench

System--Location of Trenches--Concealment of Trenches--

Dummy Trenches--Length of Trench--Preparation of

Foreground--Revetments--Drainage--Water Supply--

Latrines--Illumination of the foreground--Telephones--

Siege Works.

CHAPTER XI. =OBSTACLES=--Object--Necessity for 1173-1193

Obstacles--Location--Abatis--Palisades--Fraises--

Cheveaux de Frise--Obstacles against Cavalry--Wire

Entanglements--Time and Materials--Wire Fence--Military

Pits or Trous de Loup--Miscellaneous Barricades--

Inundations--Obstacles in Front of Outguards--Lessons

from the European War--Wire Cheveaux de Frise--Guarding

Obstacles--Listening Posts--Automatic Alarms--Search

Lights.

CHAPTER XII. =TRENCH AND MINE WARFARE=--Asphyxiating 1194-1211

Gases--Protection against Gases--Liquid Fire--

Grenades--Bombs--Aerial Mines--Winged Torpedoes--Bombs

from Air-Craft--Protection against Hand Grenades--

Tanks--Helmets--Masks--Periscopes--Sniperscopes--Aids

to Firing--Mining--Countermining.

CHAPTER XIII. =MARCHES=--Marching Principal Occupation 1212-1229

of Troops in Campaign-Physical Training Hardening New

Troops--Long Marches Not to Be Made with Untrained

Troops--A Successful March--Preparation--Starting--

Conduct of March--Rate--Marching Capacity--Halts--

Crossing Bridges and Fords--Straggling and Elongation

of Column--Forced Marches--Night Marches--No Compliments

Paid on March--Protection on March--Fitting of Shoes and

Care of Feet.

CHAPTER XIV. =CAMPS=--Selection of Camp Sites-- 1230-1240

Desirable Camp Sites--Undesirable Camp Sites--Form and

Dimensions of Camps--Making Camp--Retreat in Camp--

Parade Ground--Windstorms--Making Tent Poles and Pegs

Fast in Loose Soil--Trees.

CHAPTER XV. =CAMP SANITATION=--Definition--Camp 1241-1255

Expedients--Latrines--Urinal Tubs--Kitchens--Kitchen

Pits--Incinerators--Drainage--Avoiding Old Camp Sites--

Changing Camp Sites--Bunks--Wood--Water--Rules of

Sanitation--Your Camp, Your Home.

CHAPTER XVI. =INDIVIDUAL COOKING=--Making Fire-- 1256-1275

Recipes--Meats--Vegetables--Drinks--Hot Breads--

Emergency Ration.

CHAPTER XVII. =CARE AND PRESERVATION OF CLOTHING AND 1276-1320

EQUIPMENT=--Clothing--Pressing--Removing Stains--

Shoes--Cloth Equipment--Washing--Shelter Tent--Mess

Outfit--Leather Equipment--Points to Be Remembered.

CHAPTER XVIII. =CARE AND DESCRIPTION OF THE RIFLE= 1321-1343

--Importance--Care of Bore--How to Remove Fouling--Care

of Mechanism and Various Parts--How to Apply Oil--Army

Regulation Paragraphs About Rifle--Nomenclature of Rifle.

PART IV

RIFLE TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

Object and Explanation of Our System of Instruction-- 1344-1450

Individual Instruction--Theory of Sighting--Kinds of

Sights--Preliminary Drills--Position and Aiming Drills--

Deflection and Elevation Correction Drills--Gallery

Practice--Range Practice--Use of Sling--Designation of

Winds--Zero of Rifle--Estimating Distances--Wind--

Temperature--Light--Mirage--Combat Practice--Fire

Discipline--Technical Principles of Firing--Ballistic

Qualities of the Rifle--Cone of Fire--Shot Group--Center

of Impact--Beaten Zone--Zone of Effective Fire--

Effectiveness of Fire--Influence of Ground--Grazing

Fire--Ricochet Shots--Occupation of Ground--Adjustment

of Fire--Determination of Range--Combined Sights--

Auxiliary Aiming Points--Firing at Moving Targets--

Night Firing--Fire Direction and Control--Distribution

of Fire--Individual Instruction in Fire Distribution--

Designation of Targets--Exercises in Ranging, Target

Designation Communication, etc.

PART V

CARE OF HEALTH AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I. =CARE OF THE HEALTH=--Importance of Good 1451-1469

Health--Germs--The Five Ways of Catching Disease--

Diseases Caught by Breathing in Germs--Diseases Caught

by Swallowing Germs--Disease Caught by Touching Germs--

Diseases Caught from Biting Insects.

CHAPTER II. =PERSONAL HYGIENE=--Keep the Skin Clean-- 1470-1477

Keep the Body Properly Protected against the Weather--

Keep the Body Properly Fed--Keep the Body Supplied with

Fresh Air--Keep the Body well Exercised--Keep the Body

Rested by Sufficient Sleep--Keep the Body Free of Wastes.

CHAPTER III. =FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED= 1478-1522

--Objectof Teaching First Aid--Asphyxiation by Gas--

Bite of Dog--Bite of Snake--Bleeding--Broken Bones

(Fractures)--Burns--Bruises--Cuts--Dislocations--

Drowning--Electric Shock--Fainting--Foreign Body in Eye,

in Ear--Freezing--Frost Bite--Headache--Heat Exhaustion--

Poison--Sprains--Sunburn--Sunstroke--Wounds--Improvised

Litters.

PART VI

MILITARY COURTESY AND KINDRED SUBJECTS

CHAPTER I. =MILITARY DEPORTMENT AND APPEARANCE-- 1523-1531

PERSONAL CLEANLINESS--FORMS OF SPEECH--DELIVERY OF

MESSAGES.=

CHAPTER II. =MILITARY COURTESY=--Its Importance--Nature 1532-1575

of Salutes and Their Origin--Whom to Salute--When and

How to Salute--Usual Mistakes in Saluting--Respect to

Be Paid the National Anthem, the Colors and Standards.

PART VII

GUARD DUTY

Importance--Respect for Sentinels--Classification of 1576-1857

Guards--General Rules--The Commanding Officer--The

Officer of the Day--The Commander of the Guard--Sergeant

of the Guard--Corporal of the Guard--Musicians of the

Guard--Orderlies and Color Sentinels--Privates of the

Guard--Countersigns and Paroles--Guard Patrols--

Compliments from Guards--General Rules Concerning Guard

Duty--Stable Guards--Troop Stable Guards--Reveille and

Retreat Gun--Formal Guard Mounting--Informal Guard

Mounting.

PART VIII

MILITARY ORGANIZATION

Composition of Infantry, Cavalry and Field Artillery 1858

Units up to and Including the Regiment.

PART IX

MAP READING AND SKETCHING

CHAPTER I. =MAP READING=--Definition of Map--Ability to 1859-1877

Read a Map--Scales--Methods of Representing Scales--

Construction of Scales--Scale Problems--Scaling

Distances from a Map--Contours--Map Distances--Slopes--

Meridians--Determination of Positions of Points on Map--

Orientation--Conventional Signs--Visibility.

CHAPTER II. =MILITARY SKETCHING=--The Different Methods 1878-1893

of Sketching--Location of Points by Intersection--

Location of points by Resection--Location of Points by

Traversing--Contours--Form Lines--Scales--Position

Sketching--Outpost Sketching--Road Sketching--Combined

Sketching--Points for Beginners to Remember.

PRELUDE

THE OBJECT AND ADVANTAGES OF MILITARY TRAINING

=1. Prelude.= We will first consider the object and advantages of

military training, as they are the natural and logical prelude to the

subject of military training and instruction.

Object

=2. The object of all military training is to win battles.=

Everything that you do in military training is done with some

immediate object in view, which, in turn, has in view the _final_

object of winning battles. For example:

=3. Setting-up exercises.= The object of the setting-up exercises, as

the name indicates, is to give the new men the _set-up_,--the bearing

and carriage,--of the military man.

In addition these exercises serve to loosen up his muscles and prepare

them for his later experiences and development.

=4. Calisthenics.= Calisthenics may be called the big brother, the

grown-up form, of the setting-up exercise.

The object of calisthenics is to develop and strengthen all parts and

muscles of the human body,--the back, the legs, the arms, the lungs,

the heart and all other parts of the body.

First and foremost a fighting man's work depends upon his physical

fitness.

To begin with, a soldier's mind must always be on the alert and equal

to any strain, and no man's mind can be at its best when he is

handicapped by a weak or ailing body.

The work of the fighting man makes harsh demands on his body. It must

be strong enough to undergo the strain of marching when every muscle

cries out for rest; strong enough to hold a rifle steady under fatigue

and excitement; strong enough to withstand all sorts of weather, and

the terrible nervous and physical strain of modern battle; and more,

it must be strong enough to resist those diseases of campaign which

kill more men than do the bullets of the enemy.

Hence the necessity of developing and strengthening every part and

muscle of the body.

=5. Facings and Marchings.= The object of the facings and marchings is

to give the soldier complete control of his body in drills, so that he

can get around with ease and promptness at every command.

The marchings,--the military walk and run,--also teach the soldier how

to get from one place to another in campaign with the least amount of

physical exertion.

Every man knows how to walk and run, but few of them how to do so

without making extra work of it. One of the first principles in

training the body of the soldier is to make each set of muscles do its

own work and save the strength of the other muscles for their work.

Thus the soldier marches in quick time,--walks,--with his legs,

keeping the rest of his body as free from motion as possible. He

marches in double time,--runs,--with an easy swinging stride which

requires no effort on the part of the muscles of the body.

The marchings also teach the soldier to walk and run at a steady gait.

For example, in marching in quick time, he takes 120 steps each

minute; in double time, he takes 180 per minute.

Furthermore, the marchings teach the soldier to walk and run with

others,--that is, in a body.

=6. Saluting.= The form of salutation and greeting for the civilian

consists in raising the hat.

The form of salutation and greeting for the military man consists in

rendering the military salute,--a form of salutation which marks you

as a member of the Fraternity of Men-at-arms, men banded together for

national defense, bound to each other by love of country and pledged

to the loyal support of its symbol, the Flag. For the full

significance of the military salute see paragraph 1534.

=7. Manual of Arms.= The rifle is the soldier's fighting weapon and he

must become so accustomed to the _feel_ of it that he handles it

without a thought,--just as he handles his arms or legs without a

thought,--and this is what the manual of arms accomplishes.

The different movements and positions of the rifle are the ones that

experience has taught are the best and the easiest to accomplish the

object in view.

=8. School of the Squad.= The object of squad drill is to teach the

soldier his first lesson in _team-work_,--and team-work is the thing

that wins battles.

In the squad the soldier is associated with seven other men with whom

he drills, eats, sleeps, marches, and fights.

The squad is the unit upon which all of the work of the company

depends. Unless the men of each squad work together as a single

man,--unless there is _team-work_,--the work of the company is almost

impossible.

=9. Company Drill.= Several squads are banded together into a

company,--the basic fighting unit. In order for a company to be able

to comply promptly with the will of its commander, it must be like a

pliable, easily managed instrument. And in order to win battles a

company on the firing line must be able to comply promptly with the

will of its commander.

The object of company drill is to get such team-work amongst the

squads that the company will at all times move and act like a pliable,

easily managed whole.

=10. Close Order.= In close order drill the strictest attention is

paid to all the little details, all movements being executed with the

greatest precision. The soldiers being close together,--in _close

order_,--they form a compact body that is easily managed, and

consequently that lends itself well to teaching the soldier habits of

attention, precision, team-work and instant obedience to the voice of

his commander.

In order to control and handle bodies of men quickly and without

confusion, they must be taught to group themselves in an orderly

arrangement and to move in an orderly manner. For example, soldiers

are grouped or formed in line, in column of squads, column of files,

etc.

In close order drill soldiers are taught to move in an orderly manner

from one group or formation to another; how to stand, step off, march,

halt and handle their rifles all together.

This practice makes the soldier feel perfectly at home and at ease in

the squad and company. He becomes accustomed to working side by side

with the man next to him, and, unconsciously, both get into the habit

of working together, thus learning the first principles of

_team-work_.

=11. Extended Order.= This is the fighting drill.

Modern fire arms have such great penetration that if the soldiers were

all bunched together a single bullet might kill or disable several men

and the explosion of a single shell might kill or disable a whole

company. Consequently, soldiers must be scattered,--_extended

out_,--to fight.

In extended order not only do the soldiers furnish a smaller target

for the enemy to shoot at, but they also get room in which to fight

with greater ease and freedom.

The object of extended order drill is to practice the squads in

team-work by which they are welded into a single fighting machine that

can be readily controlled by its commander.

=12. Parades, reviews, and other ceremonies.= Parades, reviews and

other ceremonies, with their martial music, the presence of

spectators, etc., are intended to stimulate the interest and excite

the military spirit of the command. Also, being occasions for which

the soldiers dress up and appear spruce and trim, they inculcate

habits of tidiness,--they teach a lesson in cleanliness of body and

clothes.

While it is true it may be said that parades, reviews and other

ceremonies form no practical part of the fighting man's training for

battle, they nevertheless serve a very useful purpose in his general

training. In these ceremonies in which soldiers march to martial music

with flags flying, moving and going through the manual of arms with

perfect precision and unison, there results a concerted movement that

produces a feeling such as we have when we dance or when we sing in

chorus. In other words, ceremonies are a sort of "get-together"

exercise which pulls men together in spite of themselves, giving them

a shoulder-to-shoulder feeling of solidity and power that helps to

build up that confidence and spirit which wins battles.

=13. Discipline.= By discipline we mean the _habit_ of observing all

rules and regulations and of obeying promptly all orders. By observing

day after day all rules and regulations and obeying promptly all

orders, it becomes second nature,--a fixed habit,--to do these things.

Of course, in the Army, like in any other walk of life, there must be

law and order, which is impossible unless everyone obeys the rules and

regulations gotten up by those in authority.

When a man has cultivated the habit of obeying,--when obedience has

become second nature with him,--he obeys the orders of his leaders

instinctively, even when under the stress of great excitement, such as

when in battle, his own reasoning is confused and his mind is not

working.

In order to win a battle the _will_ of the commander as expressed

through his subordinates down the line from the second in command to

the squad leaders, must be carried out by everyone. Hence the vital

importance of prompt, instinctive obedience on the part of everybody,

and of discipline, which is the mainspring of obedience and also the

foundation rock of law and order.

And so could we go on indefinitely pointing out the object of each and

every requirement of military training, for there is none that has no

object and that answers no useful purpose, although the object and

purpose may not always be apparent to the young soldier.

_And remember that the final object of all military training is to win

battles._

Advantages of Military Training

The following are the principal advantages of military training:

=14. Handiness.= The average man does one thing well. He is more or

less apt to be clumsy about doing other things. The soldier is

constantly called upon to do all sorts of things, and he has to do all

of them well. His hands thus become trained and useful to him, and his

mind gets into the habit of making his hands do what is required of

them,--that is to say, the soldier becomes handy.

Handy arms are a valuable asset.

=15. Self-control.= In the work of the soldier, control does not stop

with the hands.

The mind reaches out,--control of the body becomes a habit. The feet,

legs, arms and body gradually come under the sway of the mind. In the

position of the soldier, for instance, the mind holds the body

motionless. In marching, the mind drives the legs to machine-like

regularity. In shooting, the mind assumes command of the arms, hands,

fingers and eye, linking them up and making them work in harmony.

Control of the body, together with the habit of discipline that the

soldier acquires, leads to control of the mind,--that is, to

_self-control_.

Self-control is an important factor in success in any walk of life.

=16. Loyalty.= Loyalty to his comrades, to his company, to his

battalion, to his regiment becomes a religion with the soldier. They

are a part of his life. Their reputation is his; their good name, his

good name; their interests, his interests,--so, loyalty to them is but

natural, and this loyalty soon extends to loyalty in general.

When you say a man is loyal the world considers that you have paid him

a high tribute.

=17. Orderliness.= In the military service order and system are

watchwords. The smooth running of the military machine depends on

them.

The care and attention that the soldier is required to give at all

times to his clothes, accouterments, equipment and other belongings,

instill in him habits of orderliness.

Orderliness increases the value of a man.

=18. Self-confidence and self-respect.= Self-confidence is founded on

one's ability to do things. The soldier is taught to defend himself

with his rifle, and to take care of himself and to do things in almost

any sort of a situation, all of which gives him confidence in

himself,--_self-confidence_.

Respect for constituted authority, which is a part of the soldier's

creed, teaches him respect for himself,--_self-respect_.

Self-confidence and self-respect are a credit to any man.

=19. Eyes trained to observe.= Guard duty, outpost duty, patrolling,

scouting and target practice, train both the eye and the mind to

observe.

Power of observation is a valuable faculty for a man to possess.

=20. Teamwork.= In drilling, patrolling, marching, maneuvers and in

other phases of his training and instruction, the soldier is taught

the principles of team-work,--cooeperation,--whose soul is _loyalty_, a

trait of every good soldier.

Teamwork,--cooeperation,--leads to success in life.

=21. Heeding law and order.= The cardinal habit of the soldier is

obedience. To obey orders and regulations is a habit with the soldier.

And this habit of obeying orders and regulations teaches him to heed

law and order.

The man who heeds law and order is a welcome member of any community.

=22. Sound body.= Military training, with its drills, marches, and

other forms of physical exercise, together with its regular habits and

outdoor work, keeps a man physically fit, giving him a sound body.

A sound body, with the physical exercise and outdoor life of the

soldier, means good digestion, strength, hardiness and endurance.

A sound body is, indeed, one of the greatest blessings of life.

The Trained Soldier

=23.= Look at the trained soldier on the following page; study him

carefully from top to bottom, and see what military training does for

a man.

[Illustration: THE TRAINED SOLDIER

WHAT DO YOU THINK OF HIM, EH?]

PART I

DRILLS, EXERCISES, CEREMONIES AND INSPECTIONS

CHAPTER I

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS

(To include Changes No. 20, Aug. 18, 1917.)

DEFINITIONS

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Drill

Regulations, and references in the text to certain paragraph

numbers refer to these numbers and not to the numbers preceding

the paragraphs.)

(NOTE.--Company drills naturally become monotonous. The monotony,

however, can be greatly reduced by repeating the drills under

varying circumstances. In the manual of arms, for instance, the

company may be brought to open ranks and the officers and

sergeants directed to superintend the drill in the front and rear

ranks. As the men make mistakes they are fallen out and drilled

nearby by an officer or noncommissioned officer. Or, the company

may be divided into squads, each squad leader drilling his squad,

falling out the men as they make mistakes, the men thus fallen out

reporting to a designated officer or noncommissioned officer for

drill. The men who have drilled the longest in the different

squads are then formed into one squad and drilled and fallen out

in like manner. The variety thus introduced stimulates a spirit of

interest and rivalry that robs the drill of much of its monotony.

It is thought the instruction of a company in drill is best

attained by placing special stress on squad drill. The

noncommissioned officers should be thoroughly instructed,

practically and theoretically, by one of the company officers and

then be required to instruct their squads. The squads are then

united and drilled in the school of the company.--Author.)

DEFINITIONS

=24. Alignment:= A straight line upon which several elements are

formed, or are to be formed; or the dressing of several elements upon

a straight line.

[Illustration: Fig. 1

NOTE.--The line A-B, on which a body of troops is formed or is to be

formed, or the act of dressing a body of troops on the line, is called

an alignment.--Author.]

=25. Base:= The element on which a movement is regulated.

=26. Battle sight:= The position of the rear sight when the leaf is

laid down.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=27. Center:= The middle point or element of a command. (See Figs. 2,

3 and 5.) (The designation "center company," indicates the right

center or the actual center company, according as the number of

companies is even or odd.--Par. 298.)

=28. Column:= A formation in which the elements are placed one behind

another. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

=29. Deploy:= To extend the front. In general to change from column to

line, or from close order to extended order.

=30. Depth:= The space from head to rear of any formation, including

the leading and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12

inches. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

=31. Distance:= Space between elements in the direction of depth.

Distance is measured from the back of the man in front to the breast

of the man in rear. The distance between ranks is 40 inches in both

line and column. (See Figs. 4, 5, 6.)

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

=32. Element:= A file, squad, platoon, company, or larger body,

forming part of a still larger body.

=33. File:= Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of

the rear rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file which has

no rear-rank man is a blank file. The term file applies also to a

single man in a single-rank formation.

=34. File closers:= Such officers and noncommissioned officers of a

company as are posted in rear of the line. For convenience, all men

posted in the line of file closers.

=35. Flank:= The right or left of a command in line or in column; also

the element on the right or left of the line. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 4.)

=36. Formation:= Arrangement of the elements of a command. The placing

of all fractions in their order in line, in column, or for battle.

=37. Front:= The space, in width, occupied by an element, either in

line or in column. The front of a man is assumed to be 22 inches.

Front also denotes the direction of the enemy. (See Figs. 2, 3 and 5).

=38. Guide:= An officer, noncommissioned officer, or private upon whom

the command or elements thereof regulates its march.

=39. Head:= The leading element of a column. (See Figs. 4, 5 and 6.)

=40. Interval:= Space between elements of the same line. The interval

between men in ranks is 4 inches and is measured from elbow to elbow.

Between companies, squads, etc., it is measured from the left elbow of

the left man or guide of the group on the right, to the right elbow of

the right man or guide of the group on the left. (See Fig. 3.)

=41. Left:= The left extremity or element of a body of troops.

=42. Line:= A formation in which the different elements are abreast of

each other. (See Figs. 2 and 3.)

=43. Order, close:= The formation in which the units, in double rank,

are arranged in line or in column with normal intervals and distances.

=44. Order, extended:= The formation in which the units are separated

by intervals greater than in close order.

=45. Pace:= Thirty inches; the length of the full step in quick time.

=46. Point of rest:= The point at which a formation begins.

Specifically, the point toward which units are aligned in successive

movements.

=47. Rank:= A line of men placed side by side.

=48. Right:= The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

=49.= NOTE. In view of the fact that the word "Echelon" is a term of

such common usage, the following definition is given: By echelon we

mean a formation in which the subdivisions are placed one behind

another, extending beyond and unmasking one another either wholly or

in part.--Author.

[Illustration: BATTALION IN ECHELON: COMPANIES UNMASKING WHOLLY]

[Illustration: BATTALION IN ECHELON: COMPANIES UNMASKING IN PART]

INTRODUCTION

=50. Object of military training.= Success in battle is the ultimate

object of all military training; success may be looked for only when

the training is intelligent and thorough. (1)

=51. Commanding officers accountable for proper training of

organizations; field efficiency; team-work.= Commanding officers are

accountable for the proper training of their respective organizations

within the limits prescribed by regulations and orders. (2)

The excellence of an organization is judged by its field efficiency.

The field efficiency of an organization depends primarily upon its

effectiveness as a whole. Thoroughness and uniformity in the training

of the units of an organization are indispensable to the efficiency of

the whole; it is by such means alone that the requisite team-work may

be developed.

=52. Simple movements and elastic formations.= Simple movements and

elastic formations are essential to correct training for battle. (3)

=53. Drill Regulations a Guide; their interpretation.= The Drill

Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the principles for

training and for increasing the probability of success in battle. (4)

In the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit must be sought.

Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to grasp

the spirit.

=54. Combat principles.= The principles of combat are considered in

Pars. 50-363. They are treated in the various schools included in Part

I of the Drill Regulations only to the extent necessary to indicate

the functions of the various commanders and the division of

responsibility between them. The amplification necessary to a proper

understanding of their application is to be sought in Pars. 364-613.

(5)

=55. Drills at attention, ceremonies, extended order, field exercises

and combat exercises.= The following important distinctions must be

observed:

(a) Drills executed at =attention= and the ceremonies are

=disciplinary exercises= designed to teach precise and soldierly

movement, and to inculcate that prompt and subconscious obedience

which is essential to proper military control. To this end, smartness

and precision should be exacted in the execution of every detail. Such

drills should be frequent, but short.

(b) The purpose of =extended order drill= is to teach the =mechanism=

of deployment of the firing, and, in general, of the employment of

troops in combat. Such drills are in the nature of disciplinary

exercises and should be frequent, thorough, and exact, in order to

habituate men to the firm control of their leaders. Extended order

drill is executed =at ease=. The company is the largest unit which

executes extended order drill.

campaign. Assumed situations are employed. Each exercise should

conclude with a discussion, on the ground, of the exercise and

principles involved.

(d) The =combat exercise, a form of field exercise= of the company,

battalion, and larger units, consists of the =application of tactical

principles= to assumed situations, employing in the execution the

appropriate formations and movements of close and extended order.

Combat exercises must simulate, as far as possible, the battle

conditions assumed. In order to familiarize both officers and men with

such conditions, companies and battalions will frequently be

consolidated to provide war-strength organizations. Officers and

noncommissioned officers not required to complete the full quota of

the units participating are assigned as observers or umpires.

The firing line can rarely be controlled by the voice alone; thorough

training to insure the proper use of prescribed signals is necessary.

The exercise should be followed by a brief drill at attention in order

to restore smartness and control. (6)

=56. Imaginary, outlined and represented enemy.= In field exercises

the enemy is said to be =imaginary= when his position and force are

merely assumed; =outlined= when his position and force are indicated

by a few men; =represented= when a body of troops acts as such. (7)

General Rules for Drills and Formations

=57. Arrangement of elements of preparatory command.= When the

=preparatory= command consists of more than one part, its elements are

arranged as follows:

(1) For movements to be executed successively by the subdivisions or

elements of an organization: (a) Description of the movement; (b) how

executed, or on what element executed.

(For example: =1. Column of Companies, first company, squads right. 2.

March.=--Author.)

(2) For movements to be executed simultaneously by the subdivisions of

an organization: (a) The designation of the subdivisions; (b) The

movement to be executed. (For example: =1. Squads right. 2.

March.=--Author.) (8)

=58. Movements executed toward either flank explained toward but one

flank.= Movements that may be executed toward either flank are

explained as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute

the word "left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation

of the corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are

given for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The

substitute word of the command is placed within parentheses. (9)

=59. Any movement may be executed from halt or when marching unless

otherwise prescribed.= Any movement may be executed either from the

halt or when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If at a halt, the

command for movements involving marching need not be prefaced by

=forward=, as =1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH=. (10)

=60. Any movement may be executed in double time unless specially

excepted.= Any movement not specially excepted may be executed in

double time.

If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command =double time=

precedes the command of execution. (11)

=61. Successive movements executed in double time.= In successive

movements executed in double time the leading or =base= unit marches

in =quick time= when not otherwise prescribed; the other units march

in =double time= to their places in the formation ordered and then

conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. If marching in double

time, the command =double time= is omitted. The leading or base unit

marches in =quick time=; the other units continue at double time to

their places in the formation ordered and then conform to the gait of

the leading or base unit. (12)

=62. To hasten execution of movement begun in quick time.= To hasten

the execution of a movement begun in quick time, the command: =1.

Double time, 2. MARCH=, is given. The leading or base unit continues

to march in quick time, or remains at halt, if already halted; the

other units complete the execution of the movement in double time and

then conform to the gait of the leading or base unit. (13)

=63. To stay execution of movement when marching, for correction of

errors.= To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the

correction of errors, the command: =1. In place, 2. HALT=, is given.

All halt and stand fast without changing the position of the pieces.

To resume the movement the command: =1. Resume, 2. MARCH=, is given.

(14)

=64. To revoke preparatory command or begin anew movement improperly

begun.= To revoke a preparatory command, or, being at a halt, to begin

anew a movement improperly begun, the command, =AS YOU WERE=, is

given, at which the movement ceases and the former position is

resumed. (15)

=65. Guide.= Unless otherwise announced, the guide of a company or

subdivision of a company in line is =right=; of a battalion in line or

line of subdivisions or of a deployed line, =center=; of a rank in

column of squads, toward the side of the guide of the company.

To march with guide other than as prescribed above, or to change the

guide: =Guide (right, left, or center).=

In successive formations into line, the guide is toward the point of

rest; in platoons or larger subdivisions it is so announced.

The announcement of the guide, when given in connection with a

movement follows the command of execution for that. Exception: =1. As

skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.= (16)

=66. Turn on fixed and moving pivots.= The turn on the fixed pivot by

subdivisions is used in all formations from line into column and the

reverse.

The turn on the =moving pivot= is used by subdivisions of a column in

executing changes of direction. (17)

=67. Partial changes of direction.= Partial changes of direction may

be executed:

By interpolating in the preparatory command the word =half, as Column

half right (left), or Right (left) half turn=. A change of direction

of 45 deg. is executed.

By the command: =INCLINE TO THE RIGHT (LEFT).= The guide, or guiding

element, moves in the indicated direction and the remainder of the

command conforms. This movement effects slight changes of direction.

(18)

=68. Line of platoons, companies, etc.= The =designations line of

platoons, line of companies, line of battalions=, etc., refer to the

formations in which the platoons, companies, battalions, etc., each in

column of squads, are in line. (19)

=69. Full distance in column of subdivisions; guide of leading

subdivision charged with step and direction.= Full distance in column

of subdivisions is such that in forming line to the right or left the

subdivisions will have their proper intervals.

In column of subdivisions the guide of the leading subdivision is

charged with the step and direction; the guides in rear preserve the

trace, step, and distance. (20)

=70. Double rank, habitual close order formation; uniformity of

interval between files obtained by placing hand on hip.= In close

order, all details, detachments, and other bodies of troops are

habitually formed in double rank.

To insure uniformity of interval between files when falling in, and in

alignments, each man places the palm of the left hand upon the hip,

fingers pointing downward. In the first case, the hand is dropped by

the side when the next man on the left has his interval; in the second

case, at the command front. (21)

=71. Posts of officers, noncommissioned officers, and special units;

duties of file closers.= The posts of officers, noncommissioned

officers, special units (such as band or machine-gun company), etc.,

in the various formations of the company, battalion, or regiment, are

shown in plates.

In all changes from one formation to another involving a change of

post on the part of any of these, posts are promptly taken by the most

convenient route as soon as practicable after the command of execution

for the movement; officers and noncommissioned officers who have

prescribed duties in connection with the movement ordered, take their

new posts when such duties are completed.

As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go wherever

their presence is necessary. As file closers it is their duty to

rectify mistakes and insure steadiness and promptness in the ranks.

(22)

=72. Special units have no fixed posts except at ceremonies.=

Except at ceremonies, the special units have no fixed places. They

take places as directed; in the absence of directions, they conform as

nearly as practicable to the plates, and in subsequent movements

maintain their relative positions with respect to the flank or end of

the command on which they were originally posted. (23)

[Illustration]

=73. General, field and staff officers habitually mounted; formation

of staff; drawing and returning saber.= General, field, and staff

officers are habitually mounted. The staff of any officer forms in

single rank, 3 paces in rear of him, the right of the rank extending 1

pace to the right of a point directly in rear of him. Members of the

staff are arranged in order from right to left as follows: General

staff officers, adjutant, aids, other staff officers, arranged in each

classification in order of rank, the senior on the right. The flag of

the general officer and the orderlies are 3 paces in rear of the

staff, the flag on the right. When necessary to reduce the front of

the staff and orderlies, each line executes =twos right or fours

right=, as explained in the Cavalry Drill Regulations, and follows the

commander.

When not otherwise prescribed, staff officers draw and return saber

with their chief. (24)

=74. Mounted officer turns to left in executing about; when commander

faces about to give commands, staff and others stand fast.= In making

the about, an officer, mounted, habitually turns to the left.

When the commander faces to give commands, the staff, flag, and

orderlies do not change position. (25)

=75. Saluting when making and receiving reports; saluting on meeting.=

When making or receiving official reports, or on meeting out of doors,

all officers will salute.

Military courtesy requires the junior to salute first, but when the

salute is introductory to a report made at a military ceremony or

formation, to the representative of a common superior (as, for

example, to the adjutant, officer of the day, etc.), the officer

making the report, whatever his rank, will salute first; the officer

to whom the report is made will acknowledge by saluting that he has

received and understood the report. (26)

=76. Formation of mounted enlisted men for ceremonies.= For

ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of a regiment or smaller unit,

except those belonging to the machine-gun organizations, are

consolidated into a detachment; the senior present commands if no

officer is in charge. The detachment is formed as a platoon or squad

of cavalry in line or column of fours; noncommissioned staff officers

are on the right or in the leading ranks. (27)

=77. Post of dismounted noncommissioned staff officers for

ceremonies.= For ceremonies, such of the noncommissioned staff

officers as are dismounted are formed 5 paces in rear of the color, in

order of rank from right to left. In column of squads they march as

file closers. (28)

=78. Post of noncommissioned staff officers and orderlies other than

for ceremonies.= Other than for ceremonies, noncommissioned staff

officers and orderlies accompany their immediate chiefs unless

otherwise directed. If mounted, the noncommissioned staff officers are

ordinarily posted on the right or at the head of the orderlies. (29)

=79. Noncommissioned officer commanding platoon or company, carrying

of piece and taking of post.= In all formations and movements a

noncommissioned officer commanding a platoon or company carries his

piece as the men do, if he is so armed, and takes the same post as an

officer in like situation. When the command is formed in line for

ceremonies, a noncommissioned officer commanding a company takes post

on the right of the right guide after the company has been aligned.

(30)

ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS

=80. When commands, signals, and orders are used.= =Commands= only are

employed in drill at attention. Otherwise either a =command, signal,

or order= is employed, as best suits the occasion, or one may be used

in conjunction with another. (31)

=81. Instruction in use of signals; use of headdress, etc., in making

signals.= =Signals= should be freely used in instruction, in order

that officers and men may readily know them. In making arm signals,

the saber, rifle, or headdress may be held in the hand. (32)

=82. Fixing of attention; a signal includes command of preparation and

of execution.= Officers and men fix their attention at the first word

of command, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first

motion of the signal. A signal includes both the preparatory command

and the command of execution; the movement commences as soon as the

signal is understood, unless otherwise prescribed. (33)

=83. Repeating orders, commands and signals; officers, platoon

leaders, guides and musicians equipped with whistles; whistles with

different tones.= Except in movements executed at =attention=,

commanders or leaders of subdivisions repeat orders, commands, or

signals whenever such repetition is deemed necessary to insure

=prompt= and correct execution.

Officers, battalion noncommissioned staff officers, platoon leaders,

guides, and musicians are equipped with whistles.

The Major and his staff will use a whistle of distinctive tone; the

captain and company musicians a second and distinctive whistle; the

platoon leaders and guides a third distinctive whistle. (34)

=84. Limitation of prescribed signals; special prearranged signals.=

Prescribed signals are limited to such as are essential as a

substitute for the voice under conditions which render the voice

inadequate.

Before or during an engagement special signals may be agreed upon to

facilitate the solution of such special difficulties as the particular

situation is likely to develop, but it must be remembered that

simplicity and certainty are indispensable qualities of a signal. (35)

Orders

=85. Orders defined; when employed.= In these regulations an =order=

embraces instructions or directions given orally or in writing in

terms suited to the particular occasion and not prescribed herein.

=Orders= are employed only when the =commands= prescribed herein do

not sufficiently indicate the will of the commander.

Orders are more fully described in paragraphs 378 to 383, inclusive.

(36)

Commands

=86. Command defined.= In these regulations a =command= is the will of

the commander expressed in the phraseology prescribed herein. (37)

=87. Kinds of commands; how given.= There are two kinds of commands:

The =preparatory= command, such as =forward=, indicates the movement

that is to be executed.

The command of =execution=, such as =MARCH=, =HALT=, or =ARMS=, causes

the execution.

=Preparatory= commands are distinguished by =italics=; those of

execution by =CAPITALS=.

Where it is not mentioned in the text who gives the commands

prescribed, they are to be given by the commander of the unit

concerned.

The =preparatory= command should be given at such an interval of time

before the command of =execution= as to admit of being properly

understood; the command of =execution= should be given at the instant

the movement is to commence.

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness

proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.

Each =preparatory= command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising

inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of

=execution= may be more energetic.

The command of =execution= is firm in tone and brief. (38)

=88. Battalion and higher commanders repeat commands of superiors;

battalion largest unit executing movement at command of its

commander.= Majors and commanders of units larger than a battalion

repeat such commands of their superiors as are to be executed by their

units, facing their units for that purpose. The battalion is the

largest unit that executes a movement at the command of execution of

its commander. (39)

=89. Facing troops and avoiding indifference when giving commands.=

When giving commands to troops it is usually best to face toward them.

Indifference in giving commands must be avoided as it leads to laxity

in execution. Commands should be given with spirit at all times. (40)

Bugle Signals

=90. Bugle signals that may be used on and off the field of battle.=

The authorized bugle signals are published in Part V of these

regulations.

The following bugle signals may be used off the battlefield, when not

likely to convey information to the enemy:

=Attention:= Troops are brought to attention.

=Attention to orders:= Troops to fix their attention.

=Forward, march:= Used also to execute quick time from double time.

=Double time, march.=

=To the rear, march:= In close order, execute =squads right about=.

=Halt.=

=Assemble, march.=

The following bugle signals may be used on the battlefield:

=Fix bayonets.=

=Charge.=

=Assemble, march.=

These signals are used only when intended for the entire firing line;

hence they can be authorized only by the commander of a unit (for

example, a regiment or brigade) which occupies a distinct section of

the battlefield. Exception: =Fix bayonet.= (See par. 355.)

The following bugle signals are used in exceptional cases on the

battlefield. Their principal uses are in field exercises and practice

firing.

=Commence firing:= Officers charged with fire direction and control

open fire as soon as practicable. When given to a firing line, the

signal is equivalent to =fire at will=.

=Cease firing:= All parts of the line execute =cease firing= at once.

These signals are not used by units smaller than a regiment, except

when such unit is independent or detached from its regiment. (41)

Whistle Signals

=91. Attention to orders.= A =short blast= of the whistle. This signal

is used on the march or in combat when necessary to fix the attention

of troops, or of their commanders or leaders, preparatory to giving

commands, orders, or signals.

When the firing line is firing, each squad leader suspends firing and

fixes his attention at a =short blast= of his platoon leader's

whistle. The platoon leader's subsequent commands or signals are

repeated and enforced by the squad leader. If a squad leader's

attention is attracted by a whistle other than that of his platoon

leader, or if there are no orders or commands to convey to his squad,

he resumes firing at once.

=Suspend firing.= A =long blast= of the whistle. All other whistle

signals are prohibited. (42)

Arm Signals

=92.= The following arm signals are prescribed. In making signals

either arm may be used. Officers who receive signals on the firing

line "repeat back" at once to prevent misunderstanding.

[Illustration]

=Forward, MARCH.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; straighten and hold

the arm horizontally, thrusting it in the direction of march.

This signal is also used to execute quick time from double time.

[Illustration]

=Halt.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; thrust the hand upward and

hold the arm vertically.

=Double time, MARCH.= Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly thrust

the hand upward the full extent of the arm several times.

[Illustration]

=Squads right, MARCH.= Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry

it to a vertical position above the head and swing it several times

between the vertical and horizontal positions.

[Illustration]

=Squads left, MARCH.= Raise the arm laterally until horizontal; carry

it downward to the side and swing it several times between the

downward and horizontal positions.

[Illustration]

=Squads right about, MARCH= (if in close order) or, =To the rear,

MARCH= (if in skirmish line). Extend the arm vertically above the

head; carry it laterally downward to the side and swing it several

times between the vertical and downward positions.

[Illustration]

=Change direction or Column right (left), MARCH.= The hand on the side

toward which the change of direction is to be made is carried across

the body to the opposite shoulder, forearm horizontal; then swing in a

horizontal plane, arm extended, pointing in the new direction.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally until horizontal.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, guide center, MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally until

horizontal; swing both simultaneously upward until vertical and return

to the horizontal; repeat several times.

[Illustration]

=As skirmishers, guide right (left), MARCH.= Raise both arms laterally

until horizontal; hold the arm on the side of the guide steadily in

the horizontal position: swing the other upward until vertical and

return it to the horizontal; repeat several times.

[Illustration]

=Assemble, March.= Raise the arm vertically to full extent and

describe horizontal circles.

[Illustration]

=Range or Change elevation.= To announce range, extend the arm toward

the leaders or men for whom the signal is intended, fist closed; by

keeping the fist closed battle sight is indicated;

[Illustration]

by opening and closing the fist, expose thumb and fingers to a number

equal to the hundreds of yards;

[Illustration]

to add yards describe a short horizontal line with forefinger.

[Illustration]

=To change elevation=, indicate the =amount of increase or decrease=

by fingers as above; point upward to indicate increase and downward to

indicate decrease.

[Illustration]

=What range are you using?= or =What is the range?= Extend the arms

toward the person addressed, one hand open, palm to the front, resting

on the other hand, fist closed.

[Illustration]

=Are you ready?= or =I am ready.= Raise the hand, fingers extended and

joined, palm toward the person addressed.

[Illustration]

=Commence firing.= Move the arm extended in full length, hand palm

down, several times through a horizontal arc in front of the body.

=Fire faster.= Execute rapidly the signal, "Commence Firing."

=Fire slower.= Execute slowly the signal, "Commence Firing."

[Illustration]

=Swing the cone of fire to the right, or left.= Extend the arm in full

length to the front, palm to the right (left); swing the arm to right

(left), and point in the direction of the new target.

[Illustration]

=Fix Bayonet.= Simulate the movement of the right hand in "Fix

bayonet." (See par. 142.)

[Illustration]

=Suspend firing.= Raise and hold the forearm steadily in a horizontal

position in front of the forehead, palm of the hand to the front.

=Cease firing.= Raise the forearm as in =suspend firing= and swing it

up and down several times in front of the face.

[Illustration]

=Platoon.= Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader;

describe small circles with the hand. (See par. 93.)

[Illustration]

=Squad.= Extend the arm horizontally toward the platoon leader; swing

the hand up and down from the wrist. (See par. 93.)

=Rush.= Same as =double time=. (43)

=93. Use of signals "platoon" and "squad."= The signals =platoon= and

=squad= are intended primarily for communication between the captain

and his platoon leaders. The signal platoon or squad indicates that

the platoon commander is to cause the signal which follows to be

executed by platoon or squad.

=Note.=--The following signals, while not prescribed, are very

convenient:

=Combined Sights.= Extend the arm toward the leaders for whom the

signal is intended, hand open and turn hand rapidly from right to left

a number of times. Then indicate ranges in the manner prescribed,

giving the mean of the two ranges. (For example: If the combined

sights are 1050 and 1150, indicate a range of 1100 yards. The leaders

who give the oral commands, give the command, "Range 1050 and 1150,"

whereupon every man in the front rank, before deployment, fixes his

sight at 1150, and every man in the rear rank, before deployment,

fixes his sight at 1050.)

=Company.= Bring the hand up near the shoulder and then thrust to the

front, snapping fingers in usual way; repeat several times.

=Contract fire.= Extend both arms horizontally, fingers extended, arms

parallel, palms facing each other; bring hands together =once=, and

hold them so and look at the leader concerned.

=Disperse fire.= Bring hands together, fingers extended, pointing in

direction of leader concerned, arms extended horizontally; swing arms

outward once, and hold them so and look at the leader concerned.

=Platoon column.= Raise both arms vertically, full length, arms

parallel, fingers joined and extended, palms to the front.

=Prepare to rush.= Cross the arms horizontally several times.

=Squad Column.= Raise both arms vertically from elbows, elbows at side

of body, fingers joined and extended, palms to the front.--Author.

(44)

Flag Signals

=94. Signal flags carried by company musicians; description of flags.=

The signal Hags described below are carried by the company musicians

in the field.

In a regiment in which it is impracticable to make the permanent

battalion division alphabetically, the flags of a battalion are as

shown; flags are assigned to the companies alphabetically, within

their respective battalions, in the order given below.

First battalion:

Company A. Red field, white square.

Company B. Red field, blue square.

Company C. Red field, white diagonals.

Company D. Red field, blue diagonals.

Second battalion:

Company E. White field, red square.

Company F. White field, blue square.

Company G. White field, red diagonals.

Company H. White field, blue diagonals.

Third battalion:

Company I. Blue field, red square.

Company K. Blue field, white square.

Company L. Blue field, red diagonals.

Company M. Blue field, white diagonals.

=Note.=--An analysis of the above system of signal flags will

show: 1. The color of the field indicates the battalion and the

colors run in the order that is so natural to us all, viz: =Red=,

=White= and =Blue=. Hence =red= field indicates the =first=

battalion; =white= field, the =second=; =blue= field, the =third=.

2. The =squares= indicate the first two companies of each

battalion, and the =diagonals=, the second two. Hence,

+-----------+----------------+

| Companies | Indicated by |

|-----------+----------------+

| A | E | I | Squares |

| B | F | K | |

|-----------+----------------+

| C | G | L | Diagonals |

| D | H | M | |

+-----------+----------------+

3. The colors of the squares and diagonals in combination with

those of the fields, run in the order that is so natural to us

all, viz.: =Red=, =White= and =Blue=, the color of any given field

being, of course, omitted from the squares and diagonals, as a

white square for instance, would not show on a white field, nor

would a blue diagonal show on a blue field. For example, with a

=red= field we would have =white= and =blue= for the square and

diagonal colors; with a =white= field, =red= and =blue= for the

square and diagonal colors; with a =blue= field, =red= and =white=

for the square and diagonal colors.

4. From what has been said, the following table explains itself:

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

| First | Red | A | White | |

| | | B | Blue | |

| | | C | | White |

| | | D | | Blue |

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

| Second | White | E | Red | |

| | | F | Blue | |

| | | G | | Red |

| | | H | | Blue |

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

| Third | Blue | I | Red | |

| | | K | White | |

| | | L | | Red |

| | | M | | White |

+-----------+-------+-----+---------+-----------+

Note how the square and diagonal colors always follow in the

natural order of =red=, =white=, and =blue=, with the color of the

field omitted.--Author. (45)

=95. Signal flags used to mark assembly point of company, etc.= In

addition to their use in visual signaling, these flags serve to mark

the assembly point of the company when disorganized by combat, and to

mark the location of the company in bivouac and elsewhere, when such

use is desirable. (46)

=96. Signals used between firing line and reserve or commander in

rear.= (1) For communication between the firing line and the reserve

or commander in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal Corps codes)

are prescribed and should be memorized. In transmission, their

concealment from the enemy's view should be insured. In the absence of

signal flags, the headdress or other substitute may be used. (See par.

863 for the semaphore code and par. 861 for the General Service, or

International Morse Code.) (47)

---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------

Letter of | If signaled from the rear | If signaled from the firing

alphabet | to the firing line | line to the rear

---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------

A M | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required.

| |

C C C | Charge (mandatory at all | Am about to charge if no

| times). | instructions to the

| | contrary.

| |

C F | Cease firing. | Cease firing.

| |

D T | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush."

| |

F | Commence firing. | Commence firing.

| |

F B | Fix bayonets. | Fix bayonets.

| |

F L | Artillery fire is causing | Artillery fire is causing

| us losses. | us losses.

| |

G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward.

| |

H H H | Halt. | Halt.

| |

K | Negative. | Negative.

| |

L T | Left. | Left.

| |

O | What is the (R. N. etc.)? | What is the (R. N. etc.)?

(Ardois and | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.

semaphore | |

only.) | |

---------------| |

(All methods | What is the (R. N. etc.)? | What is the (R. N. etc.)?

but ardois | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory.

and semaphore.)| |

| |

P | Affirmative. | Affirmative.

| |

R | Acknowledgment. | Acknowledgment.

| |

R N | Range. | Range.

| |

R T | Right. | Right.

| |

S S S | Support going forward. | Support needed.

| |

S U F | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing.

| |

T | Target. | Target.

---------------+---------------------------+----------------------------

For the semaphore signals, see par. 863.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER

=97. Duties of instructor.= The instructor explains briefly each

movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the

recruits to take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch

them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable

to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same

movement, although each should be understood before passing to

another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity.

(48)

=98. Grouping of recruits according to proficiency.= In order that all

may advance as rapidly as their abilities permit, the recruits are

grouped according to proficiency as instruction progresses. Those who

lack aptitude and quickness are separated from the others and placed

under experienced drill masters. (49)

Instruction Without Arms

=98a. Formation of squad for preliminary instruction.= For preliminary

instruction a number of recruits, usually not exceeding three or four,

are formed as a squad in single rank. (50)

Position of the Soldier, or Attention

=99.= Heels on the same line and as near each other as the

conformation of the man permits.

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 deg..

=Knees straight without stiffness.=

Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on

hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.

Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the

trousers.

Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis

of the head and neck is vertical; eyes straight to the front.

Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the

feet. (51)

The Rests

=100.= Being at a halt, the commands are: =FALL OUT; REST; AT EASE=;

and, =1. Parade, 2. REST=.

At the command =fall out=, the men may leave the ranks, but are

required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former

places, at attention, at the command =fall in=.

At the command =rest= each man keeps one foot in place, but is not

required to preserve silence or immobility.

At the command =at ease= each man keeps one foot in place and is

required to preserve silence but =not= immobility. (52)

[Illustration]

=101. 1. Parade, 2. REST.= Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to

the rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without

constraint, in front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left

hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the

right hand; preserve silence and steadiness of position. (53)

=102.= To resume the attention: =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

The men take the position of the soldier. (54)

Eyes Right or Left

=103. 1. Eyes, 2. RIGHT (LEFT), 3. FRONT.=

[Illustration]

At the command =right=, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed

on the line of eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in, the same

rank. At the command =front=, turn the head and eyes to the front.

(55)

Facings

=104. To the flank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE.=

Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning

on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the

left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is

executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.

=Right (left) half face= is executed similarly, facing 45 deg..

"To face in marching" and advance, turn on the ball of either foot and

step off with the other foot in the new line of direction; to face in

marching without gaining ground in the new direction, turn on the ball

of either foot and mark time. (56)

=105.= To the rear: =1. About, 2. FACE.=

Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot-length to the rear

and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the

position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on

the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the

left. (57)

Salute with the Hand

=106. 1. Hand, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches

the lower part of the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb

and fingers extended and joined palm to the left, forearm inclined at

about 45 deg., hand and wrist straight; =at the same time look toward the

person saluted=. (=TWO=) Drop the arm smartly by the side. (58)

(For rules governing salutes, see "Military Courtesy," Chapter XI,

Part II.)

Steps and Marchings

=107. Steps and marchings begin with left foot.= All steps and

marchings executed from a halt, except right step, begin with the left

foot. (59)

=108. Length and cadence of full step; indicating cadence.= The length

of the full step in quick time is 30 inches, measured from heel to

heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 steps per minute.

The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence

is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.

The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by

calling =one, two, three, four=, or =left, right=, the instant the

left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. (60)

=109. Steps and marchings and movements involving marchings habitually

executed in quick time.= All steps and marchings and movements

involving march are executed in =quick time= unless the squad be

marching in =double time=, or =double time= be added to the command;

in the latter case double time is added to the preparatory command.

Example: =1. Squad right, double time, 2. MARCH= (School of the

Squad). (61)

Quick Time

=110.= Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: =1. Forward,

2. MARCH.=

At the command =forward=, shift the weight of the body to the right

leg, left knee straight.

At the command =march=, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30

inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without

shock; next in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as

above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. (62)

=111.= Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in double

time: =1. Double time, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the

right leg. At the command =march=, raise the forearms, fingers closed,

to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run

with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging

motion to the arms.

If marching in quick time, at the command march, given as either foot

strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step off in

double time. (63)

To resume the quick time: =1. Quick time, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,

advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick

time, dropping the hands by the sides. (64)

To Mark Time

=112.= Being in march: =1. Mark time, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,

advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and

continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches

and planting it on line with the other.

Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as

described above. (65)

The Half Step

=113. 1. Half step, 2. MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. (66)

=Forward=, =half step=, =halt=, and =mark time= may be executed one

from the other in quick or double time.

To resume the full step from half step or mark time: =1. Forward, 2.

MARCH.= (67)

Side Step

=114.= Being at a halt or mark time: =1. Right (left) step, 2. MARCH.=

Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left

foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.

The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in

double time.

If at order arms, the side step is executed at trail without command.

(68)

Back Step

=115.= Being at a halt or mark time: =1. Backward, 2. MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.

The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in

double time.

If at order arms, the back step is executed at trail without command.

(69)

To Halt

=116.= To arrest the march in quick or double time: =1. Squad, 2.

HALT.=

At the command =halt=, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant

the other foot as in marching; raise and place the first foot by the

side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.

(70)

To March by the Flank

=117.= Being in march: =1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground,

advance and plant the left foot; then face to the right in marching

and step off in the new direction with the right foot. (71)

To March to the Rear

=118.= Being in march: =1. To the rear, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= given as the right foot strikes the ground

advance and plant the left foot; turn to the right about on the balls

of both feet and immediately step off with the left foot.

If marching in double time, turn to the right about, taking four steps

in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.

(72)

Change Step

=119.= Being in march: =1. Change step, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground,

advance and plant the left foot; plant the toe of the right foot near

the heel of the left and step off with the left foot.

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command march

being given as the left foot strikes the ground. (73)

MANUAL OF ARMS

=120. Instruction of recruit in use of rifle, manual of arms, etc.= As

soon as practicable the recruit is taught the use, nomenclature, and

care of his rifle. (See "The Care, Description, and Management of the

Rifle," Chapter XIV, Part II.); when fair progress has been made in

the instruction without arms, he is taught the manual of arms;

instruction without arms and that with arms alternate. (74)

=121. Rules governing carrying of piece.= The following rules

governing the carrying of the piece:

First. =Piece habitually carried without cartridges in chamber or

magazine.= The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the

chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so

loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked;

that is, with the =safety lock= turned to the "safe." At all other

times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.

Second. =Inspection of pieces when troops are formed and when

dismissed.= Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are

immediately inspected at the commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3.

Order (Right shoulder port), 4. ARMS=, which are executed as explained

in pars. 145-146.

A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed

and placed in the belt.

Third. =Cut-off habitually turned "off."= The cut-off is kept turned

"off" except when cartridges are actually used.

Fourth. =Bayonet habitually not carried fixed.= The bayonet is not

fixed (See par. 142), except in bayonet exercise, on guard, or for

combat.

Fifth. ="Fall in" executed at order; "attention" resumed at order.=

Fall in is executed with the piece at the order arms. =Fall out=,

=rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms, as explained in

par. 100. On resuming =attention= the position of order arms is taken.

Sixth. =If at order, pieces brought to right shoulder at command

"march"; execution of movements at trail; piece brought to trail in

certain movements executed from order.= If at the order, unless

otherwise prescribed, the piece is brought to the right shoulder at

the command march, the three motions corresponding with the first

three steps. Movements may be executed at the trail by prefacing the

preparatory command with the words =at trail=; as, =1. At trail,

forward, 2. MARCH=; the trail is taken at the command =march=.

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or

distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece

to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.

Seventh. =Piece brought to order on halting.= The piece is brought to

the order on halting. The execution of the order begins when the halt

is completed.

Eighth. =Holding disengaged hand in double time.= A disengaged hand in

double time is held as when without arms. (75)

=122. Rules governing manual of arms.= The following rules govern the

execution of the manual of arms:

First. =Position of left hand at balance.= In all positions of the

left hand at the balance (center of gravity, bayonet unfixed) the

thumb clasps the piece; the sling is included in the grasp of the

hand.

Second. =Positions of piece "diagonally across the body."= In all

positions of the piece "diagonally across the body" the position of

the piece, left arm and hand are the same as in port arms. (See par.

125.)

[Illustration]

Third. =Next to last motion in resuming order from any position; piece

to strike ground gently.= In resuming the order from any position in

the manual, the motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the

piece about 3 inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left

hand above and near the right, steadying the piece, fingers extended

and joined, forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all

fingers of the right hand grasping the piece. To complete the order,

lower the piece gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the

left quickly by the side, and take the position of order arms.

Allowing the piece to drop through the right hand to the ground, or

other similar abuse of the rifle to produce effect in executing the

manual is prohibited.

Fourth. =Cadence of motions; at first attention to be paid to details

of motion.= The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the

recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the

details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they

become accustomed to handling their pieces. The instructor may require

them to count aloud in cadence with the motions.

Fifth. =Execution of manual "by the numbers."= The manual is taught at

a halt and the movements are for the purpose of instruction, divided

into motions and executed in detail; in this case the command of

=execution= determines the prompt execution of the first motion, and

the commands, =two, three, four=, that of the other motions.

To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: =By

the numbers=; all movements divided into motions are then executed as

above explained until he cautions: =Without the numbers=; or commands

movements other than those in the manual of arms.

Sixth. =Regular positions assumed without regard to previous

positions; carrying rifle in any position.= Whenever circumstances

require, the regular positions of the manual of arms and the firings

may be ordered without regard to the previous position of the piece.

Under the exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may

be carried in any manner directed. (76)

[Illustration]

=123. Position of order arms standing:= The butt rests evenly on the

ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and

touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand

holding the piece between the thumb and fingers. (77)

=124.= Being at order arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand carry the piece in front of the center of the

body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at

the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (=TWO=)

Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (78)

=125.= Being at order arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the

body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the

small of the stock: the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,

sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck

with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting

against the body; the piece in a vertical plane parallel to the front.

(79)

=126.= Being at present arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Carry the piece =diagonally across= the body and take the position of

port arms. (80)

=127.= Being at port arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

Carry the piece to a vertical position in front of the center of the

body and take the position of present arms. (81)

=128.= Being at present or port arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the piece to the right

with the left hand: regrasp it with the right hand just above the

lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last

position in coming to the order. (=TWO=) Complete the order. (82)

=129.= Being at order arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

With the right hand raise and throw the piece diagonally across the

body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel

between the first two fingers. (=TWO=) Without changing the grasp of

the right hand, place the piece on the right shoulder, barrel up and

inclined at an angle of about 45 deg. from the horizontal, trigger guard

in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the piece in

a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,

thumb and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip

of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow

down. (=THREE=) Drop the left hand by the side. (83)

=130.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the

body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (=TWO=),

(=THREE=) Execute order arms as described from port arms. (84)

=131.= Being at port arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

Change the right hand to the butt. (=TWO=), (=THREE=) As in right

shoulder arms from order arms. (85)

=132.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the piece diagonally across the

body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (=TWO=) Change

the right hand to the small of the stock. (86)

=133.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Present, 2. ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=THREE=) execute present arms. (87)

=134.= Being at present arms: =1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=TWO=), (=THREE=), (=FOUR=) Execute right shoulder

arms as from port arms. (88)

=135.= Being at port arms: =1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

Carry the piece with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,

barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same

time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second

fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (=TWO=) Drop the right

hand by the side.

=136.= Being at left shoulder arms: =1. Port, 2. ARMS.=

Grasp the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. (=TWO=)

Carry the piece to the right with the right hand, =regrasp= it with

the left, and take the position of port arms.

=Left shoulder arms= may be ordered directly from the order, right

shoulder or present, or the reverse. At the command =arms= execute

port arms and continue in cadence to the position ordered. (89)

=137.= Being at order arms: =1. Parade, 2. REST.=

[Illustration]

Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly

bent; carry the muzzle in front of the center of the body, barrel to

the left; grasp the piece with the left hand just below the stacking

swivel, and with the right hand below and against the left.

=138.= Being at parade rest: =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

Resume the order, the left hand quitting the piece opposite the right

hip. (90)

=139.= Being at order arms: =1. Trail, 2. ARMS.=

[Illustration]

Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle

forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30 deg. with the

vertical.

When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the

piece may be grasped at the balance and the muzzle lowered until the

piece is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.

(91)

=140.= Being at trail arms: =1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Lower the piece with the right hand and resume the order. (92)

Rifle Salute

=141.= Being at right shoulder arms: =1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm

horizontal, palm of hand down, thumb and fingers extended and joined,

forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the person

saluted. (=TWO=) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes to the

front. (93)

Being at order or trail arms: =1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.=

[Illustration]

Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,

thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against piece near

the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop the left hand

by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front.

For rules governing salutes, see "Military Courtesy," Chapter XI, Part

II.

The Bayonet

=142.= Being at order arms: =1. Fix, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;

grasp the bayonet with the right hand, back of hand toward the body;

draw the bayonet from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel, glancing

at the muzzle; resume the order.

If the bayonet is carried on the haversack: Draw the bayonet with the

left hand and fix it in the most convenient manner. (95)

=143.= Being at our arms: =1. Unfix, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;

grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing

the spring with the forefinger of the right hand; raise the bayonet

until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece;

drop the point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and,

glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing

between the left arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right

hand and resume the order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet

from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the

most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the

most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the

original position.

=Fix= and =unfix= bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity

but not in cadence. (For unfixing bayonet with Krag rifle, see Par.

697.) (96)

=144. CHARGE BAYONET.= Whether executed at halt or in motion, the

bayonet is held toward the opponent as in the position of =guard= in

the Manual for Bayonet Exercise.

Exercises for instruction in bayonet combat are prescribed in the

Manual for Bayonet Exercise. (97)

The Inspection

[Illustration]

=145.= Being at order arms: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS.=

At the second command take the position of port arms. (=TWO=) Seize

the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn

the handle up, draw the bolt back, and glance at the chamber. Having

found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes

to the front. (For inspection of arms with Krag rifle see par. 698.)

(98)

=146.= Being at inspection arms: =1. Order (Right shoulder, port), 2.

ARMS.=

At the preparatory command push the bolt forward, turn the handle

down, pull the trigger, and resume =port arms=. At the command =arms=,

complete the movement ordered. (To execute with Krag rifle see par.

699.) (99)

To Dismiss the Squad

=147.= Being at halt: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5.

DISMISSED.= (100)

SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD

=148. Grouping into Squads.= Soldiers are grouped into squads for

purposes of instruction, discipline, control, and order. (101)

=149. Composition of squad; object of squad movements.= The squad

proper consists of a corporal and seven privates.

The movements in the School of the Squad are designed to make the

squad a fixed unit and to facilitate the control and movement of the

company. If the number of men grouped is more than 3 and less than 12,

they are formed as a squad of 4 files, the excess above 8 being posted

as file closers. If the number grouped is greater than 11, 2 or more

squads are formed and the group is termed a platoon.

For the instruction of recruits, these rules may be modified. (102)

=150. Squad leader; his post.= The corporal is the squad leader, and

when absent is replaced by a designated private. If no private is

designated, the senior in length of service acts as leader.

The corporal, when in ranks, is posted as the left man in the front

rank of the squad.

When the corporal leaves the ranks to lead his squad, his rear rank

man steps into the front rank, and the file remains blank until the

corporal returns to his place in ranks, when his rear rank man steps

back into the rear rank. (103)

=151. Preservation of integrity of squads in battle.= In battle

officers and sergeants endeavor to preserve the integrity of squads;

they designate new leaders to replace those disabled, organize new

squads when necessary, and see that every man is placed in a squad.

Men are taught the necessity of remaining with the squad to which they

belong and, in case it be broken up or they become separated

therefrom, to attach themselves to the nearest squad and platoon

leaders, whether these be of their own or of another organization.

(104)

=152. Certain movements executed by squad as in School of the

Soldier.= The squad executes the =halt= (See par. 116), =rests= (See

par. 100-101), =facings= (See pars. 104-105), =steps and marchings=

(See pars. 107-119), and the =manual of arms= (See pars. 120-147), as

explained in the School of the Soldier. (105)

To Form the Squad

=153.= To form the squad the instructor places himself 3 paces in

front of where the center is to be and commands: =FALL IN.=

The men assemble at attention, pieces at the order, and are arranged

by the corporal in double rank, as nearly as practicable in order of

height from right to left, each man dropping his left hand as soon as

the man in his left has his interval. The rear rank forms with

distance of 40 inches.

The instructor then commands: =COUNT OFF.=

At this command all except the right file execute eyes right, and

beginning on the right, the men in each rank count =one, two, three,

four=; each man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts.

Pieces are then inspected. (106)

Alignments

=154.= To align the squad, the base file or files having been

established: =1. Right (Left), 2. DRESS, 3. FRONT.=

At the command front, given when the ranks are aligned, each hip

(whether dressing to the right or left); each man, except the base

file, when on or near the new line executes =eyes right=, and taking

steps of 2 or 3 inches, places himself so that his right arm rests

lightly against the arm of the man on his right, and so that his eyes

and shoulders are in line with those of the men on his right; the rear

rank men cover in file.

The instructor verifies the alignment of both ranks from the right

flank and orders up or back such men as may be in rear, or in advance,

of the line; only the men designated move.

At the command =dress= all men place the left hand upon the man turns

his head and eyes to the front and drops his left hand by his side.

In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on, or

parallel to, the front of the squad; afterwards, in oblique

directions.

Whenever the position of the base file or files necessitates a

considerable movement by the squad, such movement will be executed by

marching to the front or oblique, to the flank or backward, as the

case may be, without other command, and at the trail. (107)

=155.= To preserve the alignment when marching: =GUIDE RIGHT (LEFT).=

The men preserve their intervals from the side of the guide, yielding

to pressure from that side and resisting pressure from the opposite

direction; they recover intervals, if lost, by gradually opening out

or closing in; they recover alignment by slightly lengthening or

shortening the step; the rear-rank men cover their file leaders at 40

inches.

In double rank, the front-rank man on the right, or designated flank,

conducts the march; when marching faced to the flank, the leading man

of the front rank is the guide. (108)

To Take Intervals and Distances

=156.= Being in line at a halt: =1. Take interval, 2. To the right

(left), 3. MARCH, 4. Squad, 5. HALT.=

[Illustration]

Being in line at a halt.

=1. Take interval, 2. To the right (left)=

[Illustration]

At the second command the rear-rank men march backward 4 steps and

halt;

=3. MARCH=

[Illustration]

At the command =march= all face to the right and the leading man of

each rank steps off; the other men step off in succession, each

following the preceding man at 4 paces, rear-rank men marching abreast

of their file leaders.

=4. Squad, 5. HALT=

[Illustration]

At the command =halt=, given when all have their intervals, all halt

and face to the front. (109)

[Illustration: (AT INTERVALS)]

=157. Being at intervals, to assemble the squad:=

=1. Assemble, to the right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: (ASSEMBLE)]

The front-rank man on the right stands fast, the rear rank man on the

right closes to 40 inches. The other men face to the right, close by

the shortest line, and face to the front. (110)

[Illustration: (ASSEMBLED)]

=158.= Being in line at a halt and having counted off: =1. Take

distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration]

At the command =March= No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the

front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front rank and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of

the rear rank, in the order named, move straight to the front, each

stepping off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command

=halt= is given when all have their distances.

In case more than one squad is in line, each squad executes the

movement as above. The guide of each rank of numbers is right. (111)

=159.= Being at distances, to assemble the squad: =1. Assemble, 2.

MARCH.=

[Illustration]

No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to

their proper places in line. (112)

To Stack and Take Arms

[Illustration]

=160.= Being in line at a halt: =STACK ARMS.= Each =even= number of

the =front= rank grasps his piece with the left hand at the upper

band

[Illustration]

and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, muzzle

inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the interval

on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel;

each =even= number of the =rear= rank then passes his piece, barrel to

the rear, to his file leader, who grasps it between the bands with his

right hand

[Illustration]

and throws the butt about 2 feet in advance of that of his own piece

and opposite the right of the interval, the right hand slipping to the

upper band, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel,

which he engages with that of his own piece;

[Illustration]

each =odd= number of the =front= rank raises his piece with the right

hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front; the left hand,

guiding the stacking swivel,

[Illustration]

engages the lower hook of the swivel of his own piece with the free

hook of that of the even number of the rear rank; he then turns the

barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two pieces and

lowers the butt to the ground, =to the right= and =against the toe= of

his right shoe.

The stacks made, the loose pieces are laid on them by the =even=

numbers of the front rank. When each man has finished handling pieces,

he takes the position of the soldier. (113)

=161.= Being in line behind the stacks: =TAKE ARMS.=

(See preceding illustration.)

The loose pieces are returned by the =even= numbers of the =front=

rank; each even number of the front rank grasps his own piece with the

left hand, the piece of his rear rank man with his right hand,

grasping both between the bands; each =odd= number of the =front= rank

grasps his piece in the same way with the right hand; disengages it by

raising the butt from the ground and then turning the piece to the

right, detaches it from the stack; each =even= number of the front

rank disengages and detaches his piece by turning it to the left,

[Illustration]

and, then passes the piece of his rear-rank man to him, and all resume

the order. (114)

Should any squad have Nos. 2 and 3 blank files, No. 1 rear rank takes

the place of No. 2 rear rank in making and breaking the stack; the

stacks made or broken, he resumes his post.

Pieces not used in making the stacks are termed =loose pieces=.

Pieces are never stacked with the bayonet fixed. (115)

The Oblique March

=162.= For the instruction of recruits, the squad being in column or

correctly aligned, the instructor causes the squad to face half right

or half left, points out to the men their relative positions, and

explains that these are to be maintained in the oblique march. (116)

=163. Right (Left) oblique, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Each man steps off in a direction 45 deg. to the right of his original

front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders

parallel to those of the guide (the man on the right front of the line

or column), and so regulates his steps that the ranks remain parallel

to their original front.

At the command =halt= the men halt faced to front.

To resume the original direction: =1. Forward 2. MARCH.=

The men half face to the left in marching and then move straight to

the front.

If at =halfstep= or =mark time= while obliquing, the oblique march is

resumed by the commands: =1. Oblique, 2. MARCH.= (117)

To Turn on Moving Pivot

=164.= Being in line: =1. Right (Left) turn, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The movement is executed by each rank successively and on the same

ground. At the second command, the pivot man of the front rank faces

to the right in marching and takes the half step; the other men of the

rank oblique to the right until opposite their places in line, then

execute a second right oblique and take the half step on arriving

abreast of the pivot man. All glance toward the marching flank while

at half step and take the full step without command as the last man

arrives on the line.

=Right (Left) half turn= is executed in a similar manner. The pivot

man makes a half change of direction to the right and the other men

make quarter changes in obliquing. (118)

To Turn on Fixed Pivot

=165.= Being in line, to turn and march: =1. Squad right (left), 2.

MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank faces to

the right in marching and marks time; the other front rank men oblique

to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark time. In

the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in column by the

second and first, move straight to the front

[Illustration]

until in rear of his front-rank man,

[Illustration]

when all face to the right in marching and mark time; the other number

of the rear rank moves straight to the front four paces and places

himself abreast of the man on his right. Men on the new line glance

toward the marching flank while marking time and, as the last man

arrives on the line, both ranks execute =forward, MARCH=, without

command. (119)

=166.= Being in line, to turn and halt: =1. Squad right (left), 2.

MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is

executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,

on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is

given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last

man arrives on the line. (120)

=167.= Being in line, to turn about and march: =1. Squad right (left)

about, 2. MARCH.=

At the second command, the front rank twice executes squad right

initiating the second squad right when the man on the marching flank

has arrived abreast of the rank. In the rear rank the third man from

the right, followed by the second and first in column, moves straight

to the front until on the prolongation of the line to be occupied by

the rear rank; changes direction to the right; moves in the new

direction until in rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the

right in marching, mark time, and glance toward the marching flank.

The fourth man marches on the left of the third to his new position;

as he arrives on the line, both ranks execute =forward, MARCH=,

without command. (121)

=168.= Being in line, to turn about and halt: =1. Squad right (left)

about, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.=

The third command is given immediately after the second. The turn is

executed as prescribed in the preceding paragraph except that all men,

on arriving on the new line, mark time until the fourth command is

given, when all halt. The fourth command should be given as the last

man arrives on the line. (122)

To Follow the Corporal

[Illustration: (IN LINE)]

=169.= Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad without

unnecessary commands, the corporal places himself in front of it and

commands: =FOLLOW ME.=

[Illustration: (AS SKIRMISHERS)]

If in line or skirmish line, No. 2 of the front rank follows in the

trace of the corporal at about 3 paces; the other men conform to the

movements of No. 2, guiding on him and maintaining their relative

positions.

[Illustration: (IN COLUMN)]

If in column, the head of the column follows the corporal. (123)

To Deploy as Skirmishers

[Illustration]

=170.= Being in any formation, assembled: =1. As skirmishers, 2.

MARCH.=

The corporal places himself in front of the squad, if not already

there. Moving at a run, the men place themselves abreast of the

corporal at half-pace intervals, Nos. 1 and 2 on his right, Nos. 3

and 4 on his left, rear rank men on the right of their file leaders,

extra men on the left of No. 4; all then conform to the corporal's

gait.

[Illustration]

When the squad is acting alone, skirmish line is similarly formed on

No. 2 of the front rank, who stands fast or continues the march, as

the case may be; the corporal places himself in front of the squad

when advancing and in rear when halted.

[Illustration]

When deployed as skirmishers, the men march at ease, pieces at the

trail unless otherwise ordered.

The corporal is the guide when in the line; otherwise No. 2 front rank

is the guide. (124)

=171.= The normal interval between skirmishers is one-half pace,

resulting practically in one man per yard of front. The front of a

squad thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces. (125)

To Increase or Diminish Intervals

=172.= If assembled, and it is desired to deploy at greater than the

normal interval; or if deployed, and it is desired to increase or

decrease the internal: =1. As skirmishers, (so many) paces, 2. MARCH.=

Intervals are taken at the indicated number of paces. If already

deployed, the men move by the flank toward or away from the guide.

(126)

The Assembly

=173.= Being deployed: =1. Assemble. 2. MARCH.=

The men move toward the corporal and form in their proper places.

If the corporal continues to advance, the men move in double time,

form, and follow him.

The assembly while marching to the rear is not executed. (127)

Kneeling and Lying Down

=174.= If standing: =KNEEL.=

Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left

rear of the left heel; kneel on right knee, sitting as nearly as

possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; piece

remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above lower

band. (128)

[Illustration]

=175.= If standing or kneeling: =LIE DOWN.=

[Illustration]

Kneel, but with right knee against left heel:

[Illustration]

carry back the left foot and lie flat on the belly, inclining body

about 35 deg. to the right

[Illustration]

piece horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the

front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand

grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the

position of order arms, lying down. (129)

=176.= If kneeling or lying down: =RISE.=

If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the

left heel.

If lying down, raise body on both knees; stand up, faced to the front,

on the ground marked by the knees. (130)

=177.= If lying down: =KNEEL.=

Raise the body on both knees; take the position of kneel. (131)

=178.= In double rank, the positions of kneeling and lying down are

ordinarily used only for the better utilization of cover.

When deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken in lieu

of the position kneeling. (132)

Loadings and Firings

=179.= The commands for loading and firing are the same whether

standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at

a halt.

When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank does not

load, aim, or fire.

The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.

Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. (133)

=180.= Pieces having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without

command until the command =unload=, or =inspection arms=, fresh clips

being inserted when the magazine is exhausted. (To execute with Krag

rifle see par. 700.) (134)

=181.= The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may

be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are

indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted

when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such case

battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. (135)

=182.= The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight

setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be

repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.

Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or

target designated, and at the sight setting announced, until a change

is ordered. (136)

=183.= If the men are not already in the position of load, that

position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the

announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command

for firing. (137)

=184.= When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate

firing is discretionary with each man. (138)

To Load

=185.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt:

=1. With dummy (blank or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD.=

[Illustration]

At the command load each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half right

and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such

position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the

body; raises, or lowers, the piece and drops it into the left hand at

the balance, the left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the

height of the breast, and turns the cut-off up.

[Illustration]

With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,

[Illustration]

takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, places the

thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the fingers extending

around the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor plate; forces

the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with the thumb;

without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning down the

handle; turns the safety lock to the "=safe=,"

[Illustration]

and carries the hand to the small of the stock.

[Illustration]

Each rear rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position

opposite the interval to the right of his front rank man, muzzle of

the piece extending beyond the front rank and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly

as practicable in the position of =load=.

[Illustration]

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if

kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh;

[Illustration]

if sitting the elbows are supported by the knees.

[Illustration]

If lying down, the left hand steadies and supports the piece at the

balance, the toe of the butt resting on the ground, the muzzle off the

ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)

are designated as that of =load=. (For Krag rifle as prescribed in

701.) (139)

=186.= For instruction in loading: =1. Simulate, 2. LOAD.=

Executed as above described except that the cut-off remains "off" and

the handling of cartridges is simulated.

The recruits are first taught to =simulate= loading and firing; after

a few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges

may be used. (140)

The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the magazine

"off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while "off" or

"on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they are in the

proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, however, to

be regarded as exceptional. (Explained for Krag rifle in par. 702.)

(141)

To Unload

=187. UNLOAD.=

Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt

alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.

After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first

thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding

it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and

back to engage it under the bolt and then thrusting the bolt home; the

trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and

returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the order. (Explained

in par. 703 for Krag rifle.) (142)

To Set the Sight

=188. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.)=, or =BATTLE SIGHT=.

The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains

and verifies sight settings. (143)

To Fire by Volley

=189. 1. Ready, 2. AIM, 3. Squad, 4. FIRE.=

[Illustration]

At the command =ready= turn the safety lock to the "ready";

[Illustration]

at the command =aim= raise the piece with both hands and support the

butt firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb

clasping the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the

piece, right elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly

forward and a little to the right, cheek against the stock,

[Illustration]

left eye closed, right eye looking through the notch of the rear sight

so as to perceive the object aimed at, second joint of the forefinger

resting lightly against the front of the trigger and taking up the

slack; top of front sight is carefully raised into, and held in, the

line of sight.

[Illustration]

Each rear-rank man aims through the interval to the right of his file

leader and leans slightly forward to advance the muzzle of his piece

beyond the front rank.

[Illustration]

In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of

elbow in front of kneecap.

[Illustration]

In aiming sitting, the elbows are supported by the knees.

[Illustration]

In aiming, lying down, raise the piece with both hands; rest on both

elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.

At the command =fire= press the finger against the trigger; fire

without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the piece;

lower the piece in the position of =load= and load. (144)

To continue the firing: =1. AIM, 2. Squad, 3. FIRE.=

Each command is executed as previously explained. =Load= (from

magazine) is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with

the right hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." (145)

To Fire at Will

=190. FIRE AT WILL.=

Each man, independently of the others, comes to the =ready=, aims

carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, =fires=,

=loads=, and continues the firing until ordered to =suspend= or =cease

firing=. (146)

=191.= To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the

instructor shouts: =FASTER (SLOWER).=

Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at

effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum

of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate

the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to combat

conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated.

(147)

To Fire by Clip

=192. CLIP FIRE.=

Executed in the same manner as =fire at will=, except that each man,

after having exhausted the cartridges then in the piece, =suspends

firing=. (For Krag rifle see par. 704.) (148)

To Suspend Firing

=193.= The instructor blows a =long blast= of the whistle and repeats

same, if necessary, or commands: =SUSPEND FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a position of

readiness for instant resumption of firing, rear sights unchanged. The

men continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at

which the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.

This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to =cease firing=.

(149)

To Cease Firing

=194. CEASE FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of

load; those not loaded, are loaded; sights are laid, pieces are locked

and brought to the order.

=Cease firing= is used for long pauses, to prepare for changes of

position, or to steady the men. (For Krag rifle see par. 705.) (150)

Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any time after

the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has actually

commenced or not. (151)

The Use of Cover

=195. Individual instruction; things to be impressed upon the

recruit.= The recruit should be given careful instruction in the

individual use of cover. (152)

It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural

cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy;

if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as

possible; he must conceal himself as much as possible while firing and

while advancing. While setting his sight he should be under cover or

lying prone.

=196. Practice in simulated firing from behind hillocks, trees, etc.;

firing around right side of concealment.= To teach him to fire easily

and effectively, at the same time concealing himself from the view of

the enemy, he is practiced in simulated firing in the prone, sitting,

kneeling, and crouching positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps

of earth or rocks, from depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or

windows. He is taught to fire around the right side of his concealment

whenever possible, or, when this is not possible, to rise enough to

fire over the top of his concealment.

When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with

reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper

position for firing. (153)

=197. Evil of remaining too long in one place; advancing from cover to

cover by running, crawling, etc.= The evil of remaining too long in

one place, however good the concealment, should be explained. He

should be taught to advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in

advance before leaving his concealment.

It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an

enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from

a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and

throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing

from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle

grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right

leg. (154)

=198. Action when fired on while acting independently.= He should be

taught that, when fired on while acting independently, he should drop

to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his enemy.

(155)

=199. Proper advance and effectiveness of fire of greater importance

than cover.= The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is

continued in the combat exercises of the company, but he must then be

taught that the proper advance of the platoon or company and the

effectiveness of its fire is of greater importance than the question

of cover for individuals. He should also be taught that he may not

move about or shift his position in the firing line except the better

to see the target. (156)

Observation

=200. Importance of observation; training of recruit.= The ability to

use his eyes accurately is of great importance to the soldier. The

recruit should be trained in observing his surroundings from positions

and when on the march.

He should be practiced in pointing out and naming military features of

the ground; in distinguishing between living beings; in counting

distant groups of objects or beings; in recognizing colors and forms.

(157)

=201. Training in mechanism of firing line and estimating distance.=

In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, they

should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming

point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a

designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone

position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked

eye and with field glasses. Similarly, they should be trained in

estimating distances. (158)

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY

=202. Captain responsible for instruction of officers and

noncommissioned officers.= The captain is responsible for the

theoretical and practical instruction of his officers and

noncommissioned officers, not only in the duties of their respective

grades, but in those of the next higher grades. (159)

=203. Formation of company in double rank, according to height;

division into squads.= The company in line is formed in double rank

with the men arranged, as far as practicable, according to height from

right to left, the tallest on the right.

The original division into squads is effected by the command: =COUNT

OFF=. The squads, successively, from the right, count off as in the

School of the Squad, as explained in par. 153, corporals placing

themselves as Nos. 4 of the front rank. If the left squad contains

less than six men, it is either increased to that number by transfers

from other squads or is broken up and its members assigned to other

squads and posted in the line of file closers. These squad

organizations are maintained, by transfers if necessary, until the

company becomes so reduced in numbers as to necessitate a new division

into squads. No squad will contain less than six men. (160)

=204. Division of company into platoons.= The company is further

divided into two, three or four platoons, each consisting of not less

than two, nor more than four squads. In garrison or ceremonies the

strength of platoons may exceed four squads. (161)

=205. Designation of squads and platoons.= At the formation of the

company the platoons or squads are numbered consecutively from right

to left and these designations do not change.

For convenience in giving commands and for reference, the

designations, =right, center, left=, when in line, and =leading,

center, rear=, when in column, are applied to platoons or squads.

These designations apply to the actual right, left, center, head, or

rear, in whatever direction the company may be facing. The =center

squad= is the middle or right middle squad of the company.

The designation "So-and-so's" squad or platoon may also be used.

(162)

=206. Assignment of platoons; assignment of guides.= Platoons are

assigned to the lieutenants and noncommissioned officers, in order of

rank, as follows: 1, right; 2, left; 3, center (right center); 4, left

center.

[Illustration: Plate II]

The noncommissioned officers next in rank are assigned as guides, one

to each platoon. If sergeants still remain, they are assigned to

platoons as additional guides. When the platoon is deployed, its

guide, or guides, accompany the platoon leader.

During battle, these assignments are not changed; vacancies are filled

by noncommissioned officers of the platoon, or by the nearest

available officers or noncommissioned officers arriving with

reenforcing troops. (163)

=207. Post of first sergeant, quartermaster sergeant and musicians.=

The first sergeant is never assigned as a guide. When not commanding a

platoon, he is posted as a file closer opposite the third file from

the outer flank of the first platoon; and when the company is deployed

he accompanies the captain.

The quartermaster sergeant, when present, is assigned according to his

rank as a sergeant.

Enlisted men below the grade of sergeant, armed with the rifle are in

ranks unless serving as guides; when not so armed they are posted in

the line of file closers.

Musicians, when required to play, are at the head of the column. When

the company is deployed, they accompany the captain, and perform the

duties laid down in par. 272. (164)

=208. Certain movements executed by company and by platoon as

prescribed in Schools of the Soldier and the Squad.= The company

executes the =halt=, =rests=, =facings=, =steps=, and =marchings=,

=manual of arms=, =loadings=, and =firings=, takes =intervals= and

=distances= and =assembles=, =increases= and =diminishes intervals=,

resumes =attention=, =obliques=, resumes the direct march, preserves

alignments, =kneels=, =lies down=, =rises=, =stacks=, and =takes

arms=, as explained in the Schools of the Soldier and the Squad,

substituting in the commands =company= for =squad=.

The same rule applies to platoons, detachments, details, etc.,

substituting their designation for =squad= in the commands. In the

same manner these execute the movements prescribed for the company,

whenever possible, substituting their designation for =company= in the

commands. (165)

=209. Depleted company led as platoon.= A company so depleted as to

make division into platoons impracticable is led by the captain as a

single platoon, but retains the designation of company. The

lieutenants and first sergeant assist in fire control; the other

sergeants place themselves in the firing line as skirmishers. (166)

CLOSE ORDER

Rules

=210. Platoon guides.= The guides of the right and left, or leading

and rear, platoons, are the right and left, or leading and rear,

guides, respectively, of the company when it is in line or in column

of squads. Other guides are in the line of =file closers=.

In platoon movements the post of the platoon guide is at the head of

the platoon, if the platoon is in column, and on the guiding flank if

in line. When a platoon has two guides their original assignment to

flanks of the platoon does not change. (167)

=211. Guides of a column of squads; changing guides and file closers

to opposite flank.= The guides of a column of squads place themselves

on the flank opposite the file closers. To change the guides and file

closers to the other flank, the captain commands: =1. File closers on

left (right) flank; 2. MARCH.= The file closers dart through the

column; the captain and guides change.

In the column of squads, each rank preserves the alignment toward the

side of the guide. (168)

=212. File closers do not execute loadings or firings; execution of

manual of arms and other movements.= Men in the line of file closers

do not execute the loadings or firings.

Guides and enlisted men in the line of file closers execute the manual

of arms during the drill unless specially excused, when they remain at

the order. During ceremonies they execute all movements. (169)

=213. Action of guides in taking intervals and distances.= In taking

intervals and distances, unless otherwise directed, the right and left

guides, at the first command, place themselves in the line of file

closers, and, with them, take a distance of 4 paces from the rear

rank. In taking intervals, at the command =march=, the file closers

face to the flank and each steps off with the file nearest him. In

assembling the guides and file closers resume their position in line.

(170)

=214. Repetition of commands by platoon leaders in platoon drill.= In

movements executed simultaneously by platoons (=as platoons right or

platoons, column right=), platoon leaders repeat the preparatory

command (=platoon right=, etc.), applicable to their respective

platoons. The command of execution is given by the captain only. (171)

To Form the Company

=215.= At the sounding of the assembly the first sergeant takes

position 6 paces in front of where the center of the company is to be,

faces it, draws saber, and commands: =FALL IN.=

The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the front,

where the right of the company is to rest, and at such point that the

center of the company will be 6 paces from and opposite the first

sergeant; the squads form in their proper places on the left of the

right guide, superintended by the other sergeants, who then take their

posts.

The first sergeant commands: =REPORT.= Remaining in position at the

order, the squad leaders, in succession from right, salute and report:

=All present=; or, =Private(s) ---- absent.= The first sergeant does

not return the salutes of the squad leaders; he then commands: =1.

Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Order, 4. ARMS=, faces about, salutes the

captain, reports: =Sir, all present or accounted for=, or the names of

the unauthorized absentees, and, without command, takes his post.

If the company can not be formed by squads, the first sergeant

commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3. Right shoulder, 4. ARMS=, and

calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers here and

executes order arms. The sergeant then effects the division into

squads and reports the company as prescribed above.

The captain places himself 12 paces in front of the center of, and

facing, the company in time to receive the report of the first

sergeant, whose salute he returns, and then draws saber.

The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has reported

and draw saber with the captain. The company, if not under arms, is

formed in like manner omitting reference to arms. (172)

=216.= For the instruction of platoon leaders and guides, the company,

when small, may be formed in single rank. In this formation close

order movements only are executed. The single rank executes all

movements as explained for the front rank of a company. (173)

To Dismiss the Company

=217.= Being in line at a halt, the captain directs the first

sergeant: =Dismiss the company.= The officers fall out; the first

sergeant places himself faced to the front, 3 paces to the front and 2

paces from the nearest flank of the company, salutes, faces toward

opposite flank of the company and commands: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS,

3. Port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED.= (174)

Alignments

=218.= The alignments are executed as prescribed in the School of the

Squad, the guide being established instead of the flank file. The

rear-rank man of the flank file keeps his head and eyes to the front

and covers his file leader.

At each alignment the captain places himself in prolongation of the

line, 2 paces from and facing the flank toward which the dress is

made, verifies the alignment, and commands: =FRONT.=

Platoon leaders take a like position when required to verify

alignments. (175)

Movements on the Fixed Pivot

=219.= Being in line, to turn the company: =1. Company right (left),

2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT;= or, =3. Forward, 4. MARCH.=

At the second command the right-flank man[1] in the front rank faces

to the right in marching and marks time; the other front-rank men

oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the pivot, and mark

time; in the rear rank the third man from the right, followed in

column by the second and first, moves straight to the front until in

rear of his front-rank man, when all face to the right in marching and

mark time; the remaining men of the rear rank move straight to the

front 4 paces, oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the

third man, cover their file leaders, and mark time, the right guide

steps back, takes post on the flank, and marks time.

[Illustration]

The fourth command is given when the last man is 1 pace in rear of the

new line.

The command =halt= may be given at any time after the movement begins;

only those halt who are in the new position. Each of the others halts

upon arriving on the line, aligns himself to the right, and executes

=front= without command. (176)

=220.= Being in line, to form column of platoons, or the reverse: =1.

Platoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT=; or, =3.

Forward, 4. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO COLUMN OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company.

Before forming line the captain sees that the guides on the flank

toward which the movement is to be executed are covering. This is

effected by previously announcing the guide to that flank. (177)

=221.= Being in line, to form column of squads, or the reverse; or,

being in line of platoons, to form column of platoons, or the reverse:

=1. Squads right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Squads right (left), 2.

MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT=.

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO COLUMN OF SQUADS.]

[Illustration: FROM LINE OF PLATOONS TO COLUMN OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.

If the company or platoons be formed in line toward the side of the

file closers, they dart through the column and take posts in rear of

the company at the second command. If the column of squads be formed

from line, the file closers take posts on the pivot flank, abreast of

and 4 inches from the nearest rank. (178)

Movements on the Moving Pivot

=222.= Being in line, to change direction: =1. Right (Left) turn, 2.

MARCH, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Executed as described in the School of the Squad, except that the men

do not glance toward the marching flank and that all take the full

step at the fourth command. The right guide is the pivot of the front

rank. Each rear-rank man obliques on the same ground as his file

leader. (179)

=223.= Being in column of platoons, to change direction: =1. Column

right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the first command the leader of the leading platoon commands:

=Right turn.= At the command =march= the leading platoon turns to the

right on moving pivot; its leader commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=, on

completion of the turn. Rear =platoons= march squarely up to the

turning point of the leading platoons =and turn= at command of their

leaders. (180)

=224.= Being in column of squads, to change direction: =1. Column

right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the second command the front rank of the leading squad turns to the

right on moving pivot as in the School of the Squad; the other ranks,

without command turn successively on the same ground and in a similar

manner. (181)

=225.= Being in column of squads, to form line of platoons or the

reverse: =1. Platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company. (182)

=226.= Being in line, to form column of squads and change direction:

=1. Squads right (left), column right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Right

(Left) by squads, 2. MARCH.=

In the first case the right squad initiates the =column right= as soon

as it has completed the =squad right=.

[Illustration: SQUADS RIGHT COLUMN RIGHT.]

In the second case, at the command =march=, the right squad marches

=forward=; the remainder of the company executes =squads right=,

=column left=, and follows the right squad. The right guide, when he

has posted himself in front of the squad, takes four short steps, then

resumes the full step; the right quad conforms. (183)

[Illustration: RIGHT BY SQUADS.]

=227.= Being in line, to form line of platoons: =1. Squads right

(left), platoons, column right (left), 2. MARCH=; or, =1. Platoons,

right (left) by squads, 2. MARCH=.

[Illustration: FROM LINE TO LINE OF PLATOONS.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company in the preceding

paragraph. (184)

Facing or Marching to the Rear

=228.= Being in line, line of platoons, or in column of platoons or

squads, to face or march to the rear: =1. Squads right (left) about,

2. MARCH=; or, =1. Squad right (left) about, 2. MARCH; 3. Company, 4.

HALT.=

Executed by each squad as described in the School of the Squad.

If the company or platoons be in column of squads, the file closers

turn about toward the column, and take their posts; if in line, each

darts through the nearest interval between squads. (185).

=229.= To march to the rear for a few paces: =1. About, 2. FACE, 3.

Forward, 4. MARCH.=

If in line, the guides place themselves in the rear rank, now the

front rank; the file closers, on facing about, maintain their relative

positions. No other movement is executed until the line is faced to

the original front. (186)

On Right (Left) Into Line

=230.= Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line on right or

left: =1. On right (left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5.

FRONT.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF PLATOONS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

At the first command the leader of the leading unit commands: =Right

turn.= The leaders of the other units command: =Forward=, if at a

halt. At the second command the leading unit turns to the right on

moving pivot. The command halt is given when the leading unit has

advanced the desired distance in the new direction; it halts; its

leader then commands: =Right dress.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

The units in rear continue to march straight to the front; each, when

opposite the right of its place in line, executes right turn at the

command of its leader; each is halted on the line at the command of

its leader, who then commands: =Right dress.= All dress on the first

unit in line.

If executed in double time, the leading squad marches in double time

until halted. (187)

Front Into Line

=231.= Being in column of platoons or squads, to form line to the

front: =1. Right (Left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4.

HALT, 5. FRONT.=

At the first command the leaders of the units in rear of the leading

one command: =Right oblique.= If at a halt, the leader of the leading

unit commands: =Forward.= At the second command the leading unit moves

straight forward; the rear units oblique as indicated. The command

=halt= is given when the leading unit has advanced the desired

distance; it halts; its leader then commands: =Left dress.= Each of

the rear units, when opposite its place in line, resumes the original

direction at the command of its leader; each is halted on the line at

the command of its leader, who then commands: =Left dress.= All dress

on the first unit in line. (188)

=232.= Being in column of squads to form column of platoons, or being

line of platoons, to form the company in line: =1. Platoons, right

(left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Company, 4. HALT, 5. FRONT.=

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF PLATOONS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

Executed by each platoon as described for the company. In forming the

company in line, the dress is on the left squad of the left platoon.

If forming column of platoons, platoon leaders verify the alignment

before taking their posts; the captain commands =front= when the

alignments have been verified.

When =front into line= is executed in double time the commands for

halting and aligning are omitted and the guide is toward the side of

the first unit in line. (189)

At Ease and Route Step

=233.= The column of squads is the habitual column of route, but

=route step= and =at ease= are applicable to any marching formation.

(190)

To march at route step: =1. Route step, 2. MARCH.=

Sabers are carried at will or in the scabbard; the men carry their

pieces at will, keeping the muzzles elevated; they are not required to

preserve silence, nor to keep the step. The ranks cover and preserve

their distance. If halted from route step, the men stand =at rest=.

(191)

To march at ease: =1. At ease, 2. MARCH.=

The company marches as in route step, except that silence is

preserved; when halted, the men remain =at ease=. (192)

Marching at route step or at ease: =1. Company, 2. ATTENTION.=

At the command =attention= the pieces are brought to the right

shoulder and the cadenced step in quick time is resumed. (193)

To Diminish The Front of A Column of Squads

=234.= Being in column of squads: =1. Right (left) by twos, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the command =march= all files except the two right files of the

leading squad execute =in place halt=; the two left files of the

leading squad oblique to the right when disengaged and follow the

right files at the shortest practicable distance. The remaining squads

follow successively in like manner. (194)

=235.= Being in column of squads or twos: =1. Right (Left) by file, 2.

MARCH.=

[Illustration]

At the command =march=, all files execute =in place halt= except the

right file of the leading two or squad. The left file or files of the

leading two or squad oblique successively to the right when disengaged

and each follows the file on its right at the shortest practicable

distance. The remaining twos or squads follow successively in like

manner. (195)

Being in column of files or twos, to form column of squads; or, being

in column of files, to form column of twos: =1. Squads (Twos), right

(left) front into line, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march=, the leading file or files halt. The remainder

of the squad, or two, obliques to the right and halts on line with the

leading file or files. The remaining squads or twos close up and

successively form in rear of the first in like manner.

[Illustration]

This diagram illustrates a squad executing =LEFT= front into line.

The movement described in this paragraph will be ordered =right= or

=left=, so as to restore the files to their normal relative positions

in the two or squad. (196)

The movements prescribed in the three preceding paragraphs are

difficult of execution at attention and have no value as disciplinary

exercises. (197)

EXTENDED ORDER

Rules for Deployment

=236. Designation of base squads.= The command =guide right= (=left=

or =center=) indicates the base squad for the deployment; if in line

it designates the actual =right= (=left= or =center=) squad; if in

column the command =guide right (left)= designates the =leading=

squad, and the command =guide center= designates the =center= squad,

as laid down in par. 205. After the deployment is completed, the guide

is =center= without command, unless otherwise ordered. (199)

=237. Action of squad leaders at preparatory command for forming

skirmish line.= At the preparatory command for forming skirmish line,

from either column of squads or line, each squad leader (except the

leader of the base squad, when his squad does not advance) cautions

his squad, =follow me= or =by the right (left) flank=, as the case may

be; at the command march, he steps in front of his squad and leads it

to its place in line, as explained in par. 169. (200)

=238. Point on which base squad marches.= Having given the command for

forming skirmish line, the captain, if necessary, indicates to the

corporal of the base squad the point on which the squad is to march;

the corporal habitually looks to the captain for such directions.

(201)

=239. Deployment of the squads.= The base squad (par. 199) is deployed

as soon as it has sufficient interval. The other squads are deployed

as they arrive on the general line; each corporal halts in his place

in line and commands or signals, as =skirmishers= (executed as

prescribed in par. 170); the squad deploys and halts abreast of him.

If tactical considerations demand it, the squad is deployed before

arriving on the line. (202)

=240. Alignment of deployed lines; deployed line faces to front on

halting.= Deployed lines preserve a general alignment toward the

guide, as prescribed in par. 65. Within their respective fronts,

individuals or units march so as best to secure cover or to facilitate

the advance, but the general and orderly progress of the whole is

paramount.

On halting, a deployed line faces to the front (direction of the

enemy) in all cases and takes advantage of cover, the men lying down

if necessary. (203)

=241. Certain movements in extended order executed by same commands as

in close order.= The company in skirmish line =advances, halts=, moves

=by the flank=, or =to the rear, obliques=, resumes =the direct

march=, passes from =quick to double time= and the reverse by the same

commands and in a similar manner as in close order; if at a halt, the

movement by =the flank= or =to the rear= is executed by the same

commands as when marching. =Company right (left, half right, half

left)= is executed as explained for the front rank (in par. 165)

skirmish intervals being maintained. (See par. 171.) (204)

=242. Deployment of platoons and detachments.= A platoon or other part

of the company is deployed and marched in the same manner as the

company, substituting in the commands, =platoon= (=detachments=,

etc.), for =company=. (205)

Deployments (See pars. 170-172.)

=243.= Being in line, to form skirmish line to the front: =1. As

skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

If marching, the corporal of the base squad moves straight to the

front; when that squad has advanced the desired distance, the captain

commands: =1. Company, 2. HALT.= If the guide be =right (left)=, the

other corporals move to the =left (right)= front, and, in succession

from the base, place their squads on the line; if the guide be center,

the other corporals move to the right or left front, according as they

are on the right or left of the center squad, and in succession from

the center squad place their squads on the line.

If at a halt, the base squad is deployed without advancing; the other

squads may be conducted to their proper places by the flank; interior

squads may be moved when squads more distant from the base have gained

comfortable marching distance. (206)

=244.= Being in column of squads, to form skirmish line to the front:

=1. As skirmishers, guide right (left or center), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: GUIDE RIGHT.]

[Illustration: GUIDE CENTER (MARCHING).]

[Illustration: GUIDE CENTER (AT A HALT).]

If marching, the corporal of the base squad deploys it and moves

straight to the front; if at a halt, he deploys his squad without

advancing. If the guide be =right (left)=, the other corporals move to

the =left (right) front=, and, in succession from the base, place

their squads on the line; if the guide be =center=, the corporals in

front of the center squad move to the right (if at a halt, to the

right rear), the corporals in rear of the center squad move to the

left front, and each, in succession from the base, places his squad on

the line.

The column of twos or files is deployed by the same commands and in

like manner. (207)

=245. Deployment in an oblique direction.= The company in line or in

column of squads may be deployed in an oblique direction by the same

commands. The captain points out the desire direction; the corporal of

the base squad moves in the direction indicated; the other corporals

conform. (208)

=246. Deployment to flank or rear.= To form skirmish line to the flank

or rear the line or the column of squads is turned by squads to the

flank or rear and then deployed as described. (209)

=247. Increasing or decreasing intervals.= The intervals between men

are increased or decreased as described in the School of the Squad, as

explained in par. 172, adding to the preparatory command, =guide right

(left or center)= if necessary, as explained in par. 236. (210)

The Assembly

=248.= The captain takes his post in front of, or designates, the

element on which the company is to assemble and commands: =1.

Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

If in skirmish line the men move promptly toward the designated point

and the company is reformed in line. If assembled by platoons, these

are conducted to the designated point by platoon leaders, and the

company is reformed in line.

Platoons may be assembled by the command: =1. Platoons, assemble, 2.

MARCH.=

Executed by each platoon as described for the company.

One or more platoons may be assembled by the command: =1. Such platoon

(s), assemble, 2. MARCH.=

Executed by the designated platoon or platoons as described for the

company. (211)

The Advance

=249. Methods of advancing.= The advance of a company into an

engagement (whether for attack or defense) is conducted in close

order, preferably column of squads, until the probability of

encountering hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy. After

deployment, and before opening fire, the advance of the company may be

continued in skirmish line or other suitable formation, depending upon

circumstances. The advance may often be facilitated, or better

advantage taken of cover, or losses reduced by the employment of the

=platoon= or =squad columns=, as laid down in pars. 250-251, or by the

use of a =succession of thin lines=, as explained in par. 255. The

selection of the method to be used is made by the captain or major,

the choice depending upon conditions arising during the progress of

the advance. If the deployment is found to be premature, it will

generally be best to assemble the company and proceed in close order.

Patrols are used to provide the necessary security against surprise.

(212)

=250.= Being in skirmish line: =1. Platoon columns, 2 MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The platoon leaders move forward through the center of their

respective platoons; men to the right of the platoon leader march to

the left and follow him in file; those to the left march in like

manner to the right; each platoon leader thus conducts the march of

his platoon in double column of files; platoon guides follow in rear

of their respective platoons to insure prompt and orderly execution of

the advance. (213)

=251.= Being in skirmish line: =1. Squad columns, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

Each squad leader moves to the front; the members of each squad

oblique toward and follow their squad leader in single file at easy

marching distances. (214)

=252.= Platoon columns are profitably used where the ground is so

difficult or cover so limited as to make it desirable to take

advantage of the few favorable routes; no two platoons should march

within the area of burst of a single shrapnel[2]. =Squad columns= are

of value principally in facilitating the advance over rough or

brush-grown ground; they afford no material advantage in securing

cover. (215)

=253.= To deploy platoon or squad columns: =1. As skirmishers, 2.

MARCH.=

Skirmishers move to the right or left front and successively place

themselves in their original positions on the line. (216)

[Illustration]

=254.= Being in platoon or squad columns: =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: ASSEMBLY MADE ON RIGHT PLATOON.]

[Illustration: ASSEMBLY MADE ON RIGHT SQUAD.]

The platoon or squad leaders signal =assemble=. The men of each

platoon or squad, as the case may be, advance and, moving to the right

and left, take their proper places in line, each unit assembling on

the leading element of the column and re-forming in line. The platoon

or squad leaders conduct their units toward the element or point

indicated by the captain, and to their places in line; the company is

reformed in line. (217)

=255.= Being in skirmish line, to advance by a succession of =thin

lines=: =1. (Such numbers), forward, 2. MARCH.=

The captain points out in advance the selected position in front of

the line occupied. The designated number of each squad moves to the

front; the line thus formed preserves the original intervals as nearly

as practicable; when this line has advanced a suitable distance

(generally from 100 to 250 yards, depending upon the terrain and the

character of the hostile fire), a second is sent forward by similar

commands, and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has

advanced. Upon arriving at the indicated position, the first line is

halted. Successive lines, upon arriving, halt on line with the first

and the men take their proper places in the skirmish line.

Ordinarily each line is made up of one man per squad and the men of a

squad are sent forward in order from right to left as deployed. The

first line is led by the platoon leader of the right platoon, the

second by the guide of the right platoon, and so on in order from

right to left.

The advance is conducted in quick time unless conditions demand a

faster gait.

The company having arrived at the indicated position, a further

advance by the same means may be advisable. (218)

=256. Use and purpose of advance in succession of thin lines.= The

advance in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide stretch

swept, or likely to be swept, by artillery fire or heavy, long-range

rifle fire which cannot profitably be returned. Its purpose is the

building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to engaging in a

fire fight. This method of advancing results in serious (though

temporary) loss of control over the company. Its advantage lies in the

fact that it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to

draw fire. (219)

=257. Improvised formations.= The above are suggestions. Other and

better formations may be devised to fit particular cases. The best

formation is the one which advances the line farthest with the least

loss of men, time, and control. (220)

The Fire Attack

=258. Advance of firing line; advance by rushes.= The principles

governing the advance of the firing line in attack are considered in

the School of the Battalion. (See par. 342-356.)

When it becomes impracticable for the company to advance as whole by

ordinary means, it advances by rushes. (221)

=259. Advancing by rushes.= Being in skirmish line: =1. By platoon

(two platoons, squad, four men, etc.), from the right (left), 2.

RUSH.=

The platoon leader on the indicated flank carefully arranges the

details for a prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it

into effect as soon as practicable. If necessary, he designates the

leader for the indicated fraction. When about to rush, he causes the

men of the fraction to cease firing and to hold themselves flat, but

in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at

the signal of the platoon leader, if the latter be not the leader of

the rush) commands: Follow me, and running at top speed, leads the

fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open

fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been

previously designated.

The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next

like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader, without further

command of the captain, and so on successively, until the entire

company is on the line established by the first rush.

If more than one platoon is to join in one rush, the junior platoon

leader conforms to the action of the senior.

A part of the line having advanced, the captain may increase or

decrease the size of the fractions to complete the movement. (222)

=260. Rush of company as whole led by captain.= When the company forms

a part of the firing line, the rush of the company as a whole is

conducted by the captain, as described for a platoon in the preceding

paragraph. The captain leads the rush; platoon leaders lead their

respective platoons; platoon guides follow the line to insure prompt

and orderly execution of the advance. (223)

=261. Advance by crawling or otherwise.= When the foregoing method of

rushing, by running, becomes impracticable, any method of advance that

=brings the attack closer to the enemy=, such as crawling, should be

employed.

For regulations governing the charge, see paragraphs 355 and 356.

(224)

(All rushes should be made with life and ginger, and all the men

should start together. All rushes should be made under covering

fire, and when a unit rushes forward the adjoining unit or units

make up for the loss of fire thus caused by increasing the rate of

their fire.

A unit commander about to rush forward, will not do so until he

sees that the adjoining unit or units have started to give him the

protection of their covering fire and, if necessary, he will call

to them to do so. Each unit must be careful not to advance until

the last unit that rushed forward has had time to take up an

effective fire. When sights have to be adjusted at the conclusion

of a rush, the men should do so in the prone position even though

it be necessary for the men to kneel for firing. The same as the

men who rush should start simultaneously from the prone position,

so should they stop simultaneously, all men dropping down to the

ground together, wherever they may be, at the command "Down,"

given by the unit commander when the leading men have reached the

new position. The slower members who drop down in rear will crawl

up to the line after the halt. So that the slower members may not

be crowded out of the line, and also to prevent bunching, the

faster men should leave room for them on the line.--Author.)

The Company in Support

(Being part of a battalion)

=262. Formations adopted by support.= To enable it to follow or reach

the firing line, the support adopts suitable formations, following the

principles explained in paragraphs 249-255.

The support should be kept assembled as long as practicable. If after

deploying a favorable opportunity arises to hold it for some time in

close formation, it should be reassembled. It is redeployed when

necessary. (225)

=263. Support controlled by major: size of reenforcement; captain on

look out for major's signals.= The movements of the support as a whole

and the dispatch of reenforcements from it to the firing line are

controlled by the major.

A reenforcement of less than one platoon has little influence and will

be avoided whenever practicable. (See par. 353.)

The captain of a company in support is constantly on the alert for the

major's signals or commands. (226)

=264. Reenforcement to join firing line deployed as skirmishers and

occupy existing intervals.= A reenforcement sent to the firing line

joins it deployed as skirmishers. The leader of the reenforcement

places it in an interval in the line, if one exists, and commands it

thereafter as a unit. If no such suitable interval exists, the

reenforcement is advanced with increased intervals between

skirmishers; each man occupies the nearest interval in the firing

line, and each then obeys the orders of the nearest squad leader and

platoon leader. (227)

=265. Promptness in reenforcing firing line.= A reenforcement joins

the firing line as quickly as possible without exhausting the men.

(228)

=266. Original platoon divisions to be maintained; duties of officers

and sergeants upon joining firing line.= The original platoon division

of the companies in the firing line should be maintained and should

not be broken up by the mingling of reenforcements.

Upon joining the firing line, officers and sergeants accompanying a

reenforcement take over the duties of others of like grade who have

been disabled, or distribute themselves so as best to exercise their

normal functions. Conditions will vary and no rules can be prescribed.

It is essential that all assist in mastering the increasing

difficulties of control. (229)

The Company Acting Alone

=267. Employed according to principles of battalion acting alone.= In

general, the company, when acting alone, is employed according to the

principles applicable to the battalion acting alone as laid down in

pars. 327-363; the captain employs platoons as the major employs

companies, making due allowance for the difference in strength.

The support may be smaller in proportion or may be dispensed with.

(230)

=268. Protection against surprise.= The company must be well protected

against surprise. Combat patrols on the flanks are especially

important as explained in par. 410. Each leader of a flank platoon

details a man to watch for the signals of the patrol or patrols on his

flank. (231)

FIRE

=269. Issuing of ammunition and loading of pieces before deployment;

firings in close order.= Ordinarily pieces are loaded and extra

ammunition is issued before the company deploys for combat.

In close order the company executes the firings, as prescribed in

pars. 179-194, at the command of the captain, who posts himself in

rear of the center of the company.

Usually the firings in close order consist of saluting volleys only.

(See par. 189 for volley firing.) (232)

=270. Firing controlled by platoon leaders.= When the company is

deployed, the men execute the firings at the command of their platoon

leaders; the latter give such commands as are necessary to carry out

the captain's directions, and, from time to time, add such further

commands as are necessary to continue, correct, and control, the fire

ordered. (233)

=271. Use of signals during firing.= The voice is generally inadequate

for giving commands during fire and must be replaced by signals of

such character that proper fire direction and control is assured. (See

par. 92 for signals; pars. 285-286 for fire direction and pars.

287-290 for fire control.) To attract attention, signals must usually

be preceded by the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the

firing line about to rush should, if practicable, avoid using the long

blast signal as an aid to cease firing. (See par. 91.) Officers and

men behind the firing line can not ordinarily move freely along the

line, but must depend on mutual watchfulness and the proper use of the

prescribed signals. All should post themselves so as to see their

immediate superiors and subordinates. (234)

=272. Duties of musicians.= The musicians assist the captain by

observing the enemy, the target, and the fire-effect, by transmitting

commands or signals, and by watching for signals. (For posts of

musicians see par. 207.) (235)

=273. Blank Cartridges.= Firing with blank cartridges at an outlined

or represented enemy (par. 7) at distances less than 100 yards is

prohibited. (236)

=274. Effect of fire and influence of ground.= The effect of fire and

the influence of the ground in relation thereto, and the individual

and collective instruction in marksmanship, are treated in the

Small-Arms Firing Manual. (237)

Ranges

=275. Classification.= For convenience of reference, ranges are

classified as follows:

0 to 600 yards, close range.

600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.

1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.

2,000 yards and over, distant range. (238)

=276. Determination of distance to target.= The distance to the target

must be determined as accurately as possible and the sights set

accordingly. Aside from training and morale, this is the most

important single factor in securing effective fire at the longer

ranges. (239)

=277. Method of determining the range; estimators.=

Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most

accurate and only practicable method of determining the range will

generally be to take the mean of several estimates.

Five or six officers or men, selected from the most accurate

estimators in the company, are designated as _range estimators_ and

are specially trained in estimating distances.

Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range

estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of

their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.

(240)

Classes of Firing

=278. Volley firing=, as explained in par. 189, has limited

application. In defense it may be used in the early stages of the

action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It may be used by

troops executing =fire of position=, as set forth in par. 438. When

the ground near the target is such that the strike of bullets can be

seen from the firing line, =ranging volleys= may be used to correct

the sight setting.

In combat, volley firing is executed habitually by platoon. (241)

=279. Fire at will=, as explained in par. 190, is the class of fire

normally employed in attack or defense. (242)

=280. Clip fire= (see par. 192.) has limited application. It is

principally used: 1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men

by habituating them to brief pauses in firing. 2. To produce a short

burst of fire. (243)

The Target

=281. Assignment of target by major; change of target to be avoided;

hostile firing line usual target.= Ordinarily the major will assign to

the company an objective in attack or sector in defense; the company's

target will lie within the limits so assigned. In the choice of

target, tactical considerations are paramount; the nearest hostile

troops within the objective or sector will thus be the usual target.

This will ordinarily be the hostile firing line; troops in rear are

ordinarily proper targets for artillery, machine guns, or, at times,

infantry employing fire of position, as set forth in par. 438.

Change of target should not be made without excellent reasons

therefor, such as the sudden appearance of hostile troops under

conditions which make them more to be feared than the troops

comprising the former target. (244)

=282. Distribution of fire; allotment of target to platoon leaders.=

The distribution of fire over the entire target is of special

importance.

The captain allots a part of the target to each platoon, or each

platoon leader takes as his target that part which corresponds to his

position in the company. Men are so instructed that each fires on

that part of the target which is directly opposite him. (245)

=283. All Parts of target equally important.= All parts of the target

are equally important. Care must be exercised that the men do not

slight its less visible parts. A section of the target not covered by

fire represents a number of the enemy permitted to fire coolly and

effectively. (246)

=284. Use of aiming points in case of invisible targets.=

If the target can not be seen with the naked eye, platoon leaders

select an object in front of or behind it, designate this as the

_aiming target_, and direct a sight setting which will carry the cone

of fire into the target. (247)

Fire Direction[3]

=285. Impracticability in combat of commanding company directly.= When

the company is large enough to be divided into platoons, it is

impracticable for the captain to command it directly in combat. His

efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to

enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly

what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct

serious errors or omissions. (248)

=286. Captain directs the fire.= The captain =directs= the fire of the

company or of designated platoons. He designates the target, and, when

practicable, allots a part of the target to each platoon, as

prescribed in par. 340. Before beginning the fire action he determines

the range, as explained in par. 277, announces the sight setting, as

prescribed in par. 188, and indicates the class of fire to be employed

(See par. 278) and the time to open fire. Thereafter, he observes the

fire effect (See pars. 428-429), corrects material errors in sight

setting, prevents exhaustion of the ammunition supply, as explained in

par. 432-433, and causes the distribution of such extra ammunition as

may be received from the rear. (249)

Fire Control

=287. Platoon the fire unit.= In combat, the platoon is the fire unit.

From 20 to 35 rifles are as many as one leader can control

effectively. (250)

=288. Special duties of platoon leaders.= Each platoon leader puts

into execution the commands or directions of the captain, having first

taken such precautions to insure correct sight setting and clear

description of the target or aiming target as the situation permits or

requires; thereafter, he gives such additional commands or directions

as are necessary to exact compliance with the captain's will. He

corrects the sight setting when necessary. He designates an aiming

target when the target can not be seen with the naked eye. (251)

=289. General duties of platoon leaders; duties of platoon guides and

squad leaders.= In general, =platoon leaders= observe the target and

the effect of their fire and are on the alert for the captain's

commands or signals; they observe and regulate the rate of fire, as

laid down in par. 191. The =platoon guides= watch the firing line and

check every breach of fire discipline. (See pars. 291-294.) =Squad

leaders= transmit commands and signals when necessary, observe the

conduct of their squads and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire

discipline and participate in the firing. (252)

=290. Importance of fire control.= The best troops are those that

submit longest to fire control. Loss of control is an evil which robs

success of its greatest results. To avoid or delay such loss should be

the constant aim of all.

Fire control implies the ability to stop firing, change the sight

setting and target, and resume a well directed fire. (253)

Fire Discipline

=291. What fire discipline implies.= "Fire discipline implies, besides

a habit of obedience, a control of the rifle by the soldier, the

result of training, which will enable him in action to make hits

instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground; care in

setting the sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the

orders of the leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an

increase of fire when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire

when the enemy disappears; economy of ammunition." (See pars.

432-433.) (Small-Arms Firing Manual.)

In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position and thus

reduce the effectiveness of his fire have the approximate value of

hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire

superiority.

Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each

man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the

proper target. (254)

=292. Rate of fire.= To create a correct appreciation of the

requirements of fire discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire,

as prescribed in par. 191, should be as rapid as is consistent with

accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the visibility,

proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper rate will

ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man, usually rendering

cautions or commands unnecessary.

In attack the highest rate of fire is employed at the halt preceding

the assault, and in pursuing fire. (See pars. 490-494.) (255)

=293. Position fire in advance by rushes.= In an advance by rushes, as

explained in par. 259, leaders of troops in firing positions are

responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover the advance of

each rushing fraction. Troops are trained to change slightly the

direction of fire so as not to endanger the flanks of advanced

portions of the firing line. (256)

=294. Action in defense, when target disappears.= In defense, when the

target disappears behind cover, platoon leaders suspend fire, as

prescribed in par. 193, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point

where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly

with vigorous fire. (257)

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION

=295. Battalion a tactical unit; duties and responsibilities of

major.= The battalion being purely a tactical unit, the major's duties

are primarily those of an instructor in drill and tactics and of a

tactical commander. He is responsible for the theoretical and

practical training of the battalion. He supervises the training of

the companies of the battalion with a view to insuring the

thoroughness and uniformity of their instruction.

In the instruction of the battalion as a whole, his efforts will be

directed chiefly to the development of tactical efficiency, devoting

only such time to the mechanism of drill and to the ceremonies as may

be necessary in order to insure precision, smartness, and proper

control. (258)

=296. Movements explained for battalion of four companies.= The

movements explained herein are on the basis of a battalion of four

companies; they may be executed by a battalion of two or more

companies, not exceeding six. (259)

=297. Arrangement of companies in formations.= The companies are

generally arranged from right to left according to the rank of the

captains present at the formation. The arrangement of the companies

may be varied by the major or higher commander.

After the battalion is formed, no cognizance is taken of the relative

order of the companies. (260)

=298. Designation of companies.= In whatever direction the battalion

faces, the companies are designated numerically from right to left in

line, and from head to rear in column, =first company=, =second

company=, etc.

The terms =right= and =left= apply to actual right and left as the

line faces; if the about by squads be executed when in line, the right

company becomes the left company and the right center becomes the left

center company.

The designation center company indicates the right center or the

actual center company according as the number of companies is even or

odd. (261)

=299. Post of special units.= The band and other special units, when

attached to the battalion, take the same post with respect to it as if

it were the nearest battalion. (262)

CLOSE ORDER

Rules

=300. Repetition of commands by captains.= Captains repeat such

preparatory commands as are to be immediately executed by their

companies, as =forward=, =squads right=, etc.; the men execute the

commands =march=, =halt=, etc., if applying to their companies, when

given by the major. In movements executed in route step or at ease the

captains repeat the command of execution, if necessary. Captains do

not repeat the major's commands in executing the manual of arms, nor

those commands which are not essential to the execution of a movement

by their companies, as =column of squads=, =first company=, =squads

right=, etc.

In giving commands or cautions captains may prefix the proper letter

designations of their companies, as =A Company, HALT=; =B Company,

squads right=, etc. (263)

=301. Captains repeating command for guide.= At the command =guide

center (right or left)=, captains command: =Guide right or left=,

according to the positions of their companies. =Guide center=

designates the left guide of the center company, as explained in 3d

Sec. par. 298. (264)

[Illustration: Plate III]

=302. Position of captains in dressing companies; action of guides in

dressing.= When the companies are to be dressed, captains place

themselves on that flank toward which the dress is to be made, as

follows:

The battalion in line: Besides the guide (or the flank file of the

front rank, if the guide is not in line) and facing to the front.

The battalion in column of companies: Two paces from the guide, in

prolongation of and facing down the line.

Each captain, after dressing his company, commands: =FRONT=, and takes

his post.

The battalion being in line and unless otherwise prescribed, at the

captain's command =dress= or at the command =halt=, when it is

prescribed that the company shall dress, the guide on the flank away

from the point of rest with his piece at right shoulder, dresses

promptly on the captain and the companies beyond. During the dress he

moves, if necessary, to the right and left only; the captain dresses

the company on the line thus established. The guide takes the position

of order arms at the command =front=. (265)

=303. Certain movements executed as in Schools of the Soldier, Squad

and Company.= =The battalion executes the halt= (See par. 116),

=rests= (See pars. 100-101), =facings= (See par. 104), =steps= and

=marchings= (See pars. 107-109), =manual of arms= (See pars. 120-147),

resumes =attention= (See par. 102), =kneels= (See pars. 174-177),

=lies down= (See par. 175), =rises= (See par. 176), =stacks= and

=takes arms= (See pars. 160-161), as explained in the Schools of the

Soldier and Squad, substituting in the commands =battalion= for

=squad=.

The battalion executes =squads right (left)= (See par. 221), =squads

right (left) about= (See par. 228), =route step= and =at ease= (See

par. 233), and =obliques= and resumes the =direct march= (See pars.

162-163), as explained in the School of the Company. (266)

=304. Certain movements executed as in School of the Company.= The

battalion in column of platoons, squads, twos, or files changes

direction. (See pars. 223-224); in column of squads, forms column of

twos or files and re-forms columns of twos or squads, as explained in

the School of the Company. (See pars. 234-235.) (267)

=305. Simultaneous execution by companies or platoons of movements in

School of the Company.= When the formation admits of the simultaneous

execution by companies or platoons of movements in the School of the

Company the major may cause such movement to be executed by prefixing,

when necessary, =companies (platoons)= to the commands prescribed

therein: As =1. Companies, right front into line, 2. MARCH.= To

complete such simultaneous movements, the commands =halt= or =march=,

if prescribed, are given by the major. The command =front=, when

prescribed, is given by the captains. (See par. 302.) (268)

=306. Execution of loadings and firings by battalion.= The battalion

as a unit executes the loadings and firings only in firing saluting

volleys. The commands are as for the company, substituting =battalion=

for =company=. At the first command for loading, captains take post in

rear of the center of their respective companies. At the conclusion of

the firing, the captains resume their posts in line.

On other occasions, when firing in close order is necessary, it is

executed by company or other subdivision, under instructions from the

major, as prescribed in pars. 179-194. (269)

To Form the Battalion

=307. For purposes other than ceremonies:= The battalion is formed in

column of squads. The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts

himself so as to be facing the column, when formed, and 6 paces in

front of the place to be occupied by the leading guide of the

battalion; he draws saber; =adjutant's call= is sounded or the

adjutant signals =assemble=.

The companies are formed, at attention, in column of squads in their

proper order. Each captain, after halting his company, salutes the

adjutant; the adjutant returns the salute and, when the last captain

has saluted, faces the major and reports: =Sir, the battalion is

formed.= He then joins the major. (270)

=308. For ceremonies or when directed:= The battalion is formed in

line.

The companies having been formed, the adjutant posts himself so as to

be 6 paces to the right of the right company when line is formed, and

faces in the direction in which the line is to extend. He draws saber;

=adjutant's call= is sounded; the band plays if present.

The right company is conducted by its captain so as to arrive from the

rear, parallel to the line; its right and left guides precede it on

the line by about 20 paces, taking post facing to the right at order

arms, so that their elbows will be against the breasts of the right

and left files of their company when it is dressed. The guides of the

other companies successively prolong the line to the left in like

manner and the companies approach their respective places in line as

explained for the right company. The adjutant, from his post, causes

the guides to cover.

When about 1 pace in rear of the line, each company is halted and

dressed to the right against the arms of the guides. (See par. 302.)

The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line when the

right company is halted; it ceases playing when the left company has

halted.

When the guides of the left company have been posted, the adjutant,

moving by the shortest route, takes post facing the battalion midway

between the post of the major and the center of the battalion.

The major, staff, noncommissioned staff, and orderlies take their

posts, as prescribed in pars. 73; 76-78.

When all parts of the line have been dressed, and officers and others

have reached their posts, the adjutant commands: =1. Guides, 2. POSTS,

3. Present, 4. ARMS.= At the second command guides take their places

in the line. (Plate II, page 69.) The adjutant then turns about as

explained in par. 74, and reports to the major: =Sir, the battalion is

formed=, as prescribed in par. 75; the major directs the adjutant:

=Take your post, Sir=; draws saber and brings the battalion to the

=order=. The adjutant takes his post, passing to the right of the

major. (271)

To Dismiss the Battalion

=309. Dismiss your companies.=

Staff and noncommissioned staff officers fall out; each captain

marches his company off and dismisses it, as laid down in par. 217.

(272)

To Rectify the Alignment

=310.= Being in line at a halt, to align the battalion: =1. Center

(right or left), 2. DRESS.=

The captains dress their companies successively toward the center

(right or left) guide of the battalion, each as soon as the captain

next toward the indicated guide commands: =FRONT.= The captains of the

center companies (if the dress is =center=) dress them without waiting

for each other. (273)

=311.= To give the battalion a new alignment: =1. Guides center (right

or left) company on the line, 2. Guides on the line, 3. Center (right

or left), 4. DRESS, 5. Guides, 6. POSTS.=

At the first command, the designated guides place themselves on the

line, as prescribed in par. 308, facing the center (right or left).

The major establishes them in the direction he wishes to give the

battalion.

At the second command, the guides of the other companies take posts,

facing the center (right or left), so as to prolong the line.

At the command =dress=, each captain dresses his company to the flank

toward which the guides of his company face, taking the positions

prescribed in par. 302.

At the command =posts=, given when all companies have completed the

dress, the guides return to their posts. (Plate II, page 69.) (274)

To Rectify the Column

=312.= Being in column of companies, or in close column, at a halt, if

the guides do not cover or have not their proper distances, and it is

desired to correct them, the major commands: =1. Right (left), 2.

DRESS.=

Captains of companies in rear of the first place their right guides so

as to cover at the proper distance; each captain aligns his company to

the right and commands: =FRONT.= (See par. 302.) (275)

On Right (Left) Into Line

=313.= Being in column of squads or companies: =1. On right (left)

into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the

leading company commands; =Squads right.= If at a halt each captain in

rear commands: =Forward.= At the second command, the leading company

marches in line to the right; the companies in rear continue to march

to the front and form successively on the left, each, when opposite

its place, being marched in line to the right.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES TO LINE ON RIGHT.]

The fourth command is given when the first company has advanced the

desired distance in the new direction; it halts and is dressed to the

right by its captain (par. 265); the others complete the movement,

each being halted 1 pace in rear of the line established by the first

company, and then dressed to the right.

Being in column of companies: At the first command, the captain of the

first company commands: =Right turn.= If at a halt, each captain in

rear commands: =Forward.= Each of the captains in rear of the leading

company gives the command: =1. Right turn=, in time to add, =2.

MARCH=, when his company arrives opposite the right of its place in

line.

The fourth command is given and the movement completed as explained

above.

Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each

captain places himself so as to march beside the right guide after his

company forms line or changes direction to the right.

If executed in double time, the leading company marches in double time

until halted. (276)

Front into Line

=314.= Being in column of squads or companies: =1. Right (left) front

into line, 2. MARCH.=

Being in column of squads: At the first command, the captain of the

leading company commands: =Column right=; the captain of the companies

in rear: =column half right.= At the second command the leading

company executes =column right=, and, as the last squad completes the

change of direction, is formed in line to the left, as prescribed in

par. 221, halted and dressed to the left. (See par. 302.) Each of the

companies in rear is conducted by the most convenient route to the

rear of the right of the preceding company, thence to the right,

parallel to and 1 pace in rear of the new line; when opposite its

place, it is formed in line to the left, halted, and dressed to the

left.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES TO LINE TO THE FRONT.]

Being in column of companies: If marching, the captain of the leading

company gives the necessary commands to halt his company at the second

command; if at a halt the leading company stands fast. At the first

command, the captain of each company in rear commands: =Squads right=,

or =Right by squads=, and after the second command conducts his

company by the most convenient route to its place in line, as

described above.

Whether executed from column of squads or column of companies, each

captain halts when opposite, or at the point, where the left of his

company is to rest. (277)

To Form Column of Companies Successively to the Right or Left

=315.= Being in column of squads: =1. Column of companies, first

company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The leading company executes =squads right= and moves forward. The

other companies move forward in column of squads and successively

march in line the right on the same ground as the leading company and

in such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding

company. (278)

To Form Column of Squads Successively to the Right or Left

=316.= Being in column of companies (Plate III, page 90): =1. Column

of squads, first company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The leading company executes =squads right= and moves forward. The

other companies move forward in column of companies and successively

march in column of squads to the right on the same ground as the

leading company. (279)

To Change Direction

=317.= Being in column of companies or close column. (Plate III, page

90); =1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration]

The captain of the first company commands: =Right turn.=

The leading company turns to the right on moving pivot, the captain

adding: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=, upon its completion.

The other companies march squarely up to the turning point; each

changes direction by the same commands and means as the first and in

such manner that the guide covers the guide of the preceding company.

(280)

=318.= Being in line of companies or close line. (Plate III, page 90):

=1. Battalion right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration]

The right company changes direction to the right, as prescribed in

par. 224; the other companies are conducted by the shortest line to

their places abreast of the first.

The fourth command is given when the right company has advanced the

desired distance in the new direction; that company halts; the others

halt successively upon arriving on the line. (281)

=319.= Being in column of squads, the battalion changes direction by

the same commands and in the manner prescribed for the company, as

explained in par. 224. (282)

Mass Formations

[Illustration: FROM LINE.]

=319a.= Being in column of squads, to form a line of columns of

companies or company subdivisions, facing in any desired direction, at

any desired interval, on the right or left of the leading element of

the battalion: =1. Line of companies (half companies, platoons), at

(so many) paces, guide right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.=

[Illustration: FROM LINE OF COMPANIES.]

The leading company (or subdivision) marches in the direction

previously indicated by the major until the command halt is given and

then halts. Each succeeding company (or subdivision) marches by the

most direct route to its place at the prescribed intervals on the left

(right) of the next preceding company (or subdivision), halting when

it is abreast of the leading element of the battalion.

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF SQUADS.]

If the battalion be in any formation other than column of squads, the

major indicates the desired direction to the leading element. The

entire command forms column of squads and executes a movement in

conformity with the principles indicated above. (282-1/2)

[Illustration: FROM COLUMN OF COMPANIES.]

=320.= Being in line, line of companies, or column of companies.

(Plate III, page 90): =1. Close on first (fourth) company, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching, it is

halted; each of the other companies is conducted toward it and is

halted in proper order in close column.

If the battalion is in line, companies form successively in rear of

the indicated company; if in column of squads, companies in rear of

the leading company form on the left of it.

In close column formed line on the first company, the left guides

cover; formed on the fourth company, right guides cover. If formed on

the leading company, the guide remains as before the formation. In

close line, the guides are halted abreast of the guide of the leading

company.

The battalion in column closes on the leading company only. (283)

(In closing from line of companies and in extending from close

line, the companies other than the base one, may be moved either

by the commands, (a) =1. Squads, right (left), 2. MARCH=; (b) =1.

Right (left) oblique, 2. MARCH=; (c) =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=; (d)

=1. Squads left (right) 2. MARCH=; (e) =1. Company, 2. HALT=; or,

(a) =1. By the right (left) flank, 2. MARCH=; (b) =1. Company, 2.

HALT=; (c) =1. Left (right), 2. FACE=; or if at a halt by the

commands, (a) =1. Right (left), 2. FACE=; (b) =1. At Trail, 2.

Forward, 3. MARCH=; (c) =1. Company, 2. HALT=; (d) =1. Left

(right), 2. FACE.= In some commands it is customary to use one

method while in other commands another is used. For the sake of

uniformity all companies of a given command should use the same

method.--Author.)

To Extend the Mass

=321.= Being in close column or in close line; =1. Extend on first

(fourth) company, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM CLOSE COLUMN.]

Being in close line: if at a halt, the indicated company stands fast;

if marching, it halts; each of the other companies is conducted away

from the indicated company and is halted in its proper order in line

of companies.

Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth company

only. If marching, the leading company continues to march; companies

in rear are halted and successively resume the march in time to follow

at full distance. If at halt, the leading company marches; companies

in rear successively march in time to follow at full distance.

Close column is not extended in double time. (See author's note, par.

320.) (284)

=322.= Being in close column: =1. Right (left) front into line, 2.

MARCH.= Executed as from column of companies, as explained in par.

314. (285)

=323.= Being in close column: =1. Column of squads, first (fourth)

company, squads right (left), 2. MARCH.=

The designated company marches in column of squads to the right. Each

of the other companies executes the same movement in time to follow

the preceding company in column. (286)

=324.= Being in close line: =1. Column of squads, first (fourth)

company, forward, 2. MARCH.=

[Illustration: FROM CLOSE LINE.]

The designated company moves forward. The other companies (halting if

in march) successively take up the march and follow in column. (287)

Route Step and at Ease

=325.= The battalion marches in =route step= and =at ease= as

prescribed in the School of the Company. (See par. 233.) When marching

in column of companies or platoons, the guides maintain the trace and

distance.

In route marches the major marches at the head of the column; when

necessary, the file closers may be directed to march at the head and

rear of their companies. (288)

Assembly

=326.= The battalion being wholly or partially deployed, or the

companies being separated: =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.=

The major places himself opposite to or designates the element or

point on which the battalion is to assemble. Companies are assembled,

as explained in par. 248, and marched to the indicated point. As the

companies arrive the major or adjutant indicates the formation to be

taken. (289)

COMBAT PRINCIPLES

Orders

=327.= The following references to orders are applicable to attack or

defense: (290)

=328. Use of prescribed commands; "tactical orders," "orders" and

"commands."= In extended order, the company is the largest unit to

execute movements by prescribed commands or means. The major,

assembling his captains if practicable, directs the disposition of the

battalion by means of =tactical orders=. He controls its subsequent

movements by such =orders= or =commands= as are suitable to the

occasion. (291)

=329. Major's order making disposition of battalion for combat; base

company in attack.= In every disposition of the battalion for combat

the major's order should give subordinates sufficient information of

the enemy, of the position of supporting and neighboring troops, and

of the object sought to enable them to conform intelligently to the

general plan.

The order should then designate the companies which are to constitute

the =firing line= and those which are to constitute the =support=. In

attack, it should designate the direction or the objective, the order

and front of the companies on the firing line, and should designate

the right or left company as base company. In defense, it should

describe the front of each company and, if necessary, the sector to be

observed by each, as prescribed in 281-284. (292)

=330. Reconnaissance and protection of flanks.= When the battalion is

operating alone, the major provides for the reconnaissance and

protection of his flanks; if part of a larger force, the major makes

similar provisions, when necessary, without orders from higher

authority, unless such authority has specifically directed other

suitable reconnaissance and protection. (293)

=331. Issue of extra ammunition when battalion is deployed.= When the

battalion is deployed upon the initiative of the major, he will

indicate whether extra ammunition shall be issued; if deployed in

pursuance of orders of higher authority, the major will cause the

issue of extra ammunition, unless such authority has given directions

to the contrary. (For ammunition supply see pars. 569-575.) (294)

Deployment

(See pars. 456-462; 463-466.)

=332.= The following principles of deployment are applicable to attack

or defense. (295)

=333. Avoiding premature deployment.= A premature deployment involves

a long, disorganizing and fatiguing advance of the skirmish line, and

should be avoided. A greater evil is to be caught by heavy fire when

in dense column or other close order formation; hence advantage should

be taken of cover in order to retain the battalion in close order

formation until exposure to heavy hostile fire may reasonably be

anticipated. (296)

=334. Depth of deployment and density of firing line; companies and

detachments conducted to their places by their commanders.= The major

regulates the depth of the deployment and the extent and density of

the firing line, subject to such restrictions as a senior may have

imposed.

Companies or designated subdivisions and detachments are conducted by

their commanders in such manner as best to accomplish the mission

assigned to them under the major's orders. Companies designated for

the firing line march independently to the place of deployment, form

skirmish line, and take up the advance. They conform, in general, to

the base company, as prescribed in Par. 329. (297)

=335. Division of battalion into firing line and support.= The

commander of a battalion, whether it is operating alone or as part of

a larger force, should hold a part of his command out of the =firing

line=. By the judicious use of this force, the major can exert an

influence not otherwise possible over his firing line and can control,

within reasonable limits, an action once begun. So, if his battalion

be assigned to the =firing line=, the major will cause one, two, or

three companies to be deployed on the firing line, retaining the

remaining companies or company as a support for that firing line. The

division of the battalion into firing line and support will depend

upon the front to be covered and the nature and anticipated severity

of the action. (298)

=336. Size of support.= If the battalion be part of a larger command,

the number of companies in the firing line will generally be

determinable from the regimental commander's order; the remainder

constitutes the support, as prescribed in par. 335. If the battalion

is acting alone, the support must be strong enough to maintain the

original fire power of the firing line, to protect the flanks, and to

perform the functions of a reserve, whatever be the issue of the

action, as explained in par. 445. (299)

=337. Position of support.= If the battalion is operating alone, the

support may, according to circumstances, be held in one or two bodies

and placed behind the center, or one or both flanks of the firing

line, or echeloned beyond a flank. If the battalion is part of a

larger force, the support is generally held in one body. (300)

=338. Distance between firing line and support.= The distance between

the firing line and the supporting group or groups will vary between

wide limits; it should be as short as the necessity for protection

from heavy losses will permit. When cover is available, the support

should be as close as 50 to 100 yards; when such cover is not

available, it should not be closer than 300 yards. It may be as far as

500 yards in rear if good cover is there obtainable and is not

obtainable at a lesser distance. (301)

=339. Placing entire battalion or regiment in firing line at

beginning.= In exceptional cases, as in a meeting engagement, it may

be necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the firing

line at the initial deployment, the support being furnished by other

troops. Such deployment causes the early mingling of the larger units,

thus rendering leadership and control extremely difficult. The

necessity for such deployment will increase with the inefficiency of

the commander and of the service of information. (302)

Fire

=340. Major apportions target.= Fire direction and fire control are

functions of company and platoon commanders, as laid down in pars.

285-290. The major makes the primary apportionment of the target--in

defense, by assigning sectors of fire, in attack, by assigning the

objective. In the latter case each company in the firing line takes as

its target that part of the general objective which lies in its front.

(303)

=341. Major indicates where or when fire fight begins.= The major

should indicate the point or time at which the fire fight is to open.

He may do this in his order for deployment or he may follow the firing

line close enough to do so at the proper time. If it be impracticable

for him to do either, the senior officer with the firing line, in each

battalion, selects the time for opening fire. (304)

Attack

(See pars. 456-502.)

=342. Battalion the attack unit.= The battalion is the =attack unit=,

whether operating alone or as part of a larger unit. (305)

=343. Advance of battalion acting as one of several in firing line.=

If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, the major, in

executing his part of the attack, pushes his battalion forward as

vigorously as possible within the front, or section, assigned to it.

The great degree of independence allowed to him as to details demands,

in turn, the exercise of good judgment on his part. Better leadership,

better troops, and more favorable terrain enable one battalion to

advance more rapidly in attack than another less fortunate, and such a

battalion will insure the further advance of the others. The leading

battalion should not, however, become isolated; isolation may lead to

its destruction. (306)

=344. Close in on enemy as much as possible before opening fire.= The

deployment having been made, the firing line advances without firing.

The predominant idea must be to close with the enemy as soon as

possible without ruinous losses. The limited supply of ammunition and

the uncertainty of resupply, the necessity for securing fire

superiority in order to advance within the shorter ranges, and the

impossibility of accomplishing this at ineffective ranges, make it

imperative that fire be not opened as long as the advance can be

continued without demoralizing losses. The attack which halts to open

fire at extreme range (over 1,200 yards) is not likely ever to reach

its destination. Every effort should be made, by using cover or

inconspicuous formations, or by advancing the firing line as a whole,

to arrive within 800 yards of the enemy before opening fire. (For

expenditure of ammunition see pars. 432-433; for advancing the attack

see par. 467.) (307)

=345. Fire to be directed against the hostile infantry.= Except when

the enemy's artillery is able to effect an unusual concentration of

fire, its fire upon deployed infantry causes losses which are

unimportant when compared with those inflicted by his infantry; hence

the attacking infantry should proceed to a position as described

above, and from which an effective fire can be directed against the

hostile infantry with a view to obtaining fire superiority. The

effectiveness of the enemy's fire must be reduced so as to permit

further advance. The more effective the fire to which the enemy is

subjected the less effective will be his fire. (308)

=346. The further advance of the firing line; size of rushing units.=

Occasionally the fire of adjacent battalions, or of infantry employing

fire of position, as explained in par. 438, or of supporting

artillery, as explained in pars. 434-438, will permit the further

advance of the entire firing line from this point, but it will

generally be necessary to advance by rushes, as laid down in par. 259,

of fractions of the line.

The fraction making the rush should be as large as the hostile fire

and the necessity for maintaining fire superiority will permit.

Depending upon circumstances, the strength of the fraction may vary

from a company to a few men.

The advance is made as rapidly as possible without losing fire

superiority. The smaller the fraction which rushes, the greater the

number of rifles which continue to fire upon the enemy. On the other

hand, the smaller the fraction which rushes the slower will be the

progress of the attack. (309)

=347. Size of rushing units.= Enough rifles must continue in action to

insure the success of each rush. Frequently the successive advances of

the firing line must be effected by rushes of fractions of decreased

size; that is, advances by rushes may first be made by company, later

by half company or platoon, and finally by squads or files; but no

=subsequent opportunity= to =increase= the rate of advance, such as

better cover or a decrease of the hostile fire, should be overlooked.

(310)

=348. The rush begun by a flank unit.= Whenever possible, the rush is

begun by a flank fraction of the firing line. In the absence of

express directions from the major, each captain of a flank company

determines when an advance by rushes (par. 222) shall be attempted. A

flank company which inaugurates an advance by rushes becomes the base

company, if not already the base. An advance by rushes having been

inaugurated on one flank, the remainder of the firing line conforms;

fractions rush successively from that flank and halt on the line

established by the initial rush.

The fractions need not be uniform in size; each captain indicates how

his company shall rush, having due regard to the ground and the state

of the fire fight. (311)

=349. Fractions to advance under covering fire.= A fraction about to

rush is sent forward when the remainder of the line is firing

vigorously; otherwise the chief advantage of this method of advancing

is lost.

The length of the rush will vary from 30 to 80 yards, depending upon

the existence of cover, positions for firing, and the hostile fire.

(312)

=350. Subsequent advances.= When the entire firing line of the

battalion has advanced to the new line, fresh opportunities to advance

are sought as before. (313)

=351. Prearranged methods of advancing by rushes prohibited.= Two

identical situations will never confront the battalion; hence at drill

it is prohibited to arrange the details of an advance before the

preceding one has been concluded, or to employ a fixed or prearranged

method of advancing by rushes. (314)

=352. Post of the major.= The major posts himself so as best to direct

the reenforcing of the firing line from the support. When all or

nearly all of the support has been absorbed by the firing line, he

joins, and takes full charge of, the latter. (315)

=353. Size of reenforcements.= The reenforcing of the firing line by

driblets of a squad or a few men has no appreciable effect. The firing

line requires either reenforcement or a strong one. Generally one or

two platoons will be sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the

firing line. (316)

=354. Two methods of reenforcing the firing line.= To facilitate

control and to provide intervals in which reenforcements may be

placed, the companies in the firing line should be kept closed in on

their centers as they become depleted by casualties during the

advance.

When this is impracticable reenforcements must mingle with and thicken

the firing line. In battle the latter method will be the rule rather

than the exception, and to familiarize the men with such conditions

the combat exercises of the battalion should include both methods of

reenforcing. Occasionally, to provide the necessary intervals for

reenforcing by either of these methods, the firing line should be

thinned by causing men to drop out and simulate losses during the

various advances. Under ordinary conditions the depletion of the

firing line for this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half of its

strength. (317)

=355. Fixing bayonets.= The major or senior officer in the firing line

determines when bayonets shall be fixed and gives the proper command

or signal. It is repeated by all parts of the firing line. Each man

who was in the front rank prior to deployment, as soon as he

recognizes the command or signal, suspends firing, quickly fixes his

bayonet, and immediately resumes firing; after which the other men

suspend firing, fix bayonets, and immediately resume firing. The

support also fixes bayonets. The concerted fixing of the bayonet by

the firing line at drill does not simulate battle conditions and

should not be required. It is essential that there be no marked pause

in the firing. Bayonets will be fixed generally before or during the

last, or second last, advance preceding the charge. (318)

=356. The charge.= Subject to orders from higher authority, the major

determines the point from which the charge is to be made. (See Pars.

478-489 regarding the charge.) The firing line having arrived at that

point and being in readiness, the major causes the =charge= to be

sounded. The signal is repeated by the musicians of all parts of the

line. The company officers lead the charge. The skirmishers spring

forward shouting, run with bayonets at charge, and close with the

enemy.

The further conduct of the charging troops will depend upon

circumstances; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or in

pursuing fire, as explained in par. 486; they may advance a short

distance to obtain a field of fire or to drive the enemy from the

vicinity; they may assemble or reorganize, etc. If the enemy vacates

his position every effort should be made to open fire at once on the

retreating mass, reorganization of the attacking troops being of

secondary importance to the infliction of further losses upon the

enemy and to the increase of his confusion, as set forth in pars.

490-494. In combat exercises the major will assume a situation and

terminate the assault accordingly. (319)

Defense

=357. Tactical unit best suited to defensive action.= In defense, as

in attack, the battalion is the tactical unit best suited to

independent assignment. Defensive positions are usually divided into

sections and a battalion assigned to each. (320)

=358. Trenches.= The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover

trenches and obstacles as are to be constructed. He assigns companies

to construct them and details the troops to occupy them. (See "Field

Fortifications," Chapter XVI, Part III.) (321)

=359. Reenforcement of firing line.= The major reenforces the firing

line in accordance with the principles applicable to and explained in

connection with, the attack, in pars. 352-354, maintaining no more

rifles in the firing line than are necessary to prevent the enemy's

advance. (322)

=360. Opening fire.= The supply of ammunition being usually ample,

fire is opened as soon as it is possible to break up the enemy's

formation, stop his advance or inflict material loss, but this rule

must be modified to suit the ammunition supply. (323)

=361. Fixing bayonets.= The major causes the firing line and support

to fix bayonets when an assault by the enemy is imminent. Captains

direct this to be done if they are not in communication with the major

and the measure is deemed advisable.

Fire alone will not stop a determined, skillfully conducted attack.

The defender must have equal tenacity; if he can stay in his trench or

position and cross bayonets, he will at least have neutralized the

hostile first line, and the combat will be decided by reserves. (324)

=362. Support to cover withdrawal.= If ordered or compelled to

withdraw under hostile infantry fire or in the presence of hostile

infantry, the support will be posted so as to cover the retirement of

the firing line (325)

=363. Support in case of battalion acting alone.= When the battalion

is operating alone, the support must be strong and must be fed

sparingly into the firing line, especially if a counter-attack is

planned. Opportunities for counter-attack should be sought at all

times, as explained in pars. 525-530. (326)

COMBAT

INTRODUCTION

=364. Scope of subject of combat tactics in this book.= Part II of

these regulations treats only of the basic principles of combat

tactics as applied to infantry and to the special units, such as

machine guns and mounted scouts, which form a part of infantry

regiments and battalions.

The combat tactics of the arms combined are considered in Field

Service Regulations. (350)

=365. Demands of modern combat upon infantry; complicated maneuvers

impracticable; success dependent upon leadership, etc.= Modern combat

demands the highest order of training, discipline, leadership, and

morale on the part of the infantry. Complicated maneuvers are

impracticable; efficient leadership and a determination to win by

simple and direct methods must be depended upon for success. (351)

=366. Duties and quality of infantry.= The duties of infantry are many

and difficult. All infantry must be fit to cope with all conditions

that may arise. Modern war requires but one kind of infantry--good

infantry. (352)

=367. Offensive necessary for decisive results; use of ground, fire

efficiency, etc.; local success.= The infantry must take the offensive

to gain decisive results. Both sides are therefore likely to attempt

it, though not necessary at the same time or in the same part of a

long battle line.

In the local combats which make up the general battle the better

endurance, use of ground, fire efficiency, discipline, and training

will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the local successes

which enable the commanding general to win the battle. (356)

=368. Requisites of infantry; trained to bear heaviest burdens; good

infantry can defeat vastly superior infantry of poor quality.= The

infantry must have the tenacity to hold every advantage gained, the

individual and collective discipline and skill needed to master the

enemy's fire, the determination to close with the enemy in attack, and

to meet him with the bayonet in defense. Infantry must be trained to

bear the heaviest burdens and losses, both of combat and march.

Good infantry can defeat an enemy greatly superior in numbers, but

lacking in training, discipline, leadership, and morale. (354)

=369. Fixed forms and instructions covering all cases impossible;

study and practice necessary; purposes of practical and theoretical

instruction.= It is impossible to establish fixed forms or to give

general instructions that will cover all cases. Officers and

noncommissioned officers must be so trained that they can apply

suitable means and methods to each case as it arises. Study and

practice are necessary to acquire proper facility in this respect.

Theoretical instruction can not replace practical instruction; the

former supplies correct ideas and gives to practical work an interest,

purpose, and definiteness not otherwise obtainable. (355)

=370. Exercises in extended order to be in nature of combat exercises;

all combat exercises to be conducted under assumed tactical

situations.= After the mechanism of extended order drill has been

learned with precision in the company, every exercise should be, as

far as practicable, in the nature of a maneuver (combat exercise)

against an =imaginary=, =outlined=, or =represented= enemy.

Company extended order drill may be conducted without reference to a

tactical situation, but a combat exercise, whatever may be the size of

the unit employed, should be conducted under an assumed tactical

situation. (356)

=371. Effective method of conducting combat exercises.= An effective

method of conducting a combat exercise is to outline the enemy with a

few men equipped with flags. The umpire or inspector states the

situation, and the commander leads his troops with due regard to the

assumptions made.

Changes in situation, the results of reconnaissance, the character of

artillery fire, etc., are made known to the commander when necessary

by the umpire or inspector, who, in order to observe and influence the

conduct of the exercise, remains in rear of the firing line. From this

position he indicates, with the aid of prearranged signals, the

character of the fire and movements of the hostile infantry. These

signals are intended for the men outlining the enemy. These men repeat

the signals; all officers and men engaged in the exercise and in sight

of the outlined enemy are thus informed of the enemy's action, and the

exercise is conducted accordingly.

Assistant umpires, about one for each company in the firing line, may

assist in indicating hostile fire and movements and in observing the

conduct of the exercise.

An outlined enemy may be made to attack or defend.

Situations should be simple and natural. During or after the exercise

the umpire or inspector should call attention to any improper

movements or incorrect methods of execution. He will prohibit all

movements of troops or individuals that would be impossible if the

enemy were real. The slow progress of events to be expected on the

battlefield can hardly be simulated, but the umpire or inspector will

prevent undue haste and will attempt to enforce a reasonably slow rate

of progress.

The same exercise should not be repeated over the same ground and

under the same situation. Such repetitions lead to the adoption of a

fixed mode of attack or defense and develop mere drill masters. Fixed

or prearranged systems are prohibited. (357)

LEADERSHIP

General Considerations

=372. What constitutes art of leadership.= The art of leadership

consists of applying sound tactical principles to concrete cases on

the battlefield.

Self-reliance, initiative, aggressiveness, and a conception of

team-work are the fundamental characteristics of successful

leadership. (358)

=373. Basis of success; adherence to original plan.= A correct grasp

of the situation and a definite plan of action form the soundest basis

for a successful combat.

A good plan once adopted and put into execution should not be

abandoned unless it becomes clear that it can not succeed.

Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execution of

details in the original plans. (359)

=374. Avoid combats offering no chance of valuable results.= Combats

that do not promise success or some real advantage to the general

issue should be avoided; they cause unnecessary losses, impair the

morale of one's own troops, and raise that of the enemy. (360)

=375. Avoid complicated maneuvers.= Complicated maneuvers are not

likely to succeed in war. All plans and the methods adopted for

carrying them into effect must be simple and direct. (361)

=376. Order and cohesion necessary.= Order and cohesion must be

maintained within the units if success is to be expected. (362)

=377. Officers to be true leaders.= Officers must show themselves to

be true leaders. They must act in accordance with the spirit of their

orders and must require of their troops the strictest discipline on

the field of battle. (363)

=378. Units not to be broken up.= The best results are obtained when

leaders know the capacity and traits of those whom they command; hence

in making detachments units should not be broken up, and a deployment

that would cause an intermingling of the larger units in the firing

line should be avoided. (364)

=379. Leading deployed troops difficult; necessity for training,

discipline and close order.= Leading is difficult when troops are

deployed. A high degree of training and discipline and the use of

close order formations to the fullest extent possible are therefore

required. (365)

=380. Avoidance of unnecessary hardship; limit of endurance exacted

when necessary.= In order to lighten the severe physical strain

inseparable from infantry service in campaign, constant efforts must

be made to spare the troops unnecessary hardship and fatigue; but when

necessity arises, the limit of endurance must be exacted. (366)

=381. Fighting troops not to carry back wounded.= When officers or men

belonging to fighting troops leave their proper places to carry back,

or to care for, wounded during the progress of the action, they are

guilty of skulking. This offense must be repressed with the utmost

vigor. (367)

=382. Complete equipment usually carried into action.= The complete

equipment of the soldier is carried into action unless the weather or

the physical condition of the men renders such measure a severe

hardship. In any event, =only the pack[4] will be laid aside=. The

determination of this question rests with the regimental commander.

The complete equipment affords to men lying prone considerable

protection against shrapnel. (368)

=383. Post of commander; use of reserve in case of victory; when

firing line is controlled by commander.= The post of the commander

must be such as will enable him to observe the progress of events and

to communicate his orders. Subordinate commanders, in addition, must

be in position to transmit the orders of superiors.

Before entering an action, the commander should be as far to the front

as possible in order that he personally may see the situation, order

the deployment, and begin the action strictly in accordance with his

own wishes.

During the action, he must, as a rule, leave to the local leaders the

detailed conduct of the firing line, posting himself either with his

own reserve or in such a position that he is in constant, direct, and

easy communication with it.

A commander takes full and direct charge of his firing line only when

the line has absorbed his whole command.

When their troops are victorious, all commanders should press forward

in order to clinch the advantage gained and to use their reserves to

the best advantage. (369)

=384. Latitude allowed subordinates.= The latitude allowed to officers

is in direct proportion to the size of their commands. Each should see

to the general execution of his task, leaving to the proper

subordinates the supervision of details, and interfering only when

mistakes are made that threaten to seriously prejudice the general

plan. (370)

Teamwork

=385. Latitude allowed subordinates; success depends on cooerdination

of subordinates.= The comparatively wide fronts of deployed units

increase the difficulties of control. Subordinates must therefore be

given great latitude in the execution of their tasks. The success of

the whole depends largely upon how well each subordinate cooerdinates

his work with the general plan.

A great responsibility is necessarily thrown upon subordinates, but

responsibility stimulates the right kind of an officer. (371)

=386. Initiative of subordinates; general plan to be furthered.= In a

given situation it is far better =to do any intelligent thing=

consistent with the aggressive execution of the general plan, than to

search hesitatingly for the ideal. This is the true rule of conduct

for subordinates who are required to act upon their own initiative.

A subordinate who is reasonably sure that his intended action is such

as would be ordered by the commander, were the latter present and in

possession of the facts, has enough encouragement to go ahead

confidently. He must possess the loyalty to carry out the plans of his

superior and the keenness to recognize and to seize opportunities to

further the general plan. (372)

=387. But one supreme will in a battle; subordinates to cooeperate.=

Independence must not become license. Regardless of the number of

subordinates who are apparently supreme in their own restricted

spheres, there is but one battle and but one supreme will to which all

must conform.

Every subordinate must therefore work for the general result. He does

all in his power to insure cooeperation between the subdivisions under

his command. He transmits important information to adjoining units or

to superiors in rear and, with the assistance of information received,

keeps himself and his subordinates duly posted as to the situation.

(373)

=388. Deviation from orders.= When circumstances render it

impracticable to consult the authority issuing an order, officers

should not hesitate to vary from such order when it is clearly based

upon an incorrect view of the situation, is impossible of execution,

or has been rendered impracticable on account of changes which have

occurred since its promulgation. In the application of this rule the

responsibility for mistakes rests upon the subordinate, but

unwillingness to assume responsibility on proper occasions is

indicative of weakness.

Superiors should be careful not to censure an apparent disobedience

where the act was done in the proper spirit and to advance the general

plan. (374)

=389. Intermingling of units; duties of officers and guides.= When the

men of two or more units intermingle in the firing line, all officers

and men submit at once to the senior. Officers and platoon guides seek

to fill vacancies caused by casualties. Each seizes any opportunity to

exercise the functions consistent with his grade, and all assist in

the maintenance of order and control.

Every lull in the action should be utilized for as complete

restoration of order in the firing line as the ground or other

conditions permit. (375)

=390. Separated officers and noncommissioned officers placing

themselves under nearest higher commander.= Any officer or

noncommissioned officer who becomes separated from his proper unit and

can not rejoin must at once place himself and his command at the

disposal of the nearest higher commander. (376)

Anyone having completed an assigned task must seek to rejoin his

proper command. Failing in this, he should join the nearest troops

engaged with the enemy.

=391. Duty of separated soldiers.= Soldiers are taught the necessity

of remaining with their companies, but those who become detached must

join the nearest company and serve with it until the battle is over or

reorganization is ordered. (377)

Orders

=392. Orders for deployment; combat orders of divisions and brigades

usually written.= Commands are deployed and enter the combat by the

orders of the commander to the subordinate commanders.

The initial combat orders of the division are almost invariably

written; those of the brigade are generally so. The written order is

preferable and is used whenever time permits.

If time permits, subsequent orders are likewise written, either as

field orders or messages. (378)

=393. Combat orders of regiments and smaller units; verbal messages.=

The initial combat orders of regiments and smaller units are given

verbally. For this purpose the subordinates for whom the orders are

intended are assembled, if practicable, at a place from which the

situation and plan can be explained.

Subsequent orders are verbal or in the form of verbal or written

messages. Verbal messages should not be used unless they are short and

unmistakable. (379)

=394. Initial combat orders; personal reconnaissance.= The initial

combat order of any commander or subordinate is based upon his

definite plan for executing the task confronting him.

Whenever possible the formation of the plan is preceded by a personal

reconnaissance of the terrain and a careful consideration of all

information of the enemy. (380)

=395. Composition of combat orders.= The combat order gives such

information of the enemy and of neighboring or supporting friendly

troops as will enable subordinates to understand the situation.

The general plan of action is stated in brief terms, but enough of the

commander's intentions is divulged to guide the subsequent actions of

the subordinates.

Clear and concise instructions are given as to the action to be taken

in the combat by each part of the command. In this way the commander

assigns tasks, fronts, objectives, sectors or areas, etc., in

accordance with his plan. If the terms employed convey definite ideas

and leave no loopholes, the conduct of subordinates will generally be

correspondingly satisfactory.

Such miscellaneous matter relating to special troops, trains,

ammunition, and future movements of the commander is added as concerns

the combat itself.

Combat orders should prescribe communication, reconnaissance, flank

protection, etc., when some special disposition is desired or when an

omission on the part of a subordinate may reasonably be feared. (381)

=396. Encroaching upon functions of subordinates prohibited; orders to

be definite.= When issuing orders, a commander should indicate clearly

=what= is to be done by each subordinate, but not =how= it is to be

done. He should not encroach upon the functions of a subordinate by

prescribing details of execution unless he has good reason to doubt

the ability or judgment of the subordinate, and cannot substitute

another.

Although general in its terms, an order must be definite and must be

the expression of a fixed decision. Ambiguity or vagueness indicates

either a vacillation or the inability to formulate orders. (382)

=397. Orders generally given subordinates through their immediate

superiors.= Usually the orders of a commander are intended for, and

are given to, the commanders of the next lower units, but in an

emergency commander should not hesitate to give orders directly to

any subordinate. In such case he should promptly inform the

intermediate commander concerned. (383)

Communication

=398. Communication, how maintained.= Communication is maintained by

means of staff officers, messengers, relay systems, connecting files,

visual signals, telegraph, or telephone. (384)

=399. Lines of communication established by signal corps.= The signal

corps troops of the division establish lines of information from

division to brigade headquarters. The further extension of lines of

information in combat by signal troops is exceptional. (385)

=400. Lines of communication established by regiment; orderlies carry

signal flags.= Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is

responsible for the maintenance of communication from the colonel back

to the brigade and forward to the battalions. For this purpose the

regiment uses the various means which may be furnished it. The staff

and orderlies, regimental and battalion, are practiced in the use of

these means and in messenger service. Orderlies carry signal flags.

(386)

=401. Communication between firing line and major or colonel; company

musicians carry signal flags.= Connection between the firing line and

the major or colonel is practically limited to the prescribed flag,

arm, and bugle signals. Other means can only be supplemental. Company

musicians carry company flags and are practiced in signaling. (387)

=402. Communication by artillery with firing line by means of staff

officers or through agents.= The artillery generally communicates with

the firing line by means of its own staff officers or through an agent

who accompanies some unit in or near the front. The infantry keeps him

informed as to the situation and affords any reasonable assistance.

When the infantry is dependent upon the artillery for fire support,

perfect cooerdination through this representative is of great

importance. (388)

COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE

=403. Importance of combat reconnaissance; avoidance of deployment on

wrong lines.= Combat reconnaissance is of vital importance and must

not be neglected. By proper preliminary reconnaissance, deployments on

wrong lines, or in a wrong direction, and surprises may generally be

prevented. (389)

=404. Protection of troops by proper reconnaissance.= Troops deployed

and under fire can not change front, and thus they suffer greatly when

enfiladed. Troops in close order formation may suffer heavy losses in

a short time if subjected to hostile fire. In both formations troops

must be protected by proper reconnaissance and warning. (390)

=405. Difficulty of reconnaissance depends on extent of enemy's

screen; strength of reconnoitering parties.= The difficulty of

reconnaissance increases in proportion to the measures adopted by the

enemy to screen himself.

The strength of the reconnoitering party is determined by the

character of the information desired and the nature of the hostile

screen. In exceptional cases as much as a battalion may be necessary

in order to break through the hostile screen and enable the commander

or officer in charge to reconnoiter in person.

A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the way for

small patrols, to serve as a supporting force or rallying point for

them, and to receive and transmit information. Such parties maintain

signal communication with the main body if practicable. (391)

=406. Each separate column to protect itself by reconnaissance.= Each

separate column moving forward to deploy must reconnoiter to its front

and flank and keep in touch with adjoining columns. The extent of the

reconnaissance to the flank depends upon the isolation of the columns.

(392)

=407. Reconnaissance before attacking.= Before an attack a

reconnaissance must be made to determine the enemy's position, the

location of his flanks, the character of the terrain, the nature of

the hostile field works, etc., in order to prevent premature

deployment and the resulting fatigue and loss of time.

It will frequently be necessary to send forward a thin skirmish line

in order to induce the enemy to open fire and reveal his position.

(393)

=408. Extent of reconnaissance.= It will frequently be impossible to

obtain satisfactory information until after the action has begun. The

delay that may be warranted for the purpose of reconnaissance depends

upon the nature of the attack and the necessity for promptness. For

example, in a meeting engagement, and sometimes in a holding attack,

the reconnaissance may have to be hasty and superficial, whereas in an

attack against an enemy carefully prepared for defense there will

generally be both time and necessity for thorough reconnaissance.

(394)

=409. Reconnaissance in defense.= In defense, reconnaissance must be

kept up to determine the enemy's line of advance, to ascertain his

dispositions, to prevent his reconnaissance, etc.

Patrols or parties posted to prevent hostile reconnaissance should

relieve the main body of the necessity of betraying its position by

firing on small bodies of the enemy. (395)

=410. Duration of reconnaissance; protection of flanks.=

Reconnaissance continues throughout the action.

A firing or skirmish line can take care of its front, but its flanks

are especially vulnerable to modern firearms. The moral effect of

flanking fire is as great as the physical effect. Hence, combat

patrols to give warning or covering detachments to give security are

indispensable on exposed flanks. This is equally true in attack or

defense. (396)

=411. Responsibility of infantry commanders for reconnaissance;

surprise unpardonable.= The fact that cavalry patrols are known to be

posted in a certain direction does not relieve infantry commanders of

the responsibility for reconnaissance and security.

To be surprised by an enemy at short range is an unpardonable offense.

(397)

=412. Commander of flank battalion responsible for security of his

flank.= The commander of a battalion on a flank of a general line

invariably provides for the necessary reconnaissance and security on

that flank unless higher authority has specifically ordered it. In

any event, he sends out combat patrols as needed.

Where his battalion is on a flank of one section of the line and a

considerable interval lies between his battalion and the next section,

he makes similar provision. (398)

=413. Patrols established by battalion commanders.= Battalion

commanders in the first line establish patrols to observe and report

the progress or conduct of adjoining troops when these can not be

seen. (399)

FIRE SUPERIORITY

PURPOSE AND NATURE

(See par. 427)

=414. Success in battle dependent upon fire superiority.= In a

decisive battle success depends on gaining and maintaining fire

superiority. Every effort must be made to gain it early and then to

keep it.

Attacking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to reach

the hostile position. Over open ground attack is possible only when

the attacking force has a decided fire superiority. With such

superiority the attack is not only possible, but success is probable

and without ruinous losses.

Defending troops can prevent a charge only when they can master the

enemy's fire and inflict heavy losses upon him. (400)

=415. Volume and accuracy necessary to obtain fire superiority.= To

obtain fire superiority it is necessary to produce a heavy volume of

accurate fire. Every increase in the effectiveness of the fire means a

corresponding decrease in the effectiveness of the enemy's fire.

The volume and accuracy of fire will depend upon several

considerations:

=(a) The number of rifles employed.= On a given front the greatest

volume of fire is produced by a firing line having only sufficient

intervals between men to permit the free use of their rifles. The

maximum density of a firing line is therefore about one man per yard

of front.

=(b)= The =rate= of fire affects its volume; an excessive rate reduces

its accuracy.

=(c) The character of the target influences both volume and accuracy.=

Larger dimensions, greater visibility, and shorter range increase the

rate of fire; greater density increases =the effect=.

=(d) Training and discipline= have an important bearing on the rate or

volume of fire, but their greatest influence is upon accuracy.

The firing efficiency of troops is reduced by fatigue and adverse

psychological influences.

=(e) Fire direction and control improve collective accuracy.= The

importance of fire direction increases rapidly with the range. Control

exerts a powerful influence at all ranges. (401)

FIRE DIRECTION AND CONTROL

Opening Fire

=416. Long range fire, when effective.= Beyond effective ranges

important results can be expected only when the target is large and

distinct and much ammunition is used.

Long range fire is permissible in pursuit on account of the moral

effect of any fire under the circumstances. At other times such fire

is of doubtful value. (402)

=417. Opening fire in attack.= In attack, the desire to open fire when

losses are first felt must be repressed. Considerations of time,

target, ammunition, and morale make it imperative that the attack

withhold its fire and press forward to a first firing position close

to the enemy. The attacker's target will be smaller and fainter than

the one he presents to the enemy. (403)

=418. Opening fire in defense.= In defense, more ammunition is

available, ranges are more easily determined, and the enemy usually

presents a larger target. The defender may therefore open fire and

expect results at longer ranges than the attacker, and particularly if

the defenders intend a delaying action only.

If the enemy has a powerful artillery, it will often be best for the

defending infantry to withhold its fire until the enemy offers a

specially favorable target. Vigorous and well-directed bursts of fire

are then employed. The troops should therefore be given as much

artificial protection as time and means permit, and at an agreed

signal expose themselves as much as necessary and open fire. (404)

=419. Opening fire in unexpected, close encounters.= In unexpected,

close encounters a great advantage accrues to the side which first

opens rapid and accurate fire with battle sight. (405)

Use of Ground

=420. Requisites of ground for cover.= The position of the firers must

afford a suitable field of fire.

The ground should permit constant observation of the enemy, and yet

enable the men to secure some cover when not actually firing.

Troops whose target is for the moment hidden by unfavorable ground,

either move forward to better ground or seek to execute cross fire on

another target. (406)

=421. Skillful use of ground reduces visibility.= The likelihood of a

target being hit depends to a great extent upon its visibility. By

skillful use of ground, a firing line may reduce its visibility

without loss of fire power. Sky lines are particularly to be avoided.

(407)

Choice of Target

=422. Target to be chosen.= The target chosen should be the hostile

troops most dangerous to the firers. These will usually be the nearest

hostile infantry. When no target is specially dangerous, that one

should be chosen which promises the most hits. (408)

=423. Target not to be changed except for good reason.= Frequent

changes of target impair the fire effect. Random changes to small,

unimportant targets impair fire discipline and accomplish nothing.

Attention should be confined to the main target until substantial

reason for change is apparent. (409)

=424. Flanking fire to be delivered when opportunity offers.= An

opportunity to deliver flanking fire, especially against artillery

protected in front by shields, is an example warranting change of

target and should never be overlooked. Such fire demoralizes the

troops subjected to it, even if the losses inflicted are small. In

this manner a relatively small number of rifles can produce important

results. (410)

The Range

=425. Importance of correct sight setting.= Beyond close range, the

correct setting of the rear sight is of primary importance, provided

the troops are trained and well in hand. The necessity for correct

sight setting increases rapidly with the range. Its importance

decreases as the quality of the troops decrease, for the error in

sight setting, except possibly at very long ranges, becomes

unimportant when compared with the error in holding and aiming. (411)

=426. Determination of ranges.= In attack, distances must usually be

estimated and corrections made as errors are observed. Mechanical

range finders and ranging volleys are practicable at times.

In defense, it is generally practicable to measure more accurately the

distances to visible objects and to keep a record of them for future

use. (412)

Distribution of Fire and Target

=427. Purpose of fire superiority; distribution of fire and target.=

The purpose of fire superiority is to get hits whenever possible, but

at all events to keep down the enemy's fire and render it harmless. To

accomplish this the target must be covered with fire throughout its

whole extent. Troops who are not fired upon will fire with nearly

peacetime accuracy.

The target is roughly divided and a part is assigned to each unit. No

part of the target is neglected. In attack, by a system of overlapping

in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile line can be kept

under fire even during a rush. (Pars. 400-401.) (413)

Observation

=428. Observation of target.= The correctness of the sight setting and

the distribution of fire over the target can be verified only by

careful observation of the target, the adjacent ground, and the effect

upon the enemy. (414)

=429. Observation determines whether fire fight is being properly

conducted.= Observation only can determine whether the fire fight is

being properly conducted. If the enemy's fire is losing in accuracy

and effect, the observer realizes that his side is gaining

superiority. If the enemy's fire remains or becomes effective and

persistent, he realizes that corrective measures are necessary to

increase either volume or accuracy, or both. (415)

Discipline

=430. What discipline accomplishes.= Discipline makes good direction

and control possible and is the distinguishing mark of trained troops.

(416)

=431. Communication on firing line by means of signals.= The

discipline necessary in the firing line will be absent unless officers

and noncommissioned officers can make their will known to the men. In

the company, therefore, communication must be by simple signals which,

in the roar of musketry, will attract the attention and convey the

correct meaning. (417)

Expenditure of Ammunition

=432. Use of ammunition in attack.= In attack the supply is more

limited than in defense. Better judgment must be exercised in

expenditure. Ordinarily, troops in the firing line of an attack can

not expect to have that day more ammunition than they carry into the

combat, except such additions as come from the distribution of

ammunition of dead and wounded and the surplus brought by

reenforcements. (418)

=433. True economy in expenditure of ammunition.= When a certain fire

effect is required, the necessary ammunition must be expended without

hesitation. Several hours of firing may be necessary to gain fire

superiority. True economy can be practiced only by closing on the

enemy, as explained in par. 344, before first opening fire, and

thereafter suspending fire when there is nothing to shoot at. (419)

Supporting Artillery

=434. Artillery fire principal aid of infantry.= Artillery fire is the

principal aid to the infantry in gaining and keeping fire superiority,

not only by its hits, but by the moral effect it produces on the

enemy. (420)

=435. Functions of artillery fire in attack and defense.= In attack,

artillery assists the forward movement of the infantry. It keeps down

the fire of the hostile artillery and seeks to neutralize the hostile

infantry by inflicting losses upon it, destroying its morale, driving

it to cover, and preventing it from using its weapons effectively.

In defense, it ignores the hostile artillery when the enemy's attack

reaches a decisive stage and assists in checking the attack, joining

its fire power to that of the defending infantry. (421)

=436. Fire of artillery over friendly troops.= Troops should be

accustomed to being fired over by friendly artillery and impressed

with the fact that the artillery should continue firing upon the enemy

until the last possible moment. The few casualties resulting from

shrapnel bursting short are trifling compared with those that would

result from the increased effectiveness of the enemy's infantry fire

were the friendly artillery to cease firing.

Casualties inflicted by supporting artillery are not probable until

the opposing infantry lines are less than 200 yards apart. (422)

=437. When no longer safe for artillery to fire over friendly troops.=

When the distance between the hostile infantry lines becomes so short

as to render further use of friendly artillery inadvisable, the

commander of the infantry firing line, using a preconcerted

signal,[5] informs the artillery commander. The latter usually

increases the range in order to impede the strengthening of the

enemy's foremost line, as explained in pars. 345-346. (423)

Fire of Position

=438. Fire of position, when used.= Infantry is said to execute fire

of position when it is posted so as to assist an attack by firing over

the heads, or off the flank, of the attacking troops and is not itself

to engage in the advance; or when, in defense, it is similarly posted

to augment the fire of the main firing line.

Machine guns serve a like purpose, as set forth in par. 555.

In a decisive action, fire of position should be employed whenever the

terrain permits and reserve infantry is available. (424)

DEPLOYMENT

=439. Formation of troops before and during deployment.= Troops are

massed preparatory to deployment when the nature of their deployment

can not be foreseen or it is desirable to shorten the column or to

clear the road. Otherwise, in the deployment of large commands,

whether in march column, in bivouac, or massed, and whether forming,

for attack or for defense, they are ordinarily first formed into a

line of columns to facilitate the extension of the front prior to

deploying.

The rough line or lines of columns thus formed enable troops to take

advantage of the terrain in advancing and shorten the time occupied in

forming the firing line. (425)

=440. Action of brigade and regimental commanders in deployment of

division.= In deploying the division, each brigade is assigned a

definite task or objective. On receipt of his orders, the brigade

commander conducts his brigade in column or in line of regiments,

until it is advisable that it be broken into smaller columns. He then

issues his order, assigning to each regiment its task, if practicable.

In a similar manner the regimental commanders lead their regiments

forward in column, or in line of columns, until the time arrives for

issuing the regimental order. It is seldom advisable to break up the

battalion before issuing orders for its deployment. (426)

=441. Personal reconnaissance before deployment.= Each subordinate

commander, after receiving his order for the action, should precede

his command as far as possible, in order to reconnoiter the ground

personally, and should prepare to issue his orders promptly. (427)

=442. Each commander to guard his command against surprise.= Each

commander of a column directs the necessary reconnaissance to front

and flanks; by this means and by a judicious choice of ground he

guards against surprise. (428)

=443. Premature formation of firing line to be avoided.= The premature

formation of the firing line causes unnecessary fatigue and loss of

time, and may result in a faulty direction being taken. Troops once

deployed make even minor changes of direction with difficulty, and

this difficulty increases with the length of the firing line. (429)

=444. Rectification of deployment in wrong direction.= In the larger

units, when the original deployment is found to be in the wrong

direction, it will usually be necessary to deploy the reserve on the

correct front and withdraw and assemble the first line. (430)

=445. Number of troops to be deployed in beginning.= To gain decisive

results, it will generally be necessary to use all the troops at some

stage of the combat. But in the beginning, while the situation is

uncertain, care should be taken not to engage too large a proportion

of the command. On the other hand, there is no greater error than to

employ too few and to sacrifice them by driblets. (For division of the

battalion in attack see 335-339.) (431)

=446. Dense, well-directed, and controlled line of heavy fire gives

fire superiority.= When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire

superiority is essential. To gain this, two things are necessary: A

heavy fire and a fire well-directed and controlled. Both of these are

best obtained when the firing line is as dense as practicable, while

leaving the men room for the free use of their rifles.

If the men are too widely separated, direction and control are very

difficult, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is slight in

proportion to the front occupied. (432)

=447. Density of 1 man per yard; occupation of only sections of long

lines.= In an attack or stubborn defense the firing line should have a

density of one man per yard of front occupied.

Where the tactical situation demands the holding of a line too long to

be occupied throughout at this density, it is generally better to

deploy companies or platoons at one man per yard, leaving gaps in the

line between them, than to distribute the men uniformly at increased

intervals. (433)

=448. Use of thin firing line.= A relatively thin firing line may be

employed when merely covering the movements of other forces; when on

the defensive against poor troops; when the final action to be taken

has not yet been determined; and, in general, when fire superiority is

not necessary. (434)

=449. Length of firing line employed by whole force; strength of

supports and reserves; density of charging line.= The length of the

firing line that the whole force may employ depends upon the density

of the line and the strength in rear required by the situation.

Supports and reserves constitute the strength in rear.

In a decisive attack they should be at least strong enough to replace

a heavy loss in the original firing line and to increase the charging

line to a density of at least one and one-half men per yard and still

have troops in rear for protection and for the other purposes

mentioned above. (435)

=450. Strength of reserve; troops deployed varying from 1 to 10 men

per yard.= In the original deployment the strength of the reserve held

out by each commander comprises from one-sixth to two-thirds of his

unit, depending upon the nature of the service expected of the

reserve.

A small force in a covering or delaying action requires very little

strength in rear, while a large force fighting a decisive battle

requires much. Therefore, depending upon circumstances, the original

deployment, including the strength in rear, may vary from 1 to 10 men

per yard. Against an enemy poorly disciplined and trained, or lacking

in morale, a thinner deployment is permissible. (436)

=451. Density of whole deployment varies with size of command.= The

density of the whole deployment increases with the size of the

command, because the larger the command the greater the necessity for

reserves. Thus, battalion acting alone may attack two men per yard of

front, but a regiment, with three battalions, may only double the

front of the one battalion. (437)

=452. Division of battle line into battle districts and density of

deployment therein.= By the assignment of divisions or larger units to

parts of a line of battle several miles long, a series of

semi-independent battle, or local combat, districts are created.

The general deployment for a long line of battle comprising several

battle districts is not directly considered in these regulations. The

deployments treated of herein are those of the infantry within such

districts.

The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,

depending upon the activity expected in each. Within these battle

districts, as well as in smaller forces acting alone, parts of the

line temporarily of less importance may be held weakly, in order to

economize troops and to have more at the decisive point. (438)

=453. Extent of front occupied by a unit depends upon security of

flanks.= The front that a unit may occupy when deployed depends also

upon whether its flanks are secured. If both flanks are secured by

other troops, the unit may increase its front materially by reducing

its reserve or supports. If only one flank is so secured, the front

may still be somewhat increased, but the exposed flank must be guarded

by posting the supports or reserve toward that flank.

Natural obstacles that secure the flanks have practically the same

effect upon deployment. (439)

=454. Regiments, battalions, and companies deployed side by side.=

Except when assigned as supports or reserve, regiments in the brigade,

battalions in the regiment, and companies in the battalion are, when

practicable, deployed side by side. (440)

=455. Battalions furnish firing line and supports; larger units

furnish reserves; employment of reserve.= In the deployment,

battalions establish the firing line, each furnishing its own support.

In each unit larger than the battalion a reserve is held out, its

strength depending upon circumstances. In general, the reserve is

employed by the commander to meet or improve conditions brought about

by the action of the firing line. It must not be too weak or too split

up. It must be posted where the commander believes it will be needed

for decisive action, or where he desires to bring about such action.

When necessary, parts of it reenforce or prolong the firing line.

(441)

ATTACK

(For the battalion in Attack, see pars. 342-346)

=456. Fire superiority means success; how to obtain fire superiority.=

An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is gained and

properly used.

To gain this superiority generally requires that the attack employ

more rifles than the defense; this in turn means a longer line, as

both sides will probably hold a strong firing line. (442)

=457. When frontal attack may be successful.= With large forces, a

direct frontal attack gives the attacker little opportunity to bring

more rifles to bear. However, if the enemy is unduly extended, a

frontal attack may give very decisive results. (443)

=458. When turning movements are allowable.= Owing to the difficulty

of control and the danger of the parts being defeated in detail, wide

turning movements are seldom allowable except in large forces. (444)

=459. Advantages of enveloping attack.= If the attack can be so

directed that, while the front is covered, another fraction of the

command strikes a flank more or less obliquely (an enveloping attack),

the advantages gained are a longer line and more rifles in action;

also a converging fire opposed to the enemy's diverging fire. (445)

=460. Envelopment of both flanks.= An envelopment of both flanks

should never be attempted without a very decided superiority in

numbers. (446)

=461. Enveloping attacks result in local frontal attacks; advantage of

envelopment.= The enveloping attack will nearly always result locally

in a frontal attack, for it will be met by the enemy's reserve. The

advantage of envelopment lies in the longer concentric line, with its

preponderance of rifles and its converging fire. (447)

=462. Cooeperation between frontal and enveloping attacks; the two

attacks to be deployed considerable distance from hostile positions.=

Cooeperation between the frontal and enveloping attacks is essential to

success. Both should be pushed vigorously and simultaneously, and

ordinarily both should move simultaneously to the charge; but at the

final stage of the attack conditions may sometimes warrant one in

charging while the other supports it with fire.

The envelopment of a flank is brought about with difficulty when made

by troops already deployed in another direction or by their reserves.

The two attacks should be deployed at a suitable distance apart, with

the lines of attack converging in rear of the hostile position. The

troops that are to make the enveloping attack should deploy in the

proper direction at the start and should be given orders which enable

them to gain their point of deployment in the most direct and

practical manner.

The enveloping attack is generally made the stronger, especially in

small forces. (448)

DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACK

=463. Distance from hostile position at which deployment is made;

foreground to be cleared of hostile detachments before deployment.=

Where open terrain exposes troops to hostile artillery fire it may be

necessary to make the deployment 2 miles or more from the hostile

position.

The foreground should be temporarily occupied by covering troops. If

the enemy occupies the foreground with detachments, the covering

troops must drive them back. (449)

=464. Moving well forward and deploying at night.= To enable large

forces to gain ground toward the enemy, it may sometimes be cheaper

and quicker in the end to move well forward and to deploy at night. In

such case the area in which the deployment is to be made should, if

practicable, be occupied by covering troops before dark.

The deployment will be made with great difficulty unless the ground

has been studied by daylight. The deployment gains little unless it

establishes the firing line well within effective range of the enemy's

main position. (See Night Operations, par. 580-590.) (450)

=465. Each unit deploys on its direction line; intervals between

battalions on firing line.= Each unit assigned a task deploys when on

its direction line, or opposite its objective, and when it has no

longer sufficient cover for advancing in close order. In the firing

line, intervals of 25 to 50 yards should be maintained as long as

possible between battalions. In the larger units it may be necessary

to indicate on the map the direction or objective, but to battalion

commanders it should be pointed out on the ground. (451)

=466. Post of reserve; reserve charged with flank protection.= The

reserve is kept near enough to the firing line to be on hand at the

decisive stage. It is posted with reference to the attack, or to that

part of the attacking line, from which the greater results are

expected; it is also charged with flank protection, but should be kept

intact.

Supports are considered in paragraphs 262 to 265, inclusive, and 335

to 339, inclusive. (452)

ADVANCING THE ATTACK

=467. Firing line to advance as far as possible before opening fire.=

The firing line must ordinarily advance a long distance before it is

justified in opening fire. It can not combat the enemy's artillery,

and it is at a disadvantage if it combats the defender's long-range

rifle fire. Hence it ignores both and, by taking full advantage of

cover and of the discipline of the troops, advances to a first firing

position at the shortest range possible, as explained in par. 344.

Formations for crossing this zone with the minimum loss are considered

in paragraphs 249 to 257, inclusive. These and other methods of

crossing such zones should be studied and practiced. (453)

=468. Invisibility best protection while advancing.= The best

protection against loss while advancing is to escape the enemy's view.

(454)

=469. Advance of battalions.= Each battalion finds its own firing

position, conforming to the general advance as long as practicable

and taking advantage of the more advanced position of an adjacent

battalion in order to gain ground.

The position from which the attack opens fire is further considered in

paragraphs 343-345, inclusive. (455)

=470. Infantry moving to the attack passing through deployed

artillery.= It will frequently become necessary for infantry moving to

the attack to pass through deployed artillery. This should be done so

as to interfere as little as possible with the latter's fire, and

never so as to cause that fire to cease entirely. As far as

practicable, advantage should be taken of intervals in the line, if

any. An understanding between artillery and infantry commanders should

be had, so as to effect the movement to the best advantage. (456)

=471. Advanced elements of firing line not to open fire on main

hostile position.= In advancing the attack, advanced elements of the

firing line or detachments in front of it should not open fire except

in defense or to clear the foreground of the enemy. Fire on the

hostile main position should not be opened until all or nearly all of

the firing line can join in the fire. (457)

THE FIRE ATTACK

(See pars. 414-438.)

=472. Fire superiority sought at first firing position, and to be

maintained until charging point is reached; size of rushing units.= At

the first firing position the attack seeks to gain fire superiority.

This may necessitate a steady, accurate fire a long time. The object

is to subdue the enemy's fire and keep it subdued so that the

attacking troops may advance from this point to a favorable place near

the enemy from which the charge may be made. Hence, in the advance by

rushes, sufficient rifles must be kept constantly in action to keep

down the enemy's fire; this determines the size of the fraction

rushing. (458)

=473. Futility of advancing without fire superiority.= To advance

without fire superiority against a determined defense would result in

such losses as to bring the attack to a standstill or to make the

apparent success barren of results. (459)

=474. Signs that fire superiority has been gained.= Diminution of the

enemy's fire and a pronounced loss in effectiveness are the surest

signs that fire superiority has been gained and that a part of the

firing line can advance. (460)

=475. Retiring under fire in daylight suicidal; intrenching.= The men

must be impressed with the fact that, having made a considerable

advance under fire and having been checked, it is suicidal to turn

back in daylight.

If they can advance no farther, they must intrench and hold on until

the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation develops.

Intrenching is resorted to only when necessary. Troops who have

intrenched themselves under fire are moved forward again with

difficulty. (461)

=476. Supports and reserves occupying trenches vacated by firing line,

to improve same.= Supports and reserves occupying intrenchments

vacated by the firing line should improve them, but they must not be

held back or diverted from their true missions on this account. (462)

=477. Greater detail of conduct of fire attack.= Paragraphs 346 to

354, inclusive, deal more in detail with the conduct of the fire

attack. (463)

THE CHARGE

(See pars. 355-356)

=478. What fire superiority accomplishes; psychological moment for

charge determined by tactical instinct.= Fire superiority beats down

the enemy's fire, destroys his resistance and morale, and enables the

attacking troops to close on him, but an actual or threatened

occupation of his position is needed to drive him out and defeat him.

The psychological moment for the charge can not be determined far in

advance. The tactical instinct of the responsible officer must decide.

(464)

=479. When, and distance over which charge should be made.=

The defenders, if subjugated by the fire attack, will frequently leave

before the charge begins. On the other hand, it may be necessary to

carry the fire attack close to the position and follow it up with a

short dash and a bayonet combat. Hence the distance over which the

charge may be made will vary between wide limits. It may be from 25 to

400 yards.

The charge should be made at the earliest moment that promises

success; otherwise the full advance of victory will be lost. (465)

=480. Charge to be made with approval of commander of attacking line;

battalion commanders signal commander of line when ready to charge;

charge to be made simultaneously.= The commander of the attacking line

should indicate his approval, or give the order, before the charge is

made. Subordinate commanders, usually battalion commanders, whose

troops are ready to charge, signal that fact to the commander. It may

be necessary for them to wait until other battalions or other parts of

the line are ready or until the necessary reserves arrive.

At the signal for the charge the firing line and nearby supports and

reserves rush forward. (See pars. 355 and 356.)

The charge is made simultaneously, if possible, by all the units

participating therein, but once committed to the assault, battalions

should be pushed with the utmost vigor and no restraint placed on the

ardor of charging troops by an attempt to maintain alignment. (466)

=481. Charge not to be made without sufficient troops; reserves give

impetus; avoiding too dense a mass.= Before ordering the charge the

commander should see that enough troops are on hand to make it a

success. Local reserves joining the firing line in time to participate

in the charge give it a strong impetus. Too dense a mass should be

avoided. (467)

=482. Line to be strengthened by prolongation.= The line should be

strengthened by prolongation, if practicable, and remaining troops

kept in formation for future use; but rather than that the attack

should fail, the last formed body will be sent in, unless it is very

apparent that it can do no good. (468)

=483. Additional force for pursuit.= To arrive in the hostile position

with a very compact firing line and a few formed supports is

sufficient for a victory, but an additional force kept well in hand

for pursuit is of inestimable value. (469)

=484. Premature charge to be avoided; charging without authority from

the rear.= A premature charge by a part of the line should be avoided,

but if begun, the other parts of the line should join at once if there

is any prospect of success. Under exceptional conditions a part of the

line may be compelled to charge without authority from the rear. The

intention to do so should be signaled to the rear. (470)

=485. Confidence in ability to use bayonet.= Confidence in their

ability to use the bayonet gives the assaulting troops the promise of

success. (471)

=486. Pursuing fire; disordered units not to pursue.= If the enemy has

left the position when the charging troops reach it, the latter should

open a rapid fire upon the retreating enemy, if he is in sight. It is

not advisable for the mixed and disordered units to follow him, except

to advance to a favorable firing position or to cover the

reorganization of others. (472)

=487. Pursuing troops; reorganization of charging line; preparations

to meet counter-attack.= The nearest formed bodies accompanying or

following the charge are sent instantly in pursuit. Under cover of

these troops order is restored in the charging line. If the captured

position is a part of a general line or is an advanced post, it should

be intrenched and occupied at once.

The exhaustion of officers and men must not cause the neglect of

measures to meet a counter-attack. (473)

=488. Steps to be taken when attack receives temporary setback.= If

the attack receives a temporary setback and it is intended to

strengthen and continue it, officers will make every effort to stop

the rearward movement and will reestablish the firing line in a

covered position as close as possible to the enemy. (474)

=489. Steps to be taken if attack is abandoned.= If the attack must be

abandoned, the rearward movement should continue with promptness until

the troops reach a feature of the terrain that facilitates the task of

checking and reorganizing them. The point selected should be so far to

the rear as to prevent interference by the enemy before the troops are

ready to resist. The withdrawal of the attacking troops should be

covered by the artillery and by reserves, if any are available.

(See Night Operations, pars. 580-590.) (475)

PURSUIT

=490. Full fruits of victory reaped by pursuit.= To reap the full

fruits of victory a vigorous pursuit must be made. The natural

inclination to be satisfied with a successful charge must be overcome.

The enemy must be allowed no more time to reorganize than is

positively unavoidable. (476)

=491. Parts played in pursuit by reserve, artillery, and charging

troops.= The part of the reserve that is still formed or is best under

control is sent forward in pursuit and vigorously attacks the enemy's

main body or covering detachments wherever found.

The artillery delivers a heavy fire upon the retreating enemy; the

disordered attacking troops secure the position, promptly reform and

become a new reserve. (477)

=492. Strengthening of position captured, if section of general line.=

If the captured position is a section of the general line, the breach

should be heavily occupied, made wider, and strongly secured by

drawing on all reserves in the vicinity. (478)

=493. Pursuit by parallel roads.= After the pursuit from the immediate

battlefield, pursuit by parallel roads is especially effective where

large commands are concerned. (479)

=494. Artillery and cavalry in pursuit.= Artillery and cavalry are

very effective in pursuit. (480)

ATTACK OF FORTIFICATIONS

=495. Modifications of attack in case of fortifications.= Few

modifications enter into the problem of attacking fortifications. Such

as are to be considered relate chiefly to the greater time and labor

of advancing, the more frequent use of darkness and the use of hand

grenades to augment the fire. (481)

=496. Approaching charging point under cover of darkness.= If the

enemy is strongly fortified and time permits, it may be advisable to

wait and approach the charging point under cover of darkness. The

necessary reconnaissance and arrangements should be made before dark.

If the charge is not to be made at once, the troops intrench the

advanced position, using sand bags if necessary. Before daylight the

foreground should be cleared of obstacles. (482)

=497. Charging without fire preparation.= If the distance is short and

other conditions are favorable, the charge may be made without fire

preparation. If made, it should be launched with spirit and suddenness

at the break of day. (See Night Operations pars. 580-590.) (483)

=498. Advancing to charging point by sapping.= In siege operations

troops are usually advanced to the charging point by sapping. This

method, however, presupposes that an early victory is not necessary,

or that it is clearly inadvisable to attempt more direct methods.

(484)

HOLDING ATTACK

=499. Requisites of the holding attack.= The holding attack must be

vigorous enough to hold the enemy in position and must present a front

strong enough to conceal the secondary nature of the attack.

The holding attack need have comparatively little strength in rear,

but conceals the fact by a firing line not distinguishable from that

of a decisive attack. (485)

=500. Post and strength of supports and reserves.= Supports and

reserves are kept at short distances. Their strength is less if the

object is merely to hold the enemy fast than if the object is, in

addition, to compel him to use up reserves. (486)

=501. Holding attacks developing into decisive attacks.= Holding

attacks which may later develop into decisive attacks should be

correspondingly strong in rear. (487)

=502. Feint attacks.= All feint attacks should employ dense firing

lines. Their weakness is in rear and is concealed. (488)

DEFENSE

POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS

=503. Requirements of a good defensive position.= The first

requirement of a good position is a clear field of fire and view to

the front and exposed flanks to a distance of 600 to 800 yards or

more. The length of front should be suitable to the size of the

command and the flanks should be secure. The position should have

lateral communication and cover for supports and reserves. It should

be one which the enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his

mission.

A position having all these advantages will rarely, if ever, be found.

The one should be taken which conforms closest to the description.

(489)

=504. Utilization of natural cover; construction of fieldworks and

obstacles.= The natural cover of the position should be fully

utilized. In addition, it should be strengthened by fieldworks and

obstacles.

The best protection is afforded by deep, narrow, inconspicuous

trenches. If little time is available, as much as practicable must be

done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should not cause their

construction to be omitted, and the fact that they have been

constructed should not influence the action of a commander, if

conditions are found to be other than expected. (490)

=505. Construction of communicating and cover trenches, head cover,

etc.= When time and troops are available the preparations include the

necessary communicating and cover trenches, head cover, bombproofs,

etc. The fire trenches should be well supplied with ammunition.

The supports are placed close at hand in cover trenches when natural

cover is not available. (491)

=506. Dummy trenches.= Dummy trenches frequently cause the hostile

artillery to waste time and ammunition and to divert its fire. (492)

=507. Location, extent, garrison, etc., of fieldworks.= The location,

extent, profile, garrison, etc., of fieldworks are matters to be

decided by the infantry commanders. Officers must be able to choose

ground and properly intrench it. (See "Field Fortifications," Chapter

XVI, Part III.) (493)

=508. Outlining trace of trenches in combat exercises.= In combat

exercises, when it is impracticable to construct the trenches

appropriate to the exercise, their trace may be outlined by bayonets,

sticks, or other markers, and the responsible officers required to

indicate the profile selected, method and time of construction,

garrisons, etc. (494)

DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE

=509. Density of whole deployment.= The density of the whole

deployment depends upon the expected severity of the action, the

character of the enemy, the condition of the flanks, the field of

fire, the terrain, and the available artificial or natural protection

for the troops. (495)

=510. Density of firing line.= If exposed, the firing line should be

as dense in defense as in attack. If the firing line is well

intrenched and has a good field of fire, it may be made thinner.

Weaker supports are permissible. For the same number of troops the

front occupied on the defensive may therefore be longer than on the

offensive, the battalions placing more companies in the firing line.

(496)

=511. Strength in rear to be increased when change from defensive to

offensive is contemplated.= If it is intended only to delay the enemy,

a fairly strong deployment is sufficient, but if decisive results are

desired, a change to the offensive must be contemplated and the

corresponding strength in rear provided. This strength is in the

reserve, which should be as large as the demands of the firing line

and supports permit. Even in a passive defense the reserve should be

as strong as in the attack; unless the flanks are protected by other

means. (497)

=512. Post of supports; cover for supports.= Supports are posted as

close to the firing line as practicable and reinforce the latter

according to the principles explained in the attack. When natural

cover is not sufficient for the purpose, communicating and cover

trenches are constructed. If time does not permit their construction,

it is better to begin the action with a very dense firing line and no

immediate supports than to have supports greatly exposed in rear.

(498)

=513. Post of reserve.= The reserve should be posted so as to be

entirely free to act as a whole, according to the developments. The

distance from firing line to reserve is generally greater than in the

attack. By reason of such a location the reserve is best able to meet

a hostile enveloping attack; it has a better position from which to

make a counter attack; it is in a better position to cover a

withdrawal and permit an orderly retreat.

The distance from firing line to reserve increases with the size of

the reserve. (499)

=514. Post of reserve when situation is no longer in doubt.= When the

situation is no longer in doubt, the reserve should be held in rear of

the flank which is most in danger or offers the best opportunity for

counter attack. Usually the same flank best suits both purposes. (500)

=515. Detaching part of reserve to protect opposite flank.= In

exceptional cases, on broad fronts, it may be necessary to detach a

part of the reserve to protect the opposite flank. This detachment

should be the smallest consistent with its purely protective mission.

(501)

=516. Assignment of front to units.= The commander assigns to

subordinates the front to be occupied by them. These, in turn,

subdivide the front among their next lower units in the firing line.

(502)

=517. Division of extended position into sections.= An extended

position is so divided into sections that each has, if practicable, a

field of fire naturally made distinct by the terrain.

Unfavorable and unimportant ground will ordinarily cause gaps to exist

in the line. (503)

=518. Size of units occupying sections; battalions to be kept intact.=

The size of the unit occupying each section depends upon the latter's

natural strength, front, and importance. If practicable, battalions

should be kept intact and assigned as units to sections or parts of

sections. (504)

=519. Adjoining sections or machine guns to cover dead space.= Where

important dead space lies in front of one section, an adjoining

section should be instructed to cover it with fire when necessary, or

machine guns should be concealed for the like purpose. (505)

=520. Advanced posts and other dispersion to be avoided.= Advanced

posts, or any other form of unnecessary dispersion, should be avoided.

(506)

=521. Position itself not fully occupied until infantry attack

begins.= Unless the difficulty of moving the troops into the position

be great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in rear of it

until the infantry attack begins. The position itself is occupied by a

small garrison only, with the necessary outguards or patrols in front.

(507)

=522. Fire alone unable to stop attack.= Fire alone can not be

depended upon to stop the attack. The troops must be determined to

resort to the bayonet, if necessary. (508)

=523. Steps to be taken if night attack is expected.= If a night

attack or close approach by the enemy is expected, troops in a

prepared position should strengthen the outguards and firing line and

construct as numerous and effective obstacles as possible. Supports

and local reserves should move close to the firing line and should,

with the firing line, keep bayonets fixed. If practicable, the front

should be illuminated, preferably from the flanks of the section.

(509)

=524. Short range fire and bayonet in night attack.= Only short range

fire is of any value in resisting night attacks. The bayonet is the

chief reliance. (See Night Operations pars. 580-590.) (510)

COUNTER ATTACK

=525. Passive defense; only offensive wins.= The passive defense

should be assumed only when circumstances force it. Only the offensive

wins. (511)

=526. Active defense seeks favorable decision; counter attack

necessary.= An active defense seeks a favorable decision. A favorable

decision can not be expected without counter attack. (512)

=527. Protection of flanks by natural obstacles necessary in passive

defense position.= A passive defense in a position whose flanks are

not protected by natural obstacles is generally out of the question.

(513)

=528. Post of troops for counter attack.= Where the defense is assumed

with a view to making a counter attack, the troops for the counter

attack should be held in reserve until the time arrives for such

attack. The defensive line should be held by as few troops as possible

in order that the force for the offensive may be as large as possible.

The force for the counter attack should be held echeloned in rear of

the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the proposed

attack. (514)

=529. Manner of making counter attack.= The counter attack should be

made vigorously and at the proper time. It will usually be made:

By launching the reserve against the enemy's flank when his attack is

in full progress. This is the most effective form of counter attack.

Straight to the front by the firing line and supports after repulsing

the enemy's attack and demoralizing him with pursuing fire.

Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy has

reached the defensive position and is in disorder. (515)

=530. Minor counter attacks.= Minor counter attacks are sometimes

necessary in order to drive the enemy from important positions gained

by him. (516)

DELAYING ACTION

=531. The important considerations in a delaying action.= When a

position is taken merely to delay the enemy and to withdraw before

becoming closely engaged, the important considerations are:

The enemy should be forced to deploy early. The field of fire should

therefore be good at distances from 500 to 1,200 yards or more; a good

field of fire at close range is not necessary.

The ground in rear of the position should favor the withdrawal of the

firing line by screening the troops from the enemy's view and fire as

soon as the position is vacated. (517)

=532. Thin firing line answers purpose; purposes of supports and

reserve.= A thin firing line using much ammunition will generally

answer the purpose. Supports are needed chiefly to protect the flanks.

The reserve should be posted well in rear to assist in the withdrawal

of the firing line. (518)

=533. Value of artillery.= Artillery is especially valuable to a

delaying force. (519)

MEETING ENGAGEMENTS

=534. Characteristics of meeting engagements.= Meeting engagements are

characterized by the necessity for hasty reconnaissance, or the almost

total absence of reconnaissance; by the necessity for rapid

deployment, frequently under fire; and usually by the absence of

trenches or other artificial cover. These conditions give further

advantages to the offensive. (520)

=535. General action on meeting enemy.= The whole situation will

usually indicate beforehand the proper general action to be taken on

meeting the enemy. (521)

=536. Meagerness of information; qualities of commander to be relied

upon.= Little fresh information can be expected. The boldness,

initiative, and determination of the commander must be relied upon.

(522)

=537. Meeting engagement affords ideal opportunity to certain

commanders.= A meeting engagement affords an ideal opportunity to the

commander who has intuition and quick decision and who is willing to

take long chances. His opponent is likely to be overcautious. (523)

=538. The mission determines method of attack.= The amount of

information that the commander is warranted in awaiting before taking

final action depends entirely upon his mission. One situation may

demand a blind attack; another may demand rapid, partial deployment

for attack, but careful and time-consuming reconnaissance before the

attack is launched. (524)

=539. Advantage accrues to side deploying the faster.= A great

advantage accrues to the side which can deploy the faster. The

advantage of a close-order formation, favoring rapid deployment,

becomes more pronounced with the size of the force. (525)

=540. Advantages of first troops to deploy.= The first troops to

deploy will be able to attack with longer firing lines and weaker

supports than are required in the ordinary case. But if the enemy

succeeds in deploying a strong defensive line, the attack must be

strengthened accordingly before it is wasted. (526)

=541. Things to be done by the leading troops.= If the situation

warrants the advance, the leading troops seek to deploy faster than

the enemy, to reach his flanks, check his deployment, and get

information. In any event, they seek to cover the deployment of their

own troops in rear--especially the artillery--and to seize important

ground. (527)

=542. Post of commander of long column meeting enemy; function of

advance guard; action of column.= The commander of a long column which

meets the enemy should be with the advance guard to receive

information promptly and to reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the

advance guard must hold the enemy while the commander formulates a

plan of action, issues the necessary orders, and deploys the main

body. Meantime, the column should be closing up, either in mass or to

form line of columns, so that the deployment, when determined upon,

may be made more promptly. (528)

=543. Action of advance guard prior to receipt of orders.= The action

of the advance guard, prior to the receipt of orders, depends upon the

situation. Whether to attack determinedly or only as a feint, or to

assume the defensive, depends upon the strength of the advance guard,

the terrain, the character of the hostile force encountered, and the

mission and intentions of the commander of the whole. (529)

=544. Main body should be used as a whole and not put into action

piecemeal.= If the enemy is beforehand or more aggressive, or if the

advance guard is too weak, it may be necessary to put elements of the

main body into action as fast as they arrive, in order to check him.

This method should be avoided; it prevents the formation and execution

of a definite plan and compels piecemeal action. The best results are

obtained when the main body is used as a whole. (530)

WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION

=545. Withdrawal generally effected at heavy cost; rear guard and

distance to be placed between enemy and defeated troops.= The

withdrawal of a defeated force can generally be effected only at a

heavy cost. When it is no longer possible to give the action a

favorable turn and the necessity for withdrawal arises, every effort

must be made to place distance and a rear guard between the enemy and

the defeated troops. (531)

=546. Use of artillery, machine guns, and cavalry.= Artillery gives

especially valuable assistance in the withdrawal. The long-range fire

of machine guns should also be employed. Cavalry assists the

withdrawal by charging the pursuing troops or by taking flank

positions and using fire action. (532)

=547. Use of reserve to check the pursuit.= If an intact reserve

remains, it should be placed in a covering position, preferably on a

flank, to check the pursuit and thus enable the defeated troops to

withdraw beyond reach of hostile fire.

The covering position of the reserve should be at some distance from

the main action, but close enough to bring the withdrawing troops

quickly under the protection of its fire. It should have a good field

of fire at effective and long ranges and should facilitate its own

safe and timely withdrawal. (533)

=548. Part of line to be withdrawn first; retreating troops to be

gotten under control as soon as possible.= If the general line is

divided, by terrain or by organization, into two or more parts, the

firing line of the part in the least danger from pursuit should be

withdrawn first. A continuous firing line, whose parts are dependent

upon one another for fire support, should be withdrawn as a whole,

retiring by echelon at the beginning of the withdrawal. Every effort

must be made to restore the organizations, regain control, and form

column of march as soon as the troops are beyond the reach of hostile

fire.

As fast as possible without delaying the march, companies, and the

larger units should be reformed, so that the command will again be

well in hand. (534)

=549. Action taken by commander; selection of rendezvous point.= The

commander of the whole, having given orders for withdrawal, should go

to the rear, select a rendezvous point, and devote himself to the

reorganization of his command.

The rendezvous point is selected with regard to the natural channels

of movement approximately straight to the rear. It should be distant

from the battlefield and should facilitate the gathering and

protection of the command. (535)

SUMMARY

=550.= 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of victory or other

valuable results.

2. Make every effort for the success of the general plan and avoid

spectacular plays that have no bearing on the general result.

3. Have a definite plan and carry it out vigorously. Do not vacillate.

4. Do not attempt complicated maneuvers.

5. Keep the command in hand; avoid undue extension and dispersion.

6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a way as to take

advantage of all available cover and thereby diminish losses.

7. Never deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are known.

8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold out the rest

and avoid undue haste in committing them to the action.

9. Flanks must be protected either by reserves, fortifications, or the

terrain.

10. In a decisive action, gain and keep fire superiority.

11. Keep up reconnaissance.

12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very favorable

opportunity for its use presents itself. Keep some reserve as long as

practicable.

13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if the result is worth

the cost.

14. Spare the command all unnecessary hardship and exertion. (536)

MACHINE GUNS

=551. Machine guns are weapons of emergency.= Machine guns must be

considered as weapons of emergency. Their effectiveness combined with

their mobility renders them of great value at critical, though

infrequent, periods of an engagement. (537)

=552. Machine guns to be used for short periods, when opportunities

present themselves.= When operating against infantry only, they can be

used to a great extent throughout the combat as circumstances may

indicate, but they are quickly rendered powerless by efficient field

artillery and will promptly draw artillery fire whenever they open.

Hence their use in engagements between large commands must be for

short periods and at times when their great effectiveness will be most

valuable. (538)

=553. Machine guns attached to advance guard; use in meeting

engagements.= Machine guns should be attached to the advance guard. In

meeting engagements they will be of great value in assisting their own

advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy, and will have

considerable time to operate before hostile artillery fire can silence

them.

Care must be taken not to leave them too long in action. (539)

=554. Use of machine guns with rear guard.= They are valuable to a

rear guard which seeks to check a vigorous pursuit or to gain time.

(540)

=555. Machine guns in attack; fire of position.= In attack, if fire of

position is practicable, they are of great value. In this case fire

should not be opened by the machine guns until the attack is well

advanced. At a critical period in the attack, such fire, if suddenly

and unexpectedly opened, will greatly assist the advancing line. The

fire must be as heavy as possible and must be continued until masked

by friendly troops or until the hostile artillery finds the machine

guns. (541)

=556. Machine guns in defense.= In the defense, machine guns should be

used in the same general manner as described above for the attack.

Concealment and patient waiting for critical moments and exceptional

opportunities are the special characteristics of the machine-gun

service in decisive actions. (542)

=557. Machine guns as part of reserve; use in covering withdrawal.= As

part of the reserve, machine guns have special importance. If they are

with the troops told off to protect the flanks, and if they are well

placed, they will often produce decisive results against a hostile

turning movement. They are especially qualified to cover a withdrawal

or make a captured position secure. (543)

=558. Machine guns not to form part of firing line of attack.= Machine

guns should not be assigned to the firing line of an attack. They

should be so placed that fire directed upon them is not likely to fall

upon the firing line. (544)

=559. Effectiveness of machine guns against skirmish line, except when

lying down or crawling.= A skirmish line can not advance by walking or

running when hostile machine guns have the correct range and are ready

to fire. Machine-gun fire is not specially effective against troops

lying on the ground or crawling. (545)

=560. Silencing of machine guns by infantry.= When opposed by machine

guns without artillery to destroy them, infantry itself must silence

them before it can advance.

An infantry command that must depend upon itself for protection

against machine guns should concentrate a large number of rifles on

each gun in turn and until it has silenced it. (546)

_In addition to the above, which the Infantry Drill Regulations gives

on the subject of machine guns, the following, based on the use of

machine guns in the European War, is given:_

=561. Machine guns essentially automatic rifles.= They are essentially

automatic rifles, designed to fire the ordinary rifle cartridge and

capable of delivering a stream of small bullets at a rate of as high

as 600 per minute. Experience in the European war has determined that

the rate of 400 shots per minute is the desirable maximum. Their

ranges are the same as for the rifle. The fire of a machine gun has

been estimated as equal to that of 30 men.

=562. Mounts.= Machine guns are usually mounted on tripods or wheels.

The weight of certain types is such that they can readily be carried

by the soldier from one point to another.

=563. Methods of transportation.= While machine guns are usually

designed to be carried or packed, they are easily adapted to various

methods of transportation. In the European war we find them mounted on

sleds during the winter campaign; on specially designed motor cycles

with side cars and accompanied by other motor cycles carrying

ammunition; on wheels; on wagons; on armored automobiles; aeroplanes;

and finally in the powerful "tanks" of the English.

=564. Concealment.= Machine guns while usually considered as _weapons

of emergency_ have been used in attack and defense in the European war

in all stages. Their mobility and deadly effect have made them of

great value. Once their position is discovered they are quickly put

out of action by artillery. Owing to this fact the armies in Europe

have used alternative positions and have used every means to conceal

the guns. Hedges, walls, and pits are used and every effort is used to

conceal the flame of discharge. This is usually accomplished by

keeping the muzzle well in rear of its cover or loop hole. Machine

guns almost invariably betray their positions as soon as they enter

into action. The present tendency seems to be to hold them concealed

and place them into position in the trenches or emplacements at the

moment of combat.

Extraordinary means have been resorted to in hiding the guns until

they are needed. In the German line, dugouts underground were

constructed to conceal the machine guns and crews. Often they

permitted the first line of the attack to pass over them and then

appeared in rear and opened a deadly fire on the backs of the troops.

=565. Use in villages.= In villages, machine guns were used with

terrible effect, firing from cellars or windows. The only successful

method of destroying them was with hand grenades and even this was

costly.

=566. Location on the defense.= On the _defense_ machine guns should

be mounted in salients and at points where cross fire can be obtained.

This makes it more difficult for the enemy to locate the guns. Frontal

fire is not so often successful.

=567. Location in attack.= In the _attack_ it is accepted that machine

guns must cover the Infantry at short and long ranges while other

machine guns must accompany the attacking troops to hold the positions

or trenches gained.

The second or third line would seem to be the best position for

machine guns when accompanying troops.

[Illustration: Machine Gun Emplacement: Section aa]

[Illustration: Machine Gun Emplacement: Plan with Cover Removed]

=568. Economy of men.= Owing to its rapid and effective fire, and the

comparative ease with which it can be concealed, the machine gun

permits a great economy of men on a front and the concentrating of the

forces thus freed for use in other parts of the field. This was done

on a large scale on the Russian front by the Germans in 1915. They

constructed miles of wire entanglements in front of positions occupied

with an enormous number of machine guns and comparatively few men. The

main forces were thus free to be transported wherever danger

threatened. In this manner the Germans replaced men by machine guns

and wire and were able to cope successfully with the immense Russian

Armies. The above plate shows a typical machine gun emplacement,

constructed in the field. Many elaborate emplacements have been

constructed in the European war, using steel and concrete, but for a

hasty cover in the field the simple emplacement shown in the figure is

recommended.

(NOTE.--For a more detailed study of machine guns, see Subject XI,

Machine Guns in Action, School of Musketry, Fort Sill, Oklahoma,

and Combined Cavalry and Infantry Drill Regulations for Automatic

Machine Rifle, cal. 30, 1909, War Department, 1915.)

AMMUNITION SUPPLY

=569. Method of supplying ammunition to combat train.= The method of

supply of ammunition to the combat trains is explained in Field

Service Regulations. (547)

=570. Combat train and the major's responsibility for its proper use;

a rendezvous for each brigade.= The combat train is the immediate

reserve supply of the battalion, and the major is responsible for its

proper use. He will take measures to insure the maintenance of the

prescribed allowance at all times.

In the absence of instructions, he will cause the train to march

immediately in rear of his battalion, and, upon separating from it to

enter an engagement, will cause the ammunition therein to be issued.

When emptied, he will direct that the wagons proceed to the proper

rendezvous to be refilled. Ordinarily a rendezvous is appointed for

each brigade and the necessary number of wagons sent forward to it

from the ammunition column. (548)

=571. Destination of combat wagons when refilled.= When refilled, the

combat wagons will rejoin their battalions, or, if the latter be

engaged, will join or establish communication with the regimental

reserve. (549)

=572. Company commanders' responsibility for ammunition in belts;

ammunition of dead and wounded.= Company commanders are responsible

that the belts of the men in their companies are kept filled at all

times, except when the ammunition is being expended in action. In the

firing line the ammunition of the dead and wounded should be secured

whenever practicable. (550)

=573. Ammunition in bandoleers and 30 rounds in right pocket section.=

Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. Thirty

rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a

reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. (551)

=574. Ammunition sent forward with reenforcements; men not to be sent

back from firing line for ammunition.= When necessary to resupply the

firing line, ammunition will be sent forward with reenforcements,

generally from the regimental reserve. (552)

Men will never be sent back from the firing line for ammunition. Men

sent forward with ammunition remain with the firing line.

=575. Replenishment of ammunition after engagement.= As soon as

possible after an engagement the belts of the men and the combat

wagons are resupplied to their normal capacities. Ammunition which can

not be reloaded on combat wagons will be piled up in a convenient

place and left under guard. (553)

MOUNTED SCOUTS

=576. Scouts to be trained in patrolling and reconnaissance; their

use.= The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trained in patrolling

and reconnaissance. They are used for communication with neighboring

troops, for patrolling off the route of march, for march outposts,

outpost patrols, combat patrols, reconnaissance ahead of columns, etc.

Their further use is, in general, confined to escort and messenger

duty. They should be freely used for all these purposes, but for these

purposes only. (554)

=577. Use of mounted scouts for reconnoitering.= When infantry is

acting alone, or when the cavalry of a mixed command has been sent to

a distance, the mounted scouts are of special importance to covering

detachments and should be used to make the reconnaissance which would

otherwise fall to cavalry. (555)

=578. Scouts to be used in reconnaissance in preference to other

troops; use for dismounted patrolling.= In reconnaissance, scouts

should be used in preference to other troops as much as possible. When

not needed for mounted duty, they should be employed for necessary

dismounted patrolling. (556)

=579. Training of battalion staff officers in patrolling.= Battalion

staff officers should be specially trained in patrolling and

reconnaissance work in order that they may be available when a mounted

officer's patrol is required. (557)

NIGHT OPERATIONS

=580. Purposes of night operations.= By employing night operations

troops make use of the cover of darkness to minimize losses from

hostile fire or to escape observation. Night operations may also be

necessary for the purpose of gaining time. Control is difficult and

confusion is frequently unavoidable.

It may be necessary to take advantage of darkness in order to assault

from a point gained during the day, or to approach a point from which

a daylight assault is to be made, or to effect both the approach and

the assault. (558)

=581. Practice in offensive and defensive operations; simple

formations.= Offensive and defensive night operations should be

practiced frequently in order that troops may learn to cover ground in

the dark and arrive at a destination quietly and in good order, and

in order to train officers in the necessary preparation and

reconnaissance.

Only simple and well-appointed formations should be employed.

Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details--e. g.,

night patrolling, night marching, and communication at night. (559)

=582. Ground to be studied by day and night, cleared of hostile

detachments, etc.; preparation of orders; distinctive badges.= The

ground to be traversed should be studied by daylight and, if

practicable, at night. It should be cleared of hostile detachments

before dark, and, if practicable, should be occupied by covering

troops.

Orders must be formulated with great care and clearness. Each unit

must be given a definite objective and direction, and care must be

exercised to avoid collision between units.

Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, a distinctive badge

should be worn by all. (560)

=583. Secrecy of preparations; unfriendly guides; fire action to be

avoided, relying upon bayonet.= Preparations must be made with

secrecy. When the movement is started, and not until then, the

officers and men should be acquainted with the general design, the

composition of the whole force, and should be given such additional

information as will insure cooeperation and eliminate mistakes.

During the movement every precaution must be taken to keep secret the

fact that troops are abroad.

Unfriendly guides must frequently be impressed. These should be

secured against escape, outcry, or deception.

Fire action should be avoided in offensive operations. In general,

pieces should not be loaded. Men must be trained to rely upon the

bayonet and to use it aggressively. (561)

=584. Night marches; advance and rear guards.= Long night marches

should be made only over well-defined routes. March discipline must be

rigidly enforced. The troops should be marched in as compact a

formation as practicable, with the usual covering detachments. Advance

and rear guard distances should be greatly reduced. They are shortest

when the mission is an offensive one. The connecting files are

numerous. (562)

=585. Night advance followed by attack by day.= A night advance made

with a view to making an attack by day usually terminates with the

hasty construction of intrenchments in the dark. Such an advance

should be timed so as to allow an hour or more of darkness for

intrenching.

An advance that is to terminate in an assault at the break of day

should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long before the

assault is to be made; otherwise, the advantage of partial surprise

will be lost, and the enemy will be allowed to reenforce the

threatened point. (563)

=586. Night attacks, when employed; they require trained troops;

compact formations; value of bayonet.= The night attack is ordinarily

confined to small forces, or to minor engagements in a general battle,

or to seizure of positions occupied by covering or advanced

detachments. Decisive results are not often obtained.

Poorly disciplined and untrained troops are unfit for night attacks or

for night operations demanding the exercise of skill and care.

Troops attacking at night can advance close to the enemy in compact

formations and without suffering loss from hostile artillery or

infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength or direction

of the attack.

A force which makes a vigorous bayonet charge in the dark will often

throw a much larger force into disorder. (564)

=587. Reconnaissance; attack to be a surprise.= Reconnaissance should

be made to ascertain the position and strength of the enemy and to

study the terrain to be traversed. Officers who are to participate in

the attack should conduct this reconnaissance. Reconnaissance at night

is especially valuable. Features that are distinguishable at night

should be carefully noted, and their distances from the enemy, from

the starting point of the troops, and from other important points

should be made known.

Preparations should have in view as complete a surprise as possible.

An attack once begun must be carried to its conclusion, even if the

surprise is not as complete as was planned or anticipated. (565)

=588. Time of making attack depends upon object sought.= The time of

night at which the attack should be made depends upon the object

sought. If a decisive attack is intended, it will generally yield the

best results if made just before daylight. If the object is merely to

gain an intrenched position for further operations, an earlier hour is

necessary in order that the position gained may be intrenched under

cover of darkness. (566)

=589. Formation; use of bayonet; preparations to repel counter

attack.= The formation for attack must be simple. It should be

carefully effected and the troops verified at a safe distance from the

enemy. The attacking troops should be formed in compact lines and with

strong supports at short distances. The reserve should be far enough

in rear to avoid being drawn into the action until the commander so

desires. Bayonets are fixed, pieces are not loaded.

Darkness causes fire to be wild and ineffective. The attacking troops

should march steadily on the enemy without firing, but should be

prepared and determined to fight vigorously with the bayonet.

In advancing to the attack the aim should be to get as close as

possible to the enemy before being discovered, then trust to the

bayonet.

If the assault is successful, preparations must be made at once to

repel a counter attack. (567)

=590. Measures taken by defense to resist night attacks.= On the

defense, preparations to resist night attacks should be made by

daylight whenever such attacks are to be feared.

Obstacles placed in front of a defensive position are especially

valuable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles which would

give an attacker little concern in the daytime become serious

hindrances at night.

After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever practicable

and strong patrols should be pushed to the front.

When it is learned that the enemy is approaching, the trenches are

filled and the supports moved close to the firing line.

Supports fix bayonets, but do not load. Whenever practicable and

necessary, they should be used for counter attacks, preferably against

a hostile flank.

The defender should open fire as soon as results may be expected. This

fire may avert or postpone the bayonet combat, and it warns all

supporting troops. It is not likely that fire alone can stop the

attack. The defender must be resolved to fight with the bayonet.

Ordinarily fire will not be effective at ranges exceeding 50 yards.

A white rag around the muzzle of the rifle will assist in sighting the

piece when the front sight is not visible.

See pars. 464, 496, 497, 523, 524. (568)

INFANTRY AGAINST CAVALRY

=591. Cavalry charge against infantry usually futile.= A cavalry

charge can accomplish little against infantry, even in inferior

numbers, unless the latter are surprised, become panic-stricken, run

away, or can not use their rifles. (569)

=592. Measures to check charges from front and flank.= A charge from

the front is easily checked by a well directed and sustained fire.

If the charge is directed against the flank of the firing line, the

supports, reserves, or machine guns should stop it. If this

disposition is impracticable, part of the line must meet the charge by

a timely change of front. If the flank company, or companies, in the

firing line execute =platoons right=, the successive firing lines can

ordinarily break a charge against the flank. If the cavalry line

passes through the firing line, the latter will be little damaged if

the men retain their presence of mind. They should be on the watch for

succeeding cavalry lines and leave those that have passed through to

friendly troops in rear. (570)

=593. Standing position best to meet charge.= Men standing are in the

best position to meet a charge, but other considerations may compel

them to meet it lying prone. (571)

=594. Rifle fire main dependence of infantry.= In a melee, the

infantryman with his bayonet has at least an even chance with the

cavalryman, but the main dependence of infantry is rifle fire. Any

formation is suitable that permits the free use of the necessary

number of rifles.

Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set sights. Fire at will

at battle sight should be used, whatever the range may be. It will

usually be unwise to open fire at long ranges. (572)

=595. Meeting of cavalry charge by infantry in column.= An infantry

column that encounters cavalry should deploy at once. If attacked from

the head or rear of the column, and if time is pressing, it may form a

succession of skirmish lines. Infantry, by deploying 50 or 100 yards

in rear of an obstacle, may check cavalry and hold it under fire

beyond effective pistol range.

In any situation, to try to escape the issue by running is the worst

and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt. (573)

=596. Infantry attacking dismounted cavalry.= In attacking dismounted

cavalry, infantry should close rapidly and endeavor to prevent

remounting. Infantry which adopts this course will not be seriously

checked by delaying cavalry.

Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the led horses.

(574)

INFANTRY AGAINST ARTILLERY

=597. Frontal attack against artillery usually futile; use of machine

guns.= A frontal attack against artillery has little chance of

succeeding unless it can be started from cover at comparatively short

range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry has little

effect against the artillery personnel because of their protective

shields.

Machine guns, because their cone of fire is more compact, will have

greater effect, but on the other hand they will have fewer

opportunities, and they are limited to fire attack only.

As a rule, one's own artillery is the best weapon against hostile

artillery. (575)

=598. Flank attack against artillery effective.= Artillery attacked in

flank by infantry can be severely damaged. Oblique or flank fire will

begin to have decisive effect when delivered at effective range from a

point to one side of the artillery's line of fire and distant from it

by about half the range. Artillery is better protected on the side of

the caisson. (576)

=599. Action against guns out of ammunition.= Guns out of ammunition,

but otherwise secure against infantry attack, may be immobilized by

fire which will prevent their withdrawal, or by locating and driving

off their limbers. Or they may be kept out of action by fire which

will prevent the receipt of ammunition. (577)

=600. Action against artillery limbering or coming into action; wheel

horses best targets.= Artillery when limbered is helpless against

infantry fire. If caught at effective range while coming into action

or while limbering, artillery can be severely punished by infantry

fire.

In attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the wheel horses are

the best targets. (578)

ARTILLERY SUPPORTS

=601. Purpose of artillery support, usually consisting of infantry.=

The purpose of the artillery support is to guard the artillery against

surprise or attack.

Artillery on the march or in action is ordinarily so placed as to be

amply protected by the infantry. Infantry always protects artillery in

its neighborhood. (579)

=602. Detailing of supports.= The detail of a support is not necessary

except when the artillery is separated from the main body or occupies

a position in which its flanks are not protected.

The detail of a special support will be avoided whenever possible.

(580.)

=603. Formation of support on march.= The formation of an artillery

support depends upon circumstances. On the march it may often be

necessary to provide advance, flank, and rear protection. The country

must be thoroughly reconnoitered by patrols within long rifle range.

(581)

=604. Formation and location of support in action.= In action, the

formation and location of the support must be such as to gain and give

timely information of the enemy's approach and to offer actual

resistance to the enemy beyond effective rifle range of the

artillery's flanks. It should not be close enough to the artillery to

suffer from fire directed at the artillery. In most cases a position

somewhat to the flank and rear best fulfills these conditions. (582)

=605. Support charged only with protection of artillery.= The support

commander is charged only with the protection of the artillery. The

tactical employment of each arm rests with its commander. The two

should cooeperate. (583)

MINOR WARFARE

=606. What minor warfare embraces; regular operations.= Minor warfare

embraces both regular and irregular operations.

Regular operations consist of minor actions involving small bodies of

trained and organized troops on both sides.

The tactics employed are in general those prescribed for the smaller

units. (596)

=607. Irregular operations.= Irregular operations consist of actions

against unorganized or partially organized forces, acting independent

or semi independent bodies. Such bodies have little or only crude

training and are under nominal and loose leadership and control. They

assemble, roam about, and disperse at will. They endeavor to win by

stealth or by force of superior numbers, employing ambuscades, sudden

dashes or rushes, and hand-to-hand fighting. (597)

Troops operating against such an enemy usually do so in small units,

such as platoons, detachments, or companies, and the tactics employed

must be adapted to meet the requirements of the situation. Frequently

the enemy's own methods may be employed to advantage.

In general, such operations should not be undertaken hastily; every

preparation should be made to strike suddenly and to inflict the

maximum punishment.

=608. March and bivouac formations to admit of rapid action in any

direction.= In general, the service of information will be

insufficient; adequate reconnaissance will rarely be practicable.

March and bivouac formations must be such as to admit of rapid

deployment and fire action in any direction. (598)

=609. Formation in open country.= In the open country, where surprise

is not probable, troops may be marched in column of squads preceded,

within sight, by a squad as an advance party. (599)

=610. Formation in close country.= In close country, where surprise is

possible, the troops must be held in a close formation. The use of

flank patrols becomes difficult. Occasionally, an advance party--never

less than a squad--may be sent out. In general, however, such a party

accomplishes little, since an enemy intent on surprise will permit it

to pass unmolested and will fall upon the main body.

Under such conditions, especially when the road or trail is narrow,

the column of twos or files is a convenient formation, the officers

placing themselves in the column so as to divide it into nearly equal

parts. If rushed from a flank, such a column will be in readiness to

face and fire toward either or both flanks, the ranks being back to

back; if rushed from the front, the head of the column may be

deployed, the rest of the column closing up to support it and to

protect its flanks and rear. In any event, the men should be taught to

take some form of a closed back to back formation. (600)

=611. Dividing column on march into two or more separate detachments.=

The column may often be broken into two or more approximately equal

detachments separated on the march by distances of 50 to 100 yards. As

a rule the detachments should not consist of less than 25 men each.

With this arrangement of the column, it will rarely be possible for an

enemy to close simultaneously with all of the detachments, one or more

being left unengaged and under control to support those engaged or to

inflict severe punishment upon the enemy when he is repulsed. (601)

=612. Selection of site for camp or bivouac; protection.= The site for

camp or bivouac should be selected with special reference to

economical and effective protection against surprise. Double sentinels

are posted on the avenues of approach, and the troops sleep in

readiness for instant action. When practicable, troops should be

instructed in advance as to what they are to do in case of attack at

night. (602)

=613. Night operations frequently advisable.= Night operations are

frequently advisable. With the small forces employed, control is not

difficult. Irregular troops rarely provide proper camp protection, and

they may frequently be surprised and severely punished by a properly

conducted night march and attack. (603)

CEREMONIES

General Rules for Ceremonies

=614. Order in which troops are arranged for ceremonies; commander

faces command; subordinates face to front.= The order in which the

troops of the various arms are arranged for ceremonies is prescribed

by Army Regulations.

When forming for ceremonies the companies of the battalion and the

battalions of the regiment are posted from right to left in line and

from head to rear in column, in the order of rank of their respective

commanders present in the formation, the senior on the right or at the

head.

The commander faces the command; subordinate commanders face to the

front. (708)

=615. Saluting by lieutenant colonel and staffs.= At the command

present arms, given by the colonel, the lieutenant colonel, and the

colonel's staff salute; the major's staff salute at the major's

command. Each staff returns to the carry or order when the command

=order arms= is given by its chief. (709)

=616. Formation of companies, battalion and regiment.= At the

=assembly= for a ceremony companies are formed on their own parades

and informally inspected, as prescribed in par. 646.

At =adjutant's call=, except for ceremonies involving a single

battalion, each battalion is formed on its own parade, reports are

received, and the battalion presented to the major, as laid down in

par. 308. At the second sounding of adjutant's call the regiment is

formed. (710)

REVIEWS

General Rules

=617. Indication of points where column changes direction; flank to

pass 12 paces from reviewing officer; post of reviewing officer and

others.= The adjutant posts men or otherwise marks the points where

the column changes direction in such manner that its flank in passing

will be about 12 paces from the reviewing officer.

The post of the reviewing officer, usually opposite the center of the

line, is indicated by a marker.

Officers of the same or higher grade, and distinguished personages

invited to accompany the reviewing officer, place themselves on his

left; their staffs and orderlies place themselves respectively on the

left of the staff and orderlies of the reviewing officer; all others

who accompany the reviewing officer place themselves on the left of

his staff, their orderlies in rear. A staff officer is designated to

escort distinguished personages and to indicate to them their proper

positions, as prescribed in par. 73. (711)

=618. Riding around the troops; saluting the color; reviewing officer

returns only salute of commanding officer of troops.= While riding

around the troops, the reviewing officer may direct his staff, flag

and orderlies to remain at the post of the reviewing officer, or that

only his personal staff and flag shall accompany him; in either case

the commanding officer alone accompanies the reviewing officer. If the

reviewing officer is accompanied by his entire staff, the staff

officers of the commander place themselves on the right of the staff

of the reviewing officer.

The reviewing officer and others at the reviewing stand salute the

color as it passes; when passing around the troops, the reviewing

officer and those accompanying him salute the color when passing in

front of it.

The reviewing officer returns the salute of the commanding officer of

the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing officer do not

salute. (712)

=619. Saluting by staffs.= In passing in review, each staff salutes

with its commander. (713)

=620. Turning out of column by commanding officer of troops and

staff.= After saluting the reviewing officer, the commanding officer

of the troops turns out of the column, takes post on the right of the

reviewing officer, and returns saber; the members of his staff

accompanying him take post on the right of the reviewing officer's

staff and return saber. When the rear element of his command has

passed, without changing his position, the commanding officer of the

troops salutes the reviewing officer; he and the members of his staff

accompanying him then draw saber and rejoin his command. The

commanding officer of the troops and the members of his staff are the

only ones who turn out of the column. (714)

=621. Turning out of column by commanding officer of troops and

staff.= If the person reviewing the command is not mounted, the

commanding officer and his staff on turning out of the column after

passing the reviewing officer dismount preparatory to taking post. In

such case, the salute of the commanding officer, prior to rejoining

his command, is made with the hand before remounting. (715)

=622. Salute by regimental color.= When the rank of the reviewing

officer entitles him to the honor, each regimental color salutes at

the command =present arms=, given or repeated by the major of the

battalion with which it is posted; and again in passing in review.

(716)

=623. The band.= The band of an organization plays while the reviewing

officer is passing in front of and in rear of the organization.

Each band, immediately after passing the reviewing officer, turns out

of the column, takes post in front of and facing him, continues to

play until its regiment has passed, then ceases playing and follows in

rear of its regiment; the band of the following regiment commences to

play as soon as the preceding band has ceased.

While marching in review but one band in each brigade plays at a time,

and but one band at a time when within 100 paces of the reviewing

officer. (717)

=624. The national air, to the color, march, flourishes or

ruffles,--when played.= If the rank of the reviewing officer entitles

him to the honor, the band plays the prescribed =national air=, or the

field music sounds =to the color=, =march=, =flourishes= or =ruffles=

when arms are presented. When passing in review at the moment the

regimental color salutes, the musicians halted in front of the

reviewing officer, sound =to the color=, =march=, =flourishes= or

=ruffles=. (718)

=625. Modifications of the review.= The formation for review may be

modified to suit the ground, and the =present arms= and the ride

around the line by the reviewing officer may be dispensed with. (719)

=626. When post of reviewing officer is on left of column.= If the

post of the reviewing officer is on the left of the column, the troops

march in review with the guide left; the commanding officer and his

staff turn out of the column to the left, taking post as prescribed

above, but to the left of the reviewing officer; in saluting, the

captains give the command: =1. Eyes, 2. LEFT.= (720)

=627. Cadence at which troops pass in review.= Except in the review of

a single battalion, the troops pass in review in quick time only.

(721)

=628. Reviews of brigades or larger commands; action of battalions

after passing reviewing officer.= In reviews of brigades or larger

commands, each battalion, after the rear has passed the reviewing

officer 50 paces, takes the double time for 100 yards in order not to

interfere with the march of the column in rear; if necessary, it then

turns out of the column and returns to camp by the most practicable

route; the leading battalion of each regiment is followed by the other

units of the regiment. (722)

=629. Standing "at ease," "rest," etc., in review of brigade or larger

command.= In a brigade or larger review a regimental commander may

cause his regiment to stand =at ease=, =rest=, or =stack arms= and

=fall out= and =resume attention=, so as not to interfere with the

ceremony. (723)

=630. Review by inspector junior to commanding officer.= When an

organization is to be reviewed before an inspector junior in rank to

the commanding officer, the commanding officer receives the review

and is accompanied by the inspector, who takes post on his left. (724)

Battalion Review

=631. Presenting battalion to reviewing officer; passing around

battalion; battalion passing in review at quick time.= The battalion

having been formed in line, the major faces to the front; the

reviewing officer moves a few paces toward the major and halts; the

major turns about and commands: =1. Present, 2. ARMS=, and again turns

about and salutes.

The reviewing officer returns the salute; the major turns about,

brings the battalion to order arms, and again turns to the front.

The reviewing officer approaches to about 6 paces from the major, the

latter salutes, takes post on his right, and accompanies him around,

the battalion. The band plays. The reviewing officer proceeds to the

right of the band, passes in front of the captain to the left of the

line and returns to the right, passing in rear of the file closers and

the band. (See par. 625.)

On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes, halts,

and when the reviewing officer and staff have passed, moves directly

to his post in front of the battalion, faces it, and commands: =1.

Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 3. MARCH.=

At the first command the band changes direction if necessary, and

halts.

At the third command, given when the band has changed direction, the

battalion moves off, the band playing; without command from the major

the column changes direction at the points indicated, and column of

companies at full distance is formed successively to the left at the

second change of direction; the major takes his post 20 paces in front

of the band immediately after the second change; the band having

passed the reviewing officer, turns to the left of the column, takes

post in front of and facing the reviewing officer, and remains there

until the review terminates.

The major and staff salute, turn the head as in =eyes right=, and look

toward the reviewing officer when the major is 6 paces from him; they

return to the carry and turn the head and eyes to the front when the

major has passed 6 paces beyond him.

Without facing about, each captain or special unit commander, except

the drum major, commands: =1. Eyes=, in time to add, =2. RIGHT=, when

at 6 paces from the reviewing officer, and commands =front= when at 6

paces beyond him. At the command =eyes= the company officers armed

with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the

command =right= all turn head and eyes to the right, the company

officers complete =present saber=, and the noncommissioned officers

armed with the saber execute the first motion of present saber; at the

command =front= all turn head and eyes to the front, and officers and

noncommissioned officers armed with the saber resume the carry saber;

without arms in hand, the first motion of the hand salute is made at

the command =right=, and the second motion not made until the command

=front=.

Noncommissioned staff officers, noncommissioned officers in command of

subdivisions, and the drum major salute, turn the head and eyes,

return to the front, resume the carry or drop the hand, at the points

prescribed for the major. Officers and dismounted noncommissioned

officers in command of subdivisions, with arms in hand, render the

rifle or saber salute. Guides charged with the step, trace, and

direction do not execute =eyes right=.

If the reviewing officer is entitled to a salute from the color the

regimental color salutes when at 6 paces from him, and is raised when

at 6 paces beyond him.

The major, having saluted, takes post on the right of the reviewing

officer, returns saber and remains there until the rear of the

battalion has passed, then salutes and rejoins his battalion. The band

ceases to play when the column has completed its second change of

direction after passing the reviewing officer. (725)

=632. Passing in review at double time.= When the battalion arrives at

its original position in column, the major commands: =1. Double time,

2. MARCH.=

The band plays in double time.

The battalion passes in review as before, except that in double time

the command =eyes right= is omitted and there is no saluting except by

the major when he leaves the reviewing officer.

The review terminates when the rear company has passed the reviewing

officer: the band then ceases to play, and, unless otherwise directed

by the major, returns to the position it occupied before marching in

review, or is dismissed; the major rejoins the battalion and brings it

to =quick time=. The battalion then executes such movements as the

reviewing officer may have directed, or is marched to its parade

ground and dismissed.

Marching past in double time may, in the discretion of the reviewing

officer, be omitted; the review terminates when the major rejoins his

battalion. (726)

=633. Major and staff may be dismounted.= At battalion review the

major and his staff may be dismounted in the discretion of the

commanding officer. (727)

PARADES

General Rules

=634. Position assumed by reviewing officer and staff while band is

sounding off.= If dismounted, the officer reviewing the parade, and

his staff, stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band is

sounding off; they resume attention with the adjutant. If mounted,

they remain at attention. (732)

=635. Reports by captains and majors.= At the command =report=, given

by a battalion adjutant, the captains in succession from the right

salute and report: =A= (or =other=) =company=, =present= or =accounted

for=; or =A= (or =other=) =company, (so many) officers= or =enlisted

men absent=, and resume the order saber; at the same command given by

the regimental adjutant, the majors similarly =report= their

battalions. (733)

Battalion Parade

=636. At adjutant's call= the battalion is formed in line, as

explained in par. 308, but not presented. Lieutenants take their posts

in front of the center of their respective platoons at the captain's

command for dressing his company on the line, as explained in par.

302. The major takes post at a convenient distance in front of the

center and facing the battalion.

The adjutant from his post in front of the center of the battalion,

after commanding: =1. Guides, 2. POSTS=, adds: =1. Parade, 2. REST=;

the battalion executes parade rest. The adjutant directs the band:

=SOUND OFF.=

The band, playing in quick time, passes in front of the line of

officers to the left of the line and back to its post on the right,

when it ceases playing. At evening parade, when the band ceases

playing, =retreat= is sounded by the field music and, following the

last note and while the flag is being lowered, the band plays the

=Star Spangled Banner=.

Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to attention

and, as the last note ends commands: =1. Battalion, 2. Attention, 3.

Present, 4. Arms=, and salutes retaining that position until the last

note of the National Anthem. He then turns about and reports: =Sir,

the parade is formed.= The major directs the adjutant: =Take your

post, Sir.= The adjutant moves at a trot (if dismounted, in quick

time), passes by the major's right, and takes his post.

The major draws saber and commands: =1. Order, 2. ARMS=, and adds such

exercises in the manual of arms as he may desire. Officers,

noncommissioned officers commanding companies or armed with the saber,

and the color guard, having once executed order arms, remain in that

position during the exercises in the manual.

The major then directs the adjutant: =Receive the reports, Sir.= The

adjutant, passing by the major's right, advances at a trot (if

dismounted, in quick time) toward the center of the line, halts midway

between it and the major, and commands: =REPORT.= (See par. 635.)

The reports received, the adjutant turns about, and reports: =Sir, all

are present or accounted for=; or =Sir, (so many) officers or enlisted

men are absent=, including in the list of absentees those from the

band and field music reported to him by the drum major prior to the

parade.

The major directs: =Publish the orders, Sir.=

The adjutant turns about and commands: =Attention to orders=; he then

reads the orders, and commands: =1. Officers, 2. CENTER, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =center=, the company officers carry saber and face to

the center. At the command =march=, they close to the center and face

to the front; the adjutant turns about and takes his post.

The officers having closed and faced to the front, the senior

commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH.= The officers advance, the band

playing; the left officer of the center or right center company is the

guide, and marches on the major; the officers are halted at 6 paces

from the major by the senior, who commands: =1. Officers, 2. HALT.=

They halt and salute, returning to the carry saber with the major. The

major then gives such instructions as he deems necessary, and

commands: =1. Officers, 2. POSTS, 3. MARCH.=

At the command =posts=, company officers face about.

At the command =march=, they step off with guide as before, and the

senior commands: =1. Officers, 2. HALT=, so as to halt 3 paces from

the line; he then adds: =1. POSTS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =posts=, officers face outward and, at the command

=march=, step off in succession at 4 paces distance, resume their

posts and order saber; the lieutenants march directly to their posts

in rear of their companies.

The music ceases when all officers have resumed their posts.

The major then commands: =1. Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 3.

MARCH=, and returns saber.

The battalion marches according to the principles of review; when the

last company has passed, the ceremony is concluded, as explained in

pars. 617; 631.

The band continues to play while the companies are in march upon the

parade ground. Companies are formed in column of squads, without

halting, and are marched to their respective parades by their

captains.

When the company officers have saluted the major, he may direct them

to form line with the staff, in which case they individually move to

the front, passing to the right and left of the major and staff, halt

on the line established by the staff, face about, and stand at

attention. The music ceases when the officers join the staff. The

major causes the companies to pass in review under the command of

their first sergeants by the same commands as before. The company

officers return saber with the major and remain at attention. (734)

ESCORTS

Escort of the Color

=637. By a company.= The regiment being in line or line of masses, the

colonel details a company, other than the color company, to receive

and escort the national color to its place. During the ceremony the

regimental color remains with the color guard at its post with the

regiment.

The band moves straight to its front until clear of the line of field

officers, changes direction to the right, and is halted; the

designated company forms column of platoons in rear of the band, the

color bearer or bearers between the platoons.

The escort then marches without music to the colonel's office or

quarters and is formed in line facing the entrance, the band on the

right, the color bearer in the line of file closers.

The color bearer, preceded by the first lieutenant and followed by a

sergeant of the escort, then goes to obtain the color.

When the color bearer comes out, followed by the lieutenant and

sergeant, he halts before the entrance, facing the escort; the

lieutenant places himself on the right, the sergeant on the left of

the color bearer; the escort presents arms, and the field music sounds

=to the color=; the first lieutenant and sergeant salute.

Arms are brought to the order; the lieutenant and sergeant return to

their posts; the company is formed in column of platoons, the band

taking post in front of the column; the color bearer places himself

between the platoons; the escort marches in quick time, with guide

left, back to the regiment, the band playing; the march is so

conducted that when the escort arrives at 50 paces in front of the

right of the regiment, the direction of the march shall be parallel to

its front; when the color arrives opposite its place in line, the

escort is formed in line to the left; the color bearer, passing

between the platoons, advances and halts 12 paces in front of the

colonel.

The color bearer having halted, the colonel, who has taken post 30

paces in front of the center of the regiment, faces about, commands:

=1. Present, 2. ARMS=, resumes his front, and salutes; the field music

sounds to the color; and the regimental color bearer executes the

color salute at the command =present arms=.

The colonel then faces about, brings the regiment to the order, at

which the color bearer resumes the carry and takes his post with the

color company.

The escort presents arms and comes to the order with the regiment, at

the command of the colonel, after which the captain forms it again in

column of platoons, and, preceded by the band, marches it to its

place, passing around the left flank of the regiment.

The band plays until the escort passes the left of the line, when it

ceases playing and returns to its post on the right, passing in rear

of the regiment.

The regiment may be brought to a rest when the escort passes the left

of the line. (736)

=638. By a battalion.= Escort of the color is executed by a battalion

according to the same principles. (737)

Escorts of Honor

=639.= Escorts of honor are detailed for the purpose of receiving and

escorting personages of high rank, civil or military. The troops for

this purpose are selected for their soldierly appearance and superior

discipline.

The escort forms in line, opposite the place where the personage

presents himself, the band on the flank of the escort toward which it

will march. On the appearance of the personage, he is received with

the honors due to his rank. The escort is formed into column of

companies, platoons or squads, and takes up the march, the personage

and his staff or retinue taking positions in rear of the column; when

he leaves the escort, line is formed and the same honors are paid as

before.

When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from the

point where the personage is to be received, as for instance, where a

courtyard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels is posted

from that point to the escort, facing inward; the sentinels

successively salute as he passes and are then relieved and join the

escort.

An officer is appointed to attend him and bear such communication as

he may have to make to the commander of the escort. (738)

Funeral Escort

=640. Composition and strength, formation, presenting arms, marching,

etc.= The composition and strength of the escort are prescribed in

Army Regulations.

The escort is formed opposite the quarters of the deceased; the band

on that flank of the escort toward which it is to march.

Upon the appearance of the coffin, the commander commands: =1.

Present, 2. ARMS=, and the band plays an appropriate air; arms are

then brought to the order.

The escort is next formed into column of companies, platoons, or

squads. If the escort be small, it may be marched in line. The

procession is formed in the following order: =1. Music, 2. Escort, 3.

Clergy, 4. Coffin and pallbearers, 5. Mourners, 6. Members of the

former command of the deceased, 7. Other officers and enlisted men, 8.

Distinguished persons, 9. Delegations, 10. Societies, 11. Civilians.=

Officers and enlisted men (Nos. 6 and 7), with side arms, are in the

order of rank, seniors in front.

The procession being formed, the commander of the escort puts it in

march.

The escort marches slowly to solemn music; the column having arrived

opposite the grave, line is formed facing it.

The coffin is then carried along the front of the escort to the grave;

arms are presented, the music plays an appropriate air; the coffin

having been placed over the grave, the music ceases and arms are

brought to the order.

The commander next commands: =1. Parade, 2. REST.= The escort executes

=parade rest=, officers and men inclining the head.

When the funeral services are completed and the coffin lowered into

the grave, the commander causes the escort to resume attention and

fire three rounds of blank cartridges, the muzzles of the pieces being

elevated. When the escort is greater than a battalion, one battalion

is designated to fire the volley.

A musician then sounds =taps=.

The escort is then formed into column, marched in quick time to the

point where it was assembled, and dismissed.

The band does not play until it has left the inclosure.

When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the

escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may march =at ease= in

quick time until it approaches the burial ground, when it is brought

to attention. The music does not play while marching =at ease=.

In marching at attention, the field music may alternate with the band

in playing. (739)

=641. Funeral of general officer; playing national air, sounding

ruffles, etc., as honor.= When arms are presented at the funeral of a

person entitled to any of the following honors, the band plays the

prescribed =national air=, or the field music sounds to the =color=,

=march=, =flourishes=, or =ruffles=, according to the rank of the

deceased, after which the band plays an appropriate air. The commander

of the escort, in forming column, gives the appropriate commands for

the different arms. (740)

=642. Funeral of mounted officer or soldier.= At the funeral of a

mounted officer or enlisted man, his horse, in mourning caparison,

follows the hearse. (741)

=643. When hearse, cavalry, and artillery are unable to enter

cemetery.= Should the entrance of the cemetery prevent the hearse

accompanying the escort till the latter halts at the grave, the column

is halted at the entrance long enough to take the coffin from the

hearse, when the column is again put in march. The Cavalry and

Artillery, when unable to enter the inclosure, turn out of the column,

face the column, and salute the remains as they pass. (742)

=644. Escorting remains from quarters to church before funeral

services.= When necessary to escort the remains from the quarters of

the deceased to the church before the funeral service, arms are

presented upon receiving the remains at the quarters and also as they

are borne into the church. (743)

=645. Instructions to clergyman and pallbearers.= The commander of the

escort, previous to the funeral, gives the clergyman and pallbearers

all needful directions. (744)

Company Inspection

=646.= Being in line at a halt: =1. Open ranks, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the front rank executes =right dress=; the rear

rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute

right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and

take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of

their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear

rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right

guide, facing to the left, and commands: =1. FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR

INSPECTION.=

At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns

saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and

stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,

face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to

accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the

close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,

draw and carry saber.

Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of

the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him, executes

=inspection arms=.

The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just

above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The captain inspects

the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in

receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left

hand at the balance and executes =order arms=.

As the captain returns the piece, the next man executes =inspection

arms=, and so on through the company.

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes

=order arms= as soon as the captain passes to the next man.

[Illustration: Plate VI]

The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right

in the rear, of each rank and of the line of file closers.

When approached by the captain, the first sergeant executes

=inspection saber=. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute

=inspection pistol= by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding

it diagonally across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the

neck, muzzle pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to

the holster as soon as the captain passes.

Upon completion of the inspection, the captain takes post facing to

the left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants

and commands: =1. Close ranks, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the

rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the

file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank. (745)

=647. Inspection of quarters or camp.= If the company is dismissed,

rifles are put away. In quarters, headdress and accouterments are

removed, and the men stand near their respective bunks; in camp, they

stand covered, but without accouterments, in front of their tents.

If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks and

its inspection in quarters or camp is ordered, each man will arrange

the prescribed articles on his bunk, if in quarters or permanent camp,

or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter tent camp, in the

same relative order as directed in paragraph 648.

The captain, accompanied by the lieutenants, then inspects the

quarters or camp. The first sergeant precedes the captain and calls

the men to attention on entering each squad room or on approaching the

tents; the men stand at attention, but do not salute. (746)

=648. When inspection includes examination of equipment.= If the

inspection is to include an examination of the equipment while in

ranks, the captain, after closing ranks, causes the company to stack

arms, to march backward until 4 paces in rear of the stacks and to

take intervals. He then commands:

=1. UNSLING EQUIPMENT, 2. OPEN PACKS.=

At the first command each man unslings his equipment and places it on

the ground at his feet, haversack to the front, end of the pack 1 foot

in front of toes.

At the second command, pack carriers are unstrapped, packs removed and

unrolled, the longer edge of the pack along the lower edge of the

cartridge belt. Each man exposes shelter-tent pins; removes meat can,

knife, fork, and spoon from the meat-can pouch, and places them on the

right of the haversack, knife, fork, and spoon in the open meat can;

removes the canteen and cup from the cover and places them on the left

side of the haversack; unstraps and spreads out haversack so as to

expose its contents; folds up the carrier to uncover the cartridge

pockets; opens same; unrolls toilet articles and places them on the

outer flap of the haversack; places underwear carried in pack on the

left half of the open pack, with round fold parallel with front edge

of pack; opens first-aid pouch and exposes contents to view. Special

articles carried by individual men, such as flag kit, field glasses,

compass, steel tape, notebook, etc., will be arranged on the right

half of the open pack. Each man then resumes the attention. Plate VI

(Page 151) shows the relative position of all articles except

underwear and special articles.

The captain then passes along the ranks and file closers, as before,

inspects the equipment, returns to the right, and commands: =CLOSE

PACKS.=

Each man rolls up his toilet articles and underwear, straps up his

haversack and its contents, replaces the meat can, knife, fork, and

spoon, and the canteen and cup; closes cartridge pockets and first-aid

pouch; restores special articles to their proper receptacles; rolls up

and replaces pack in carrier, and, leaving the equipment in its

position on the ground, resumes the attention.

All equipments being packed, the captain commands: =SLING EQUIPMENT.=

The equipments are slung and belts fastened.

The captain then causes the company to assemble and take arms. The

inspection is completed as already explained. (747)

=649. When the inspector is other than the captain.= Should the

inspector be other than the captain, the latter, after commanding

=front=, adds =REST=, and faces to the front. When the inspector

approaches, the captain faces to the left, brings the company to

attention, faces to the front, and salutes. The salute acknowledged,

the captain carries saber, faces to the left, commands: =PREPARE FOR

INSPECTION=, and again faces to the front.

The inspection proceeds as before; the captain returns saber and

accompanies the inspector as soon as the latter passes him. (748)

Battalion Inspection

=650. Inspection may precede or follow review; the inspection up to

time the companies are inspected.= If there be both inspection and

review, the inspection may either precede or follow the review.

The battalion being in column of companies at full distance, all

officers dismounted, the major commands: =1. Prepare for inspection,

2. MARCH.=

At the first command each captain commands: =Open ranks.=

At the command =march= the ranks are opened in each company, as in the

inspection of the company, as prescribed in par. 646.

The field musicians join their companies.

The drum major conducts the band to a position 30 paces in rear of the

column, if not already there, and opens ranks.

The major takes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front of the

center of the leading company. The staff takes post as if mounted. The

color takes post 5 paces in rear of the staff.

Field and staff officers senior in rank to the inspector do not take

post in front of the column, but accompany him.

The inspector inspects the major, and, accompanied by the latter,

inspects the staff officers.

The major then commands: =REST=, returns saber, and, with his staff,

accompanies the inspector.

If the major is the inspector he commands: =REST=, returns saber, and

inspects his staff, which then accompanies him.

The inspector, commencing at the head of the column, then makes a

minute inspection of the color guard, the noncommissioned staff, and

the arms, accouterments, dress and ammunition of each soldier of the

several companies in succession, and inspects the band.

The adjutant gives the necessary commands for the inspection of the

color guard, noncommissioned staff, and band.

The color guard and noncommissioned staff may be dismissed as soon as

inspected. (749)

=651. Inspection of the companies.= As the inspector approaches each

company, its captain commands: =1. Company, 2. ATTENTION, 3. PREPARE

FOR INSPECTION=, and faces to the front; as soon as inspected he

returns saber and accompanies the inspector. The inspection proceeds

as in company inspection, as explained in pars. 646-649. At its

completion the captain closes ranks and commands: =REST.= Unless

otherwise directed by the inspector, the major directs that the

company be marched to its parade and dismissed. (750)

=652. When inspection lasts long time.= If the inspection will

probably last a long time the rear companies may be permitted to stack

arms and fall out; before the inspector approaches, they fall in and

take arms. (751)

=653. The band.= The band plays during the inspection of the

companies.

When the inspector approaches the band the adjutant commands: =PREPARE

FOR INSPECTION.=

As the inspector approaches him each man raises his instrument in

front of the body, reverses it so as to show both sides, and then

returns it.

Company musicians execute inspection similarly. (752)

=654. Inspection of quarters or camp.= At the inspection of quarters

or camp the inspector is accompanied by the captain, followed by the

other officers or by such of them as he may designate. The inspection

is conducted as described in the company inspection, as laid down in

pars. 646-649.

MUSTER

Regimental, Battalion, or Company Muster

=655. Inspection and review; muster rolls; lists of absentees.= Muster

is preceded by an inspection, and, when practicable, by a review.

The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field, staff, and

band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each captain with the roll

of his company. A list of absentees, alphabetically arranged, showing

cause and place of absence, accompanies each roll. (755)

=656. Calling the names; verifying presence of absentees.= Being in

column of companies at open ranks, each captain, as the mustering

officer approaches, brings his company to right shoulder arms, and

commands: =ATTENTION TO MUSTER.=

The mustering officer or captain then calls the names on the roll;

each man, as his name is called, answers =Here= and brings his piece

to order arms.

After muster, the mustering officer, accompanied by the company

commanders and such other officers as he may designate, verifies the

presence of the men reported in hospital, on guard, etc. (756)

=657. Muster of company on company parade.= A company may be mustered

in the same manner on its own parade ground, the muster to follow the

company inspection. (757)

THE COLOR

=658. Meaning of "Color;" Army Regulations.= The word "color" implies

the national color; it includes the regimental color when both are

present.

The rules prescribing the colors to be carried by regiments and

battalions on all occasions are contained in Army Regulations. (766)

=659. Where the colors are kept; "cased" defined.= In garrison the

colors, when not in use, are kept in the office or quarters of the

colonel, and are escorted thereto and therefrom by the color guard. In

camp the colors, when not in use, are in front of the colonel's tent.

From reveille to retreat, when the weather permits, they are displayed

uncased; from retreat to reveille and during inclement weather they

are cased.

Colors are said to be cased when furled and protected by the oil cloth

covering. (767)

=660. Regimental and national colors--salutes by.= The regimental

color salutes in the ceremony of escort of the color, and when

saluting an officer entitled to the honor, but in no other case.

If marching, the salute is executed when at 6 paces from the officer

entitled to the salute; the carry is resumed when 6 paces beyond him.

The national color renders no salute. (768)

The Color Guard

=661. Composition of color guard; carrying of regimental and national

colors.= The color guard consists of two color sergeants, who are the

color bearers, and two experienced privates selected by the colonel.

The senior color sergeant carries the national color; the junior color

sergeant carries the regimental color. The regimental color, when

carried, is always on the left of the national color, in whatever

direction they may face. (769)

=662. Formation and marching of color guard.= The color guard is

formed and marched in one rank, the color bearers in the center. It is

marched in the same manner and by the same commands as a squad,

substituting, when necessary, guard for squad. (770)

=663. Color company defined; color guard remains with it.= The color

company is the center or right center company of the center or right

center battalion. The color guard remains with that company unless

otherwise directed. (771)

=664. Post of color guard in various formations.= In line, the color

guard is in the interval between the inner guides of the right and

left center companies.

In line of columns or in close line, the color guard is midway between

the right and left center companies and on line with the captains.

In column of companies or platoons, the color guard is midway between

the color company and the company in rear of the color company and

equidistant from the flanks of the column.

In close column, the color guard is on the flank of the color company.

In column of squads, the color guard is in the column between the

color company and the company originally on its left.

When the regiment is formed in line of masses for ceremonies, the

color guard forms on the left of the leading company of the center

(right center) battalion. It rejoins the color company when the

regiment changes from line of masses. (772)

=665. In battle color guard joins reserve.= The color guard, when with

a battalion that takes the battle formation, joins the regimental

reserve, whose commander directs the color guard to join a certain

company of the reserve. (773)

=666. Loadings, firings, manual of arms, and movements by color

guard.= The color guard executes neither loadings nor firings; in

rendering honors, it executes all movements in the manual; in drill,

all movements unless specially excused. (774)

To Receive the Color

=667. Receiving the color by color guard.= The color guard, by command

of the senior color sergeant, presents arms on receiving and parting

with the color. After parting with the color, the color guard is

brought to order arms by command of the senior member, who is placed

as the right man of the guard. (775)

=668. Receiving the color by color company.= At drills and ceremonies,

excepting escort of the color, the color, if present, is received by

the color company after its formation.

The formation of the color company completed, the captain faces to the

front; the color guard, conducted by the senior sergeant, approaches

from the front and halts at a distance of 10 paces from the captain,

who then faces about, brings the company to the =present=, faces to

the front, salutes, again faces about and brings the company to the

=order=. The color guard comes to the =present= and =order= at the

command of the captain, and is then marched by the color sergeant

directly to its post on the left of the color company. (776)

=669. Escorting color to office or quarters of colonel.= When the

battalion is dismissed the color guard escorts the color to the office

or quarters of the colonel. (777)

Manual of the Color

=670.= At the =carry=, the heel of the pike rests in the socket of the

sling; the right hand grasps the pike at the height of the shoulder.

At the =order=, the heel of the pike rests on the ground near the

right toe, the right hand holding the pike in a vertical position.

At =parade rest=, the heel of the pike is on the ground, as at the

=order=; the pike is held with both hands in front of the center of

the body, left hand uppermost.

The =order= is resumed at the command =attention=.

The left hand assists the right when necessary.

The =carry= is the habitual position when the troops are at a

shoulder, port, or trail.

The =order= and =parade rest= are executed with the troops.

=The color salute:= Being at a carry, slip the right hand up the pike

to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by straightening the arm

to the front. (778)

Manual of the Saber

=671. Drawing saber; position of carry saber dismounted; unhooking

scabbard before mounting; on foot carrying scabbard hooked up.=

=1. Draw, 2. SABER.=

At the command =draw=, unhook the saber with the thumb and first two

fingers of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook, fingers

lifting the upper ring; grasp the scabbard with the left hand at the

upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize the grip with the

right hand, and draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing

the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand.

At the command =saber=, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to its

full extent, to the right front, at an angle of about 45 deg. with the

horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a straight line with the arm;

make a slight pause and bring the back of the blade against the

shoulder, edge to the front, arm nearly extended, hand by the side,

elbow back, third and fourth fingers back of the grip; at the same

time hook up the scabbard with the thumb and first two fingers of the

left hand, thumb through the upper ring, fingers supporting it; drop

the left hand by the side.

=This is the position of carry saber dismounted.=

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber unhook the

scabbard before mounting; when mounted, in the first motion of =draw

saber= they reach with the right hand over the bridle hand and without

the aid of the bridle hand draw the saber as before; the right hand at

the carry rests on the right thigh.

On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up. (782)

=672. Holding of saber in publishing orders, etc.; use of saber knot.=

When publishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber is held

suspended from the right wrist by the saber knot; when the saber knot

is used it is placed on the wrist before drawing saber and taken off

after returning saber. (783)

=673. Presenting saber from carry or order; execution of the salute in

rendering honors.=

Being at the order or carry: =1. Present, 2. SABER= (or =ARMS=).

At the command =present=, raise and carry the saber to the front, base

of the hilt as high as the chin and 6 inches in front of the neck,

edge to the left, point 6 inches farther to the front than the hilt,

thumb extended on the left of the grip, all fingers grasping the grip.

At the command =saber=, or =arms=, lower the saber, point in

prolongation of the right foot and near the ground, edge to the left,

hand by the side, thumb on left of grip, arm extended. If mounted, the

hand is held behind the thigh, point a little to the right and front

of the stirrup.

In rendering honors with troops, officers execute the first motion of

the salute at the command =present=, the second motion at the command

=arms=; enlisted men with the saber execute the first motion at the

command arms and omit the second motion. (784)

=674. Coming to order from carry; executing order or carry from

present, depending upon command; coming to order saber when arms are

brought to order.=

Being at a carry: =1. Order, 2. SABER= (or =ARMS=).

Drop the point of the saber directly to the front, point on or near

the ground, edge down, thumb on back of grip.

Being at the =present saber=, should the next command be =order arms=,

officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber =order

saber=; if the command be other than =order arms=, they execute =carry

saber=.

When arms are brought to the order, the officers or enlisted men with

saber drawn =order saber=. (785)

=675. Position of saber in giving commands, etc.; bringing saber to

carry from order.= The saber is held at the carry while giving

commands, marching at attention, or changing position in quick time.

When at the order, sabers are brought to the carry when arms are

brought to any position except the =present= or =parade rest=. (786)

=676. Parade rest from order.= Being at the order: =1. Parade, 2.

REST.=

Take the position of parade rest except that the left hand is

uppermost and rests on the right hand, point of saber on or near the

ground in front of the center of the body, edge to the right.

At the command =attention=, resume the order saber and the position of

the soldier. (787)

=677. Position of saber at double time.= In marching in double time

the saber is carried diagonally across the breast, edge to the front;

the left hand steadies the scabbard. (788)

=678. On duty under arms sabers to be drawn and returned without

command; commands given with saber drawn.= Officers and

noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, on all duties under

arms draw and return saber without waiting for command. All commands

to soldiers under arms are given with the saber drawn. (789)

=679. Returning saber from carry.= Being at a carry: =1. Return, 2.

SABER.=

At the command =return=, carry the right hand opposite to and 6 inches

from the left shoulder, saber vertical, edge to the left; at the same

time unhook and lower the scabbard with the left hand and grasp it at

the upper band.

At the command =saber= drop the point to the rear and pass the blade

across and along the left arm; turn the head slightly to the left,

fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard, raise the right hand,

insert and return the blade; free the wrist from the saber knot (if

inserted in it), turn the head to the front, drop the right hand by

the side; hook up the scabbard with the left hand, drop the left hand

by the side.

Officers and noncommissioned officers armed with the saber, when

mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the scabbard is

hooked up on dismounting. (790)

=680. Enlisted men with saber drawn at inspection.= At inspection

enlisted men with the saber drawn execute the first motion of =present

saber= and turn the wrist to show both sides of the blade, resuming

the carry when the inspector has passed. (791)

[Illustration]

Shelter Tents

=681.= Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:

=FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.=

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a

file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first

sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the

company; blank files are filled by the file closers, or by men taken

from the front rank; the remaining guide, or guides, and file closers

form on a convenient flank.

Before forming column or platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the

company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the

size of each. (792)

=682.= The captain then causes the company to take intervals as

described in the School of the Squad (See par. 156.), and commands:

=PITCH TENTS.=

At the command =pitch tents=, each man steps off obliquely to the

right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt

of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,

barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man

then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of

the right heel.

Equipments are unslung, packs opened, shelter half and pins removed;

each man then spreads his shelter half, small triangle to the rear,

flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy, the rear-rank man's half

on the right. The halves are then buttoned together; the guy loops at

both ends of the lower half are passed through the buttonholes

provided in the lower and upper halves; the whipped end of the guy

rope is then passed through both guy loops and secured, this at both

ends of the tent. Each front-rank man inserts the muzzle of his rifle

under the front end of the ridge and holds the rifle upright, sling to

the front, heel of butt on the ground, beside the bayonet. His

rear-rank man pins down the front corners of the tent on the line of

bayonets, stretching the tent taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye

of the front guy rope and drives the pin at such a distance in front

of the rifle as to held the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the

tent, each pins down a corner, stretching the sides and rear of the

tent before securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an intrenching

tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end of the ridge

inside the tent, the front-rank man pegging down the end of the rear

guy ropes; the rest of the pins are then driven by both men, the

rear-rank man working on the right.

The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown back on

the tent.

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equipment and the

contents of his pack in the tent and stands at attention in front of

his own half on line with the front guy-rope pin.

To have a uniform slope when the tents are pitched, the guy ropes

should all be of the same length.

In shelter-tent camps, in localities where suitable material is

procurable, tent poles may be improvised and used in lieu of the rifle

and bayonet or intrenching tool as supports for the shelter tent.

(793)

=683.= When the pack is not carried, the company is formed for shelter

tents, as prescribed in par. 681, intervals are taken, arms are laid

aside or on the ground, the men are dismissed and proceed to the

wagon, secure their packs, return to their places, and pitch tents as

heretofore described, in par. 682. (794)

=684.= Double shelter tents may be pitched by first pitching one tent

as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent against the

opening of the first, using one rifle to support both tents, and

passing the front guy ropes over and down the sides of the opposite

tents. The front corner of one tent is not pegged down, but is thrown

back to permit an opening into the tent. (795)

Single Sleeping Bag

=685.= Spread the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,

buttoned side to the left; fold the blanket once across its short

dimension and lay it on the poncho, folded side along the right side

of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left side by means

of the tapes provided; fold the left half of the poncho over the

blanket and button it together along the side and bottom. (For the

position, number, and length of tapes with which blankets should be

provided, see Par. II, G. O. 11; W. D. '12--Author.) (796)

Double Sleeping Bag

=686.= Spread one poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the feet,

buttoned side to the left; spread the blankets on top of the poncho;

tie the edges of the blankets together with the tapes provided; spread

a second poncho on top of the blankets, buttoned end at the feet,

buttoned side to the right; button the two ponchos together along both

sides and across the end. (797)

To Strike Shelter Tents

=687.= The men standing in front of their tents: =STRIKE TENTS.=

Equipments and rifles are removed from the tent; the tents are

lowered, packs made up, and equipments slung, and the men stand at

attention in the places originally occupied after taking intervals.

(798)

To Pitch All Types of Tents, Except Shelter and Conical Wall

=688.= To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical

wall tents: Mark line of tents by driving a wall pin on the spot to be

occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal

tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,

which will give a passage of two feet between tents. Spread tripod on

the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.

Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and

place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or

doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the

bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left

(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the

pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already

driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the

rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to

complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.

Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front

corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small

amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.

According to the size of the tent one or two men, crawling under the

tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or

ridge pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes

are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the

tent to adjust it. The tent steadied by the remaining men, one at each

corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or storage

type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The four

corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the large

pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as to

hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth when the guy

ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each remaining

wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven in line with the

corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the tent are placed

over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly are placed over

the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace ropes when used, are

then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed. (709)

Conical Wall Tent

=689.= Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using

the hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two concentric

circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer

circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3

feet drive the other guy pins.

In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case

of pyramidal tents, as explained in par. 688. (801)

To Strike Common, Wall, Pyramidal, and Conical Wall Tents

=690. STRIKE TENTS.=

The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy

ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall

tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.

One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is

lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole

fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. (802)

To Fold Tents

=691. For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents:= Spread

the tent flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of

side walls are even, ends of tents forming triangles to the right and

left; fold the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle,

making it rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold

the tent in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold

again in two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except

the second from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about

two-thirds of the second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the

turned-in edge of the right end, then fold the right end over the top,

completing the bundle; tie with two exposed guys.

=For folding pyramidal tents:= The tent is thrown toward the rear and

the back wall and roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most

easily accomplished by leaving the rear corner wall pins in the ground

with the wall loops attached, one man at each rear-corner guy, and one

holding the square iron in a perpendicular position and pulling the

canvas to its limit away from the former front of the tent. This

leaves the three remaining sides of the tent on top of the rear side,

with the door side in the middle.

Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear

corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and

pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to

the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side

of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the

front side of the tent.

Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described

above; this, when completed, will leave the front and rear sides of

the tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward,

each on itself.

Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward

toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold around the square iron

as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth, and parallel with

the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the canvas

kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of the

canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the two on

the center-width, which should be pulled out and away from bottom edge

to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one end, fold

toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first and second

widths) and fold again toward the center so that the already folded

canvas will come to within about three inches of the middle width.

Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. Then

begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, then

making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that

already folded, turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take

the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle

over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle drawing tight. Turn

bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.

When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by

23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.

Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle

width of canvas in the back wall. (803)

Warning Calls

=692. First call, guard mounting, full dress, overcoats, drill,

stable, water,= and =boots and saddles= precede the =assembly= by such

interval as may be prescribed by the commanding officer.

=Mess, church, and fatigue=, classed as service calls, may also be

used as warning calls.

=First call= is the first signal for formation for roll call and for

all ceremonies except guard mounting.

=Guard mounting= is the first signal for guard mounting.

The field music assembles at =first call= and =guard mounting=.

In a mixed command, =boots and saddles= is the signal to mounted

troops that their formation is to be mounted; for mounted guard

mounting or mounted drill, it immediately follows the signal =guard

mounting= or drill.

When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the =full dress= or

=overcoat= call immediately follows =first call=, =guard mounting=, or

=boots and saddles=. (804)

Formation Calls

=693. Assembly:= The signal for companies or details to fall in.

=Adjutant's call:= The signal for companies to form battalion; also

for the guard details to form for guard mounting on the camp or

garrison parade ground; it follows the =assembly= at such interval as

may be prescribed by the commanding officer.

It is also used as a signal for the battalions to form regiment,

following the first =adjutant's call= at such interval as the

commanding officer may prescribe.

=To the color:= Is sounded when the color salutes. (805)

Alarm Calls

=694. Fire call:= The signal for the men to fall in, without arms, to

extinguish fire.

=To arms:= The signal for the men to fall in, under arms, on their

company's parade grounds as quickly as possible.

=To horse:= The signal for mounted men to proceed under arms to their

horses, saddle, mount and assemble at a designated place as quickly as

possible. In extended order this signal is used to remount troops.

(806)

Service Calls

=695. Tattoo, taps, mess, sick, church, recall, issue, officers',

captains', first sergeants', fatigue, school=, and =the general=.

=The general= is the signal for striking tents and loading wagons

preparatory to marching.

=Reveille= precedes the =assembly= for roll call; =retreat= follows

the =assembly=, the interval between being only that required for

formation and roll call, except when there is parade.

=Taps= is the signal for extinguishing lights; it is usually preceded

by =call to quarters= by such interval as prescribed by Army

Regulations.

=Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the color, the

flourishes, ruffles=, and the =marches= are sounded by all the field

music united; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by the musician

of the guard or orderly musician; he may also sound the =assembly=

when the musicians are not united.

The morning gun is fired at the first note of =reveille=, or, if

marches be played before =reveille=, it is fired at the commencement

of the first march.

The evening gun is fired at the last note of =retreat=. (807)

APPENDIX A

War Department,

Office of the Chief of Staff,

Washington, December 2, 1911.

The Infantry Drill Regulations, 1911, have been prepared for the use

of troops armed with the United States magazine rifle, model 1903. For

the guidance of organizations armed with the United States magazine

rifle, model 1898, the following alternative paragraphs are published

and will be considered as substitute paragraphs for the corresponding

paragraphs in the text: 75 (in part), 96, 98, 99, 134, 139, 141, 142,

148 and 150.

By order of the Secretary of War:

LEONARD WOOD,

Major General, Chief of Staff.

=Note.= The paragraph numbers 75, 96, 98, etc., given above, follow

the paragraphs below.

=696.= * * * Third.

The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using the magazine. (75)

* * * * *

=697.= Being at order arms: =1. Unfix, BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the position of

parade rest, grasp the handle on the bayonet firmly with the right

hand, press the spring with the forefinger of the left hand, raise the

bayonet until the handle is about 6 inches above the muzzle of the

piece, drop the point to the left, back of hand toward the body, and

glancing at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing

between the left arm and body; regrasp the piece with the right hand

and resume the order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet

from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the

most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the

most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the

original position.

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but

not in cadence. (96)

=698.= Being at order arms: =1. Inspection, 2. ARMS.=

At the second command, take the position of port arms. (=TWO.=) With

the right hand open the magazine gate, turn the bolt handle up, draw

the bolt back and glance at the magazine and chamber. Having found

them empty, or having emptied them, raise the head and eyes to the

front. (98)

=699.= Being at inspection arms: =1. Order (Right shoulder, port), 2.

ARMS.=

At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle

down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigger, and resume port arms.

At the command =arms=, complete the movement ordered. (99)

=700.= Pieces being loaded and in the position of load, to execute

other movements with the pieces loaded: =1. Lock, 2. PIECES.=

At the command =pieces= turn the safety lock fully to the right.

The safety lock is said to be at the "ready" when turned to the left,

and at the "safe" when turned to the right.

The cut-off is said to be "on" when turned up and "off" when turned

down. (134)

=701.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: =1. With dummy (blank

or ball) cartridges, 2. LOAD.=

At the command =load= each front-rank man or skirmisher faces half

right and carries the right foot to the right, about one foot, to such

position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the

body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at

the balance, left thumb extended along the stock, muzzle at the height

of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt back,

takes a cartridge between the thumb and first two fingers and places

it in the receiver; places palm of the hand against the back of the

bolt handle; thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down

the handle, and carries the hand to the small of the stock. Each

rear-rank man moves to the right front, takes a similar position

opposite the interval to the right of his front-rank man, muzzle of

the piece extending beyond the front rank, and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly

as practicable in the position of load.

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if

kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the

elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand

steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt

resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)

are designated as that of =load=. (139)

=702. FILL MAGAZINE.=

Take the position of load, if not already there, open the gate of the

magazine with the right thumb, take five cartridges from the box or

belt, and place them, with the bullets to the front, in the magazine,

turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate the insertion of

the cartridges; close the gate and carry the right hand to the small

of the stock.

To load from the magazine the command =from magazine= will be given

preceding that of =load=; the =cut-off= will be turned up on coming to

the position of =load=.

To resume loading from the belt the command from belt will be given

preceding the command =load=; the =cut-off= will be turned down on

coming to the position of =load=.

The commands =from magazine= and =from belt=, indicating the change in

the manner of loading, will not be repeated in subsequent commands.

The words =from belt= apply to cartridge box as well as belt.

In loading from the magazine care should be taken to push the bolt

fully forward and turn the handle down before drawing the bolt back,

as otherwise the extractor will not catch the cartridge in the

chamber, and jamming will occur with the cartridge following.

To fire from the magazine, the command =magazine fire= may be given at

any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased rate of fire is

executed. After the magazine is exhausted the cut-off is turned down

and the firing continued, loading from the belt.

=Magazine fire= is employed only when, in the opinion of the platoon

leader or company commander, the maximum rate of fire becomes

necessary. (141)

=703. UNLOAD.=

All take the position of load, turn the =cut-off= up, if not already

there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately open and

close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After the last

cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trigger pulled. The

cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the box or

belt, and the piece brought to the order. (142)

=704. CLIP FIRE.=

Turn the cut-off up; =fire at will= (reloading from the magazine)

until the cartridges in the piece are exhausted; turn the cut-off

down; fill magazine; reload and take the position of =suspend firing=.

(148)

=705. CEASE FIRING.=

Firing stops; pieces not already there are brought to the position of

load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge

is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights

are laid down, and the piece is brought to the order.

=Cease firing= is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of

position or to steady the men. (150)

APPENDIX B

War Department,

Office of the Chief of Staff,

Washington, December 2, 1911.

Paragraphs 747, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 797, and 798, Infantry Drill

Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops equipped with the Infantry

Equipment, model 1910. For troops equipped under General Orders, No.

23, War Department, 1906, and orders amendatory thereof, the

alternative paragraphs published herewith will govern.

By order of the Secretary of War:

LEONARD WOOD,

Major General, Chief of Staff.

Note. The paragraph numbers 747, 792, etc., given above, follow the

paragraphs below.

=706.= If the inspection is to include an examination of the blanket

rolls, the captain, before dismissing the company and after

inspecting the file closers, directs the lieutenants to remain in

place, closes ranks, stacks arms, dresses the company back to four

paces from the stacks, takes intervals, and commands: =1. Unsling, 2.

PACKS, 3. Open, 4. PACKS.=

At the second command, each man unslings his roll and places it on the

ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square end of shelter

half to the right.

At the fourth command, the rolls are untied, laid perpendicular to the

front with the triangular end of the shelter half to the front,

opened, and unrolled to the left; each man prepares the contents of

his roll for inspection and resumes the attention.

The captain then returns saber, passes along the ranks and file

closers as before, inspects the rolls, returns to the right, draws

saber and commands: =1. Close, 2. PACKS.=

At the second command each man, with his shelter half smoothly spread

on the ground with buttons up and triangular end to the front, folds

his blanket once across its length and places it upon the shelter

half, fold toward the bottom edge one-half inch from the square end,

the same amount of canvas uncovered at the top and bottom. He then

places the parts of the pole on the side of the blanket next the

square end of shelter half, near and parallel to the fold, end of pole

about 6 inches from the edge of the blanket; nests the pins similarly

near the opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other

articles carried in the roll; folds the triangular end and then the

exposed portion of the bottom of the shelter half over the blanket.

The two men in each file roll and fasten first the roll of the front

and then of the rear rank man. The file closers work similarly two and

two, or with the front rank man of a blank file. Each pair stands on

the folded side, rolls the blanket roll closely and buckles the

straps, passing the end of the strap through both keeper and buckle,

back over the buckle and under the keeper. With the roll so lying on

the ground that the edge of the shelter half can just be seen when

looking vertically downward, one end is bent upward and over to meet

the other, a clove hitch is taken with the guy rope first around the

end to which it is attached and then around the other end, adjusting

the length of rope between hitches to suit the wearer.

As soon as a file completes its two rolls each man places his roll in

the position it was in after being unslung and stands at attention.

All the rolls being completed, the captain commands: =1. Sling, 2.

PACKS.=

At the second command the rolls are slung, the end containing the pole

to the rear.

The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain completes the

inspection as before. (747)

=707.= Being in line or in column of platoons, the captain commands:

=FORM FOR SHELTER TENTS.=

The officers, first sergeant, and guides fall out; the cooks form a

file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first

sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of the

company; blank files are filled by the file closers or by men taken

from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides, and file closers

form on a convenient flank.

Before forming column of platoons, preparatory to pitching tents, the

company may be redivided into two or more platoons, regardless of the

size of each. (792)

=708.= The captain then causes the company to take intervals as

described in the School of the Squad, and commands: =PITCH TENTS.=

At the command =pitch tents=, each man steps off obliquely to the

right with the right foot and lays his rifle on the ground, the butt

of the rifle near the toe of the right foot, muzzle to the front,

barrel to the left, and steps back into his place; each front-rank man

then draws his bayonet and sticks it in the ground by the outside of

the right heel. All unsling and open the blanket rolls and take out

the shelter half, poles, and pins. Each then spreads his shelter half,

triangle to the rear, flat upon the ground the tent is to occupy,

rear-rank man's half on the right. The halves are then buttoned

together. Each front-rank man joins his pole, inserts the top in the

eyes of the halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet

placed in the ground; his rear-rank man, using the pins in front, pins

down the front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets, stretching

the canvas taut; he then inserts a pin in the eye of the rope and

drives the pin at such distance in front of the pole as to hold the

rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent; the rear-rank man

adjusts the pole and the front-rank man drives the pins. The rest of

the pins are then driven by both men, the rear-rank man working on the

right.

As soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges the contents of the

blanket roll in the tent and stands at attention in front of his own

half on line with the front guy rope pin.

The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the shelter tents are

pitched, should all be of the same length. (793)

=709.= When the blanket roll is not carried, intervals are taken as

described above; the position of the front pole is marked with a

bayonet and equipments are laid aside. The men then proceed to the

wagon, secure their rolls, return to their places, and pitch tents as

heretofore described. (794)

=710.= To pitch double shelter tent, the captain gives the same

commands as before, except =Take half interval= is given instead of

=Take interval=. In taking interval, each man follows the preceding

man at 2 paces. The captain then commands: =PITCH DOUBLE TENTS.=

The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right guide and

with him pitches a single shelter tent.

Only the odd numbers of the front rank mark the line with the bayonet.

The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of two single

tents. Two complete tents, except one pole, are used. Two guy ropes

are used at each end, the guy pins being placed in front of the corner

pins.

The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear rank; and by

numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rank; the men falling in on the left

are numbered, counting off if necessary.

All the men spread their shelter halves on the ground the tent is to

occupy. Those of the front rank are placed with the triangular ends to

the front. All four halves are then buttoned together, first the

ridges and then the square ends. The front corners of the tent are

pinned by the front-rank men, the odd number holding the poles, the

even number driving the pins. The rear-rank men similarly pin the rear

corners.

While the odd numbers steady the poles, each even number of the front

rank takes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted by the even

number of the rear rank, he adjusts the pole to the center eyes of the

shelter halves in the following order: (1) The lower half of the front

tent; (2) the lower half of the rear tent; (3) the upper half of the

front tent; (4) the upper half of the rear tent. The guy ropes are

then adjusted.

The tents having been pitched, the triangular ends are turned back,

contents of the rolls arranged, and the men stand at =attention=, each

opposite his own shelter half and facing out from the tent. (795)

FOOTNOTES:

[1] No. 1 of the first squad.

[2] Ordinarily about 20 yards wide.

[3] By Fire Direction is meant prescribing and generally directing the

firing.--Author.

[4] The "pack" includes blanket, poncho, and shelter tent.

[5] With a 4-foot white and red regimental signal flag.

CHAPTER II

MANUAL OF THE BAYONET

(The numbers following the paragraphs are those of the Manual of

the Bayonet, U. S. Army.)

=711.= The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable

the enemy, but he should know that personal combat is often necessary

to obtain success. Therefore, he must be instructed in the use of the

rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters. (1)

=712.= The object of this instruction is to teach the soldier how to

make effective use of the rifle and bayonet in personal combat; to

make him quick and proficient in handling his rifle; to give him an

accurate eye and a steady hand; and to give him confidence in the

bayonet in offense and defense. When skill in these exercises has been

acquired, the rifle will still remain a most formidable weapon at

close quarters should the bayonet be lost or disabled. (2)

=713.= Efficiency of organizations in bayonet fighting will be judged

by the skill shown by individuals in personal combat. For this purpose

pairs or groups of opponents, selected at random from among recruits

and trained soldiers, should engage in assaults, using the fencing

equipment provided for the purpose. (3)

=714.= Officers and specially selected and thoroughly instructed

noncommissioned officers will act as instructors. (4)

=715.= Instruction in bayonet combat should begin as soon as the

soldier is familiar with the handling of his rifle and will progress,

as far as practicable, in the order followed in the text. (5)

=716.= Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground, but practice

should also be had on uneven ground, especially in the attack and

defense of intrenchments. (6)

=717.= These exercises will not be used as a calisthenic drill. (7)

=718.= The principles of the commands are the same as those given in

paragraphs 58, 64, and 87. Intervals and distances will be taken as in

paragraphs 156 and 158, except that, in formations for bayonet

exercises, the men should be at least four paces apart in every

direction. (8)

=719.= Before requiring soldiers to take a position or execute a

movement for the first time, the instructor executes the same for the

purpose of illustration, after which he requires the soldiers to

execute the movement individually. Movements prescribed in this manual

will not be executed in cadence as the attempt to do so results in

incomplete execution and lack of vigor. Each movement will be executed

correctly as quickly as possible by every man. As soon as the

movements are executed accurately, the commands are given rapidly, as

expertness with the bayonet depends chiefly upon quickness of motion.

(9)

=720.= The exercises will be interrupted at first by short and

frequent rests. The rests will be less frequent as proficiency is

attained. Fatigue and exhaustion will be specially guarded against as

they prevent proper interest being taken in the exercises and delay

the progress of the instruction. Rests will be given from the position

of order arms in the manner prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.

(10)

THE BAYONET

NOMENCLATURE AND DESCRIPTION

=721.= The bayonet is a cutting and thrusting weapon consisting of

three principal parts, viz, the blade, guard, and grip. (11)

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

=722.= The blade has the following parts: Edge, false edge, back,

grooves, point, and tang. The length of the blade from guard to point

is 16 inches, the edge 14.5 inches, and the false edge 5.6 inches.

Length of the rifle, bayonet fixed, is 59.4 inches. The weight of the

bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without bayonet is 8.69 pounds.

The center of gravity of the rifle, with bayonet fixed, is just in

front of the rear sight. (12)

I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE RIFLE

=723.= The instructor explains the importance of good footwork and

impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and suppleness of

body are as important for attack and defense as is the ability to

parry and deliver a strong point or cut. (13)

=724.= All foot movements should be made from the position of _guard_.

As far as practicable, they will be made on the balls of the feet to

insure quickness and agility. No hard and fast rule can be laid down

as to the length of the various foot movements; this depends entirely

on the situations occurring in combat. (14)

=725.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor

commands:

=1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the command =guard=, half face to the right, carry back and place

the right foot about once and a half its length to the rear and about

3 inches to the right, the feet forming with each other an angle of

about 60 deg., weight of the body balanced equally on the balls of the

feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on hips, fingers to the

front, thumbs to the rear, head erect, head and eyes straight to the

front. (15)

=726.= To resume the attention, =1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION.= The men take

the position of the soldier and fix their attention. (16)

=727. ADVANCE.= Advance the left foot quickly about once its length

follow immediately with the right foot the same distance. (17)

=728. RETIRE.= Move the right foot quickly to the rear about once its

length, follow immediately with the left foot the same distance. (18)

=729. 1. Front, 2. PASS.= Place the right foot quickly about once its

length in front of the left, advance the left foot to its proper

position in front of the right. (19)

=730. 1. Rear, 2. PASS.= Place the left foot quickly about once its

length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper

position in rear of the left.

The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or to

withdraw quickly therefrom. (20)

=731. 1. Right, 2. STEP.= Step to the right with the right foot about

once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative

position. (21)

=732. 1. Left, 2. STEP.= Step to the left with the left foot about

once its length and place the right foot in its proper relative

position.

These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure a more

favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent's attack. Better

ground or more favorable light may be gained in this way. In bayonet

fencing and in actual combat the foot first moved in stepping to the

right or left is the one which at the moment bears the least weight.

(22)

II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE

=733.= The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are

the same as already given for movements without the rifle. (23)

=734.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor

commands:

=1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the

same time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with

the left hand just below the lower band, fingers between the stock and

gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping

the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,

elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.

(24) (See Fig. 2)

=735. 1. Order, 2. ARMS.=

Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of

order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. (25)

=736.= During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will

be executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they

may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held. (26)

ATTACKS

=737. 1. THRUST.=

Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,

turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet

at the point to be attacked, butt covering the right forearm. At the

same time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of

the body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot

always on the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,

the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the

attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,

chest, head, neck, and limbs. (27)

=738. 1. LUNGE.=

Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot

is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always

be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without

command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if, for

any reason, it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the

latter case, the preparatory command =forward= will be given. Each

method should be practiced. (28)

=739. 1. Butt, 2. STRIKE.=

Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle

against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about

the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the

rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.

The points of attack in their order of importance are, head, neck,

stomach, and crotch. (29)

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=740. 1. Cut, 2. DOWN.=

Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of

attack. Guard is resumed without command. (30)

=741. 1. Cut, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).=

With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),

directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without

command.

The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an

enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,

or back edge, is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in

continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. (31)

=742.= To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier

will change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient

manner, for example: =1. To the right rear, 2. Cut, 3. DOWN;= =1. To

the right, 2. LUNGE;= =1. To the left, 2. THRUST=, etc.

Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the

body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best

accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of

guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. (32)

=743.= Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting

and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings

or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably

suspended at desired heights. (33)

[Illustration: Fig. 6.]

=744.= The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by

endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by

directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.

(34)

=745.= The soldier should also experience the effect of actual

resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in

attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.

(35)

=746.= Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the

execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the

bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can

be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely

together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is

preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,

are also suitable. (36)

[Illustration: Fig. 7.]

DEFENSES

=747.= In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard

is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become

proficient, the instructor will cause them to resume the position of

guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.

(37)

=748. 1. Parry, 2. RIGHT.=

Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply

to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6

inches to the right. (38)

=749. 1. Parry, 2. LEFT.=

Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to

cover the point attacked. (39)

=750. 1. Parry, 2. HIGH.=

Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of

vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.

When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be

supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This

position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,

such, as men mounted or on top of parapets. (40)

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

=751. 1. Low parry, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).=

Carry the point of the bayonet down until it is at the height of the

knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left)

to keep the opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.

=752.= These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist

leaves the head and body exposed. (41)

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

=753.= Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short

motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far

as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against =butt

strike= are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point

attacked. (42)

=754.= To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the

soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most

convenient manner, for example, =1. To the left rear, 2. Parry, 3.

HIGH;= =1. To the right, 2. Parry, 3. RIGHT=, etc.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of

guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.

In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is

danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a

vertical position. (43)

III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET

=755. 1. Club rifle, 2 SWING.=

Being at order arms at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn

the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and

muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at

the sane time raise the rifle above shoulder farthest from the

opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and

knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,

shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.

=SWING.= Tighten the grasp of the hands and swing the rifle to the

front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent and

immediately return to the position of =club rifle= by completing the

swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command.

=SWING.=

The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any

guard or parry that may be interposed.

Being at =club rifle=, order arms is resumed by command.

The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.

(44)

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

=756.= The position of club rifle may be taken from any position of

the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in

personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of

the bayonet. (45)

IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS

=757.= The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous

attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained by the single

movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the

reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an

attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of

the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied

by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to

the right or left may be accompanied by =attacks= or =defenses=. (46)

=758.= Not more than three movements will be used in any combination.

The instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are

to be combined as =two movements= or =three movements=. The execution

is determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard

is taken upon the completion of the last movement only.

EXAMPLES

=Front pass and LUNGE.=

=Right step and THRUST.=

=Left step and low parry RIGHT.=

=Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.=

=Lunge and cut RIGHT.=

=Parry right and parry HIGH.=

=Butt strike and cut DOWN.=

=Thrust and parry HIGH.=

=Parry high and LUNGE.=

=Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.=

=Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.=

=To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.=

=To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.= (47)

=759.= Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be

made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. (48)

V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT

=760.= The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as

far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet

exercises. (49)

=761.= The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme

importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack

fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the

opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent

on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take

the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the

offensive and take immediate advantage of it. (50)

=762.= Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing.

Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a

single hasty glance. (51)

=763.= In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be

plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the

point of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in

night attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body. (52)

=764.= Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The

point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in

the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to

the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for

attack or defense. (53)

=765.= Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left

hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from that

described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge,

he will be at a great disadvantage. (34)

=766.= The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is

particularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a

sentry can strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. (55)

=767.= Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the

muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will

be directed toward getting past the bayonet. Attack him with short

stabbing thrusts, and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.

(56)

=768.= The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and

lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and

advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp

parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed

to a counter-attack, which should follow promptly. (57)

=769.= Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage

by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from

behind. (58)

=770.= In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must

be made to get on his near or left side, because here his reach is

much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable

such an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the

horseman. (59)

=771.= In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be

best observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach

generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within

attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle

of his body. (60)

VI. FENCING EXERCISES

=772.= Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of

thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will,

the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. (61)

=773.= The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before

the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such

condition as will prevent accidents. (62)

=774.= The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,

facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a

distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as

number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. (63)

=775.= The opponents being at the order facing each other, the

instructor commands: =SALUTE.=

Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to

the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and

joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two)

Drop the arm smartly by the side.

This salute is the fencing salute.

All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will

begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.

(64)

=776.= After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor

commands: =1. Fencing exercise, 2. GUARD.=

At the command =guard= each man comes to the position of =guard=,

heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing

lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the

opponent's bayonet. The position is known as the engage or engage

right. (65)

=777.= Being at the =engage right: ENGAGE LEFT=.

The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his

opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the

right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each

man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding

portion of the opponent's bayonet. (66)

=778.= Being at =engage left: ENGAGE RIGHT=.

The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his

opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the

left and =engages=. (67)

=779.= Being =engaged: ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT=.

The attack =engages left= and then immediately =engages right=. (68)

=780.= Being =engaged left: ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT=.

The attack =engages right= and then immediately =engages left=. (69)

=781. 1. Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT); 2. Number two, COUNTER.=

Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly

drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original

position. (70)

=782.= In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage, a

certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the

play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This is

necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended attack.

It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for his

assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is

controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary. (71)

=783.= After some exercise in =engage=, =engage left=, and =counter=,

exercises will be given in the =assaults=. (72)

ASSAULTS

=784.= The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name

as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the

knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are

first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at

the command =assault=. Number one executes the attack, and number two

parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one

parries. (73)

=785.= For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into

=simple attacks=, =counter-attacks=, =attack on the rifle=, and

=feints=. (74)

SIMPLE ATTACKS

=786.= Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement.

There are three simple attacks--the =straight=, the =disengagement=,

and the =counter disengagement=. They are not preceded by a feint.

(75)

=787.= In the =straight= the bayonet is directed straight at an

opening from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle

may, or may not, be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high

or low, contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing

the attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used

in the engage may be continued in the attack.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number one=, at neck (head,

chest, right leg, etc.), =thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3.

ASSAULT.= (76)

=788.= In the =disengagement= contact with the opponent's rifle is

abandoned and the point of the bayonet is =circled under= or =over=

his bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This

attack is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet

from the moment contact is abandoned.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number one=, at stomach

(left chest, left leg, etc.), =thrust, 2. Number two, parry left=

(etc.); =3. ASSAULT.= (77)

=789.= In the =counter disengagement= a swift attack is made into the

opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the

engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral

movement of the bayonet into the opening.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, =1. Number two, engage left; 2.

Number one=, at chest, =thrust; 3. Number two, parry left; 4.

ASSAULT.=

Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the

opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. (78)

=790.= A =counter-attack= or =return= is one made instantly after or

in continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.

This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter

parry. The counter-attack should also be made at, or just before, the

full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made, a

simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the

opponent's body.

Example: Being at =engage=, =1. Number two=, at chest, =lunge; 2.

Number one, parry right=, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), =thrust;

3. ASSAULT.= (79)

ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE

=791.= These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or

disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the

=press=, the =beat=, and the =twist=. (80)

=792.= In the =press= the attack quickly presses against the

opponent's bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as

the attack is delivered.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, press=, and at chest,

=thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. ASSAULT.= (81)

=793.= The attack by =disengagement= is particularly effective

following =the press=.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, press=, and at

stomach, =thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (82)

=794.= The =beat= is an attack in which a sharp blow struck against

the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an

opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when

there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, beat= and at stomach

(chest, etc.), =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (83)

=795.= In the =twist= the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle

or bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and

a straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength

on the part of the attack.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, twist=, and at

stomach, =thrust; 2. Number two, low parry, left; 3. ASSAULT.= (84)

FEINTS

=796.= Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are

made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the

desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according

to the number of such movements made by the attack. (85)

=797.= In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little

force as possible is put into a feint.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, feint= head =thrust=

at stomach, =lunge; 2. Number two, parry right and low parry right; 3.

ASSAULT.=

Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes

both parries. (86)

=798.= In double feints first one part of the body and then another is

threatened and a third attacked.

Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, feint straight thrust=

at chest; =disengagement= at chest; at stomach, =lunge; 2. Number two,

parry right, parry left,= and =low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.= (87)

=799.= An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the

=press= or =beat=. (88)

=800.= In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried.

When the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the

attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a

counter feint. (89)

=801.= A =counter feint= is a feint following the opponent's feint or

following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined

movements. (90)

COMBINED MOVEMENTS

=802.= When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various

foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor

combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,

increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more

skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.

1. Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, by disengagement=

at chest, =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, right step= (left foot

first), and =lunge; 3. ASSAULT.=

2. Example: Being at =engage left=, =1. Number one, press and lunge;

2. Number two, parry right, left step,= and =thrust; 3. ASSAULT.=

3. Example: Being at the =engage=, =1. Number one, by disengagement=

at chest, =thrust; 2. Number two, parry left, front pass=, and at head

=butt strike; 3. Number one, right step; 4. ASSAULT.= (91)

=803.= Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as =cross

counters=, and example No. 3 of movements known as =close counters=.

(92)

=804.= A =chancery= is an attack by means of which the opponent is

disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which

disables his weapon. (93)

=805.= When the different combinations are executed with sufficient

skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized

and executed at the command assault. The accuracy and celerity of the

movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view to

the correction of faulty execution. (94)

=806.= It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to

leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of

instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the

object of the drill. (95)

VII. FENCING AT WILL

=807.= As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to

the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,

each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.

Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random

attacks and defenses. (96)

=808.= The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a

time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn

different methods of attack and defense from each other. (97)

=809.= The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a

view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards

everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the

movements and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. (98)

=810.= Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent

dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be

continually encouraged. (99)

=811.= In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents

facing each other at the position of order arms, salute. They then

immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles

engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his

opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided

before the salute. (100)

=812.= The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing

salute having been rendered, the instructor commands, =1. At will, 2.

ASSAULT=, after which either party has the right to attack. To

interrupt the contest the instructor will command =HALT=, at which the

combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the

contest the instructor will command, =1. Halt, 2. SALUTE=, at which

the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove

their masks. (101)

=813.= When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one

opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at

=charge bayonet=, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver

an attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor

commands, =HALT=, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in

assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double

time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a

distance not exceeding 30 yards. (102)

=814.= The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide

doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest

indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment

on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies and

explain how they may be avoided in the future. (103)

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

=815.= As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield

the rifle left handed, that is on the left side of the body, left hand

at the small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this method

to advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is wounded.

(104)

=816.= After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in

fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When

practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character.

In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of

umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at

once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the

numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required

in group fencing. (105)

RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL

=817.= 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit

counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient

force to disable.

2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."

3. After receiving a fair hit a counter-attack is not permitted. A

position of engage is taken.

4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only

when the first hit was not called.

5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of

breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the

position of the order.

6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will

not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend

himself.

7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.

8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. (106)

SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL

=818.= When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's

position and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to

discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the

adversary out and induce him to expose that part of the body at which

the attack is to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a

feint and then make the real attack. (107)

=819.= Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are

difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more

exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there

is no previous warning of its delivery, although it should always be

expected. Returns are made without lunging if the adversary can be

reached by thrusts or cuts. (108)

=820.= Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without

knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and

leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain

attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will

soon discover. (109)

=821.= Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and lunging

(110)

=822.= The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many

forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.

Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted. (111)

HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS

=823.= The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of

his weapon, not only to show the various movements, but also to lead

in the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and

arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as

instructors by fencing with each other. (112)

LESSONS OF THE EUROPEAN WAR

=824. Modification of our system of bayonet combat suggested.= The

above gives, in toto, the system of bayonet exercises and combat at

present prescribed by the War Department in the =Manual of the

Bayonet=. However, the use of the bayonet in the present European war,

which has given that weapon an importance and prominence heretofore

unheard of, suggests, as indicated below, certain modifications of our

system.

(a) _Attack not to be directed against chest._ The attack should be

directed at the adversary's neck or stomach, and not against his

chest; for, if the bayonet is driven into the chest, there will

probably be difficulty in withdrawing it, and while your bayonet is

being so held, imbedded in your adversary's chest, you are at the

mercy of any other enemy soldier free to strike you.

(b) _Melee on parapet._ When the first wave of an attacking line

reaches the enemy's trench, it is usually met outside the trench, the

melee taking place on the parapet, and fortunate is the man who is

skilled in handling his bayonet. Such a man has a much greater chance

to live through the melee than the one who is not skillful in using

his bayonet. In the excitement and confusion of this melee the

greatest possible care must be taken not to stab some of your own men

in the back.

keep both feet pointing toward the enemy instead of having the right

foot turned to the right, as in our system. Note the position of the

feet in Figs. 15-18.

(d) _The "Short point" (or "Short thrust") and the "Jab."_ There are

two attacks used by European troops which we might learn with profit.

They are the "Short point" (or "Short thrust") and the "Jab."

POSITION OF GUARD

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

(e) _The short point (or short thrust)._ The _short point_ (or _short

thrust_) is taken from the position of guard (Fig. 14), by slipping

the left hand up to the grip of the bayonet, grasping it and the

barrel, as shown in this figure:

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

The rifle is then drawn back to the fullest extent of the right arm,

thus:

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

and a vigorous thrust is made at the objective (Fig. 15), immediately

after which the bayonet is withdrawn vigorously, the left hand relaxed

and the position of guard (Fig. 14) is resumed by pushing the rifle

smartly forward until the left hand is in its proper place.

It should be practiced on sand bags or other targets in positions at

the height of the rifle, above it and below it.

(f) _The jab._ The jab is taken from the first position of the "Short

point" (Fig. 15), by slipping the right hand up to the left as the

rifle is drawn back to make the "Short thrust" (Fig. 17).

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

Then make a vigorous _upward_ thrust (Fig. 18) which should be aimed

at the adversary's throat.

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

This may be practiced combined with the short thrust or the ordinary

thrust. It may also be practiced with a run toward the target. It is a

useful attack at close quarters.

(g) _The butt._ The rifle butt is used with great effect at close

quarters, the blows being directed against an adversary's jaw or in

the region of the heart.

(h) _Tripping adversary._ The men are taught how to trip up an enemy

and how to use their knees in throwing their opponents off their

balance.

(i) _Withdrawing the bayonet._ After driving the bayonet into an

opponent, then the first consideration is to get it out of his body.

This may be done by slipping the left hand up to the bayonet grip and

exerting a _vigorous_ pull, which is immediately followed by a return

to the position of guard.

(j) _Points in training._ In the first stages of training, special

attention is paid to a firm grip and proper handling of arms; then the

greatest attention is given to "direction" when thrusting, lunging,

and parrying.

Until these essentials have been thoroughly mastered, quickness should

not be insisted upon.

Confidence comes after continued practice, and quickness and vigor

will come with confidence.

After the men are taught to make all the attacks as individuals they

should be given practice in them as groups.

Sandbags with discs marked on them to provide targets are used in

instructing the British armies.

These bags are suspended from trees or trestles, or are put into

trenches or pits, and are also placed on the ground.

An excellent scheme is used in teaching the men what the shock of a

charge is like. The men are divided into two or more groups and are

equipped with fencing outfits. One group is designated as the defense

and is placed in trenches. The other groups are the attackers. They

may be sent forward in waves or in one line. To make their advance

more realistic they have to get over or around obstacles. To take in

all phases the attackers are made stronger than the defense and the

defense retires--whereupon the attackers endeavor to disable them by

thrusting at the kidneys. Likewise the defense is made strong enough

to drive off the offense.

In the charge the men are taught to run at the "High Port" (the rifle

is held as in "Port arms," but is carried well above the head). The

rifle is brought down to guard just before the enemy is met.

APPENDIX D

SEPTEMBER 15, 1917

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS, 1911.

Paragraphs 120, 143, 146, 185, 187, 189, 194, 646, Infantry Drill

Regulations, 1911, apply only to troops armed with the United States

rifle, Model 1903. For troops armed with the United States rifle,

Model 1917 (Enfield), the alternative paragraphs published herewith

will govern.

By order of the Secretary of War:

=120.= The following rules govern the carrying of the piece:

First. The piece is not carried with cartridges in either the chamber

or the magazine except when especially ordered. When so loaded, or

supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; that is, with

safety lock turned to the "=Safe.=" At all other times it is carried

unlocked, with the trigger pulled.

Second. Whenever troops are formed under arms, pieces are immediately

inspected at the commands: =1. INSPECTION, 2. ARMS, 3. ORDER (Right

shoulder port), 4. ARMS.=

A similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed

and placed in the belt.

Third. The bayonet is not fixed except in bayonet exercise, on guard,

or for combat.

Fourth. =Fall in= is executed with the piece at the order arms. =Fall

out=, =rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms. On resuming

attention the position of order arms is taken.

Fifth. If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the piece is

brought to the right shoulder, at the command =MARCH=, the three

motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be

executed at the trail by prefacing the preparatory command with the

words =at trail=; as =1. AT TRAIL, FORWARD, 2. MARCH.= The trail is

taken at the command =MARCH=.

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval or

distance, and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the piece

to the trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.

Sixth. The piece is brought to the order on halting. The execution of

the order begins when the halt is completed.

Seventh. A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without

arms.

=143.= Being at order arms: =1. UNFIX, 2. BAYONET.=

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Execute parade rest;

grasp the handle of the bayonet firmly with the right hand, pressing

the spring with the forefinger of the left hand; raise the bayonet

until the handle is about 12 inches above the muzzle of the piece; the

point to the left, back of the hand toward the body, and glancing at

the scabbard, return the bayonet, the blade passing between the left

arm and the body; regrasp the piece with the right hand and resume the

order.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the haversack: Take the bayonet

from the rifle with the left hand and return it to the scabbard in the

most convenient manner.

If marching or lying down, the bayonet is fixed and unfixed in the

most expeditious and convenient manner and the piece returned to the

original position.

Fix and unfix bayonet are executed with promptness and regularity, but

not in cadence.

=146.= Being at inspection arms: =1. ORDER (Right shoulder, port), 2.

ARMS.=

At the preparatory command press the follower down with the fingers of

the left hand, then push the bolt forward just enough to engage the

follower, raise the fingers of the left hand, push the bolt forward,

turn the handle down, pull the trigger, and resume =port arms=. At the

command =ARMS=, complete the movement ordered.

To Load

=185.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: =1. WITH DUMMY (Blank

or ball) CARTRIDGES, 2. LOAD.=

At the command =load= each front rank man or skirmisher faces half

right and carries the right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such a

position as will insure the greatest firmness and steadiness of the

body; raises or lowers the piece and drops it into the left hand at

the balance, left thumb extended along the stock and muzzle at the

height of the breast. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt

back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots,

places the thumb on the powder space at the top cartridge, the fingers

extending around the piece and tips resting on the magazine floor

plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down with

the thumb; without removing the clip, thrusts the bolt home, turning

down the handle; turns the safety lock to the "Safe" and carries the

hand to the small of the stock. Each rear rank man moves to the right

front, takes a similar position opposite the interval to the right of

his front rank man, muzzle of the piece extending beyond the front

rank, and loads.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held as nearly

as practicable in the position of load.

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if

kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the

elbows are supported by the knees. If lying down, the left hand

steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt

resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)

are designated as that of =load=.

=186.= For purposes of simulating firing, =1. SIMULATE, 2. LOAD=,

raise the bolt handle as in the preceding paragraph, draw the bolt

back until the cocking piece engages, then close the bolt, and turn

the bolt handle down.

The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; after a

few lessons dummy cartridges are used. Later, blank cartridges may be

used.

Omit last paragraph.

=187. Unload:= Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and

move the bolt alternately backward and forward until all the

cartridges are ejected. After the last cartridge is ejected the

chamber is closed by pressing the follower down with the fingers of

the left hand, to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the

bolt home. The trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up,

cleaned, and returned to the belt and the piece is brought to the

order.

=189.= [Last paragraph]. To continue the firing: =1. AIM, 2. SQUAD, 3.

FIRE.=

Each command is executed as previously explained. =Load= is executed

by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right hand,

leaving the safety lock at the "Ready."

=194. Cease firing:= Firing stops; pieces are loaded and locked; the

sights are laid down and the piece is brought to the order. Cease

firing is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of position or

to steady the men.

Company Inspection

=646.= Being in line at halt: =1. OPEN RANKS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command =march= the front rank executes right dress; the rear

rank and the file closers march backward 4 steps, halt, and execute

right dress; the lieutenants pass around their respective flanks and

take post, facing to the front, 3 paces in front of the center of

their respective platoons. The captain aligns the front rank, rear

rank, and file closers, takes post 3 paces in front of the right

guide, facing to the left and commands: =1. FRONT, 2. PREPARE FOR

INSPECTION.=

At the second command the lieutenants carry saber; the captain returns

saber and inspects them, after which they face about, order saber, and

stand at ease; upon the completion of the inspection they carry saber,

face about, and order saber. The captain may direct the lieutenants to

accompany or assist him, in which case they return saber and, at the

close of the inspection, resume their posts in front of the company,

draw and carry saber.

Having inspected the lieutenants, the captain proceeds to the right of

the company. Each man, as the captain approaches him executes

=inspection arms=.

The captain takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just

below the lower band, the man dropping his hands; the captain inspects

the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position as in

receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the left

hand at the balance and executes =order arms=.

As the captain returns the piece the next man executes =inspection

arms=, and so on through the company.

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man executes

=order arms= as soon as the captain passes to the next man.

The inspection is from right to left in front, and from left to right

in rear of each rank and of the line of file closers.

When approached by the captain the first sergeant executes =inspection

saber=. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute =inspection pistol=

by drawing the pistol from the holster and holding it diagonally

across the body, barrel up, and 6 inches in front of the neck, muzzle

pointing up and to the left. The pistol is returned to the holster as

soon as the captain passes.

Upon completion of the inspection the captain takes post facing to the

left in front of the right guide and on line with the lieutenants and

commands: =1. CLOSE RANKS, 2. MARCH.=

At the command march the lieutenants resume their posts in line; the

rear rank closes to 40 inches, each man covering his file leader; the

file closers close to 2 paces from the rear rank.

CHAPTER III

MANUAL OF PHYSICAL TRAINING

(EXTRACTS)

METHODS

=825.= In the employment of the various forms of physical training it

is necessary that well-defined methods should be introduced in order

that the object of this training may be attained in the most thorough

and systematic manner. Whenever it is possible this work should be

conducted out of doors. In planning these methods the following

factors must be considered:

(_a_) The condition and physical aptitude of the men.

(_b_) The facilities.

(_c_) The time.

The question of the _physical aptitude_ and _general condition_, etc.,

of the men is a very important one, and it should always determine the

nature and extent of the task expected of them; never should the work

be made the determining factor. In general, it is advisable to divide

the men into three classes, viz., the recruit class, the intermediate

class, and the advanced class. The work for each class should fit the

capabilities of the members of that class and in every class it should

be arranged progressively.

_Facilities_ are necessarily to be considered in any plan of

instruction, but as most posts are now equipped with better than

average facilities the plan laid down in this Manual will answer all

purposes.

_Time_ is a decidedly important factor, and no plan can be made unless

those in charge of this work know exactly how much time they have at

their disposal. During the suspension of drills five periods a week,

each of 45 minutes duration, should be devoted to physical training;

during the drill period a 15-minute drill in setting-up exercises

should be ordered on drill days. The time of day, too, is important.

_When possible, these drills should be held in the morning about two

hours after breakfast, and at no time should they be held immediately

before or after a meal._

Insist upon accurate and precise execution of every movement. By doing

so those other essential qualities, besides strength and

endurance--activity, agility, gracefulness, and accuracy--will also be

developed.

Exercises which require activity and agility, rather than those that

require strength only, should be selected.

It should be constantly borne in mind that these exercises are the

means and not the end; and if there be a doubt in the mind of the

instructor as to the effect of an exercise, it is always well to err

upon the side of safety. _Underdoing is rectifiable; overdoing is

often not._ The object of this work is not the development of expert

gymnasts, but the development of physically sound men by means of a

system in which the chances of bodily injury are reduced to a minimum.

When individuals show a special aptitude for gymnastics they may be

encouraged, within limits, to improve this ability, but never at the

expense of their fellows.

The drill should be made as attractive as possible, and this can best

be accomplished by employing the mind as well as the body. The

movements should be as varied as possible, thus constantly offering

the men something new to make them keep their minds on their work. A

movement many times repeated presents no attraction and is executed in

a purely mechanical manner, which should always be discountenanced.

Short and frequent drills should be given in preference to long ones,

which are liable to exhaust all concerned, and exhaustion means lack

of interest and benefit. All movements should be carefully explained,

and, if necessary, illustrated by the instructor.

The lesson should begin with the less violent exercises, gradually

working up to those that are more so, then gradually working back to

the simpler ones, so that the men at the close of the drill will be in

as nearly a normal condition as possible.

When one portion of the body is being exercised, care should be taken

that the other parts remain quiet as far as the conformation of the

body will allow. The men must learn to exercise any one part of the

body independent of the other part.

Everything in connection with physical training should be such that

the men look forward to it with pleasure, not with dread, for the mind

exerts more influence over the human body than all the gymnastic

paraphernalia that was ever invented.

Exercise should be carried on as much as possible in the open air; at

all times in pure, dry air.

Never exercise the men to the point of exhaustion. If there is

evidence of panting, faintness, fatigue, or pain, the exercise should

be stopped at once, for it is nature's way of saying "too much."

By constant practice the men should learn to breathe slowly through

the nostrils during all exercises, especially running.

A fundamental condition of exercise is unimpeded respiration. Proper

breathing should always be insisted upon; "holding the breath" and

breathing only when it can no longer be held is injurious. Every

exercise should be accompanied by an unimpeded and, if possible, by an

uninterrupted act of respiration, the inspiration and respiration of

which depends to a great extent upon the nature of the exercise.

Inhalation should always accompany that part of an exercise which

tends to elevate and distend the thorax--as raising arms over head

laterally, for instance; while that part of an exercise which exerts a

pressure against the walls of the chest should be accompanied by

exhalation, as for example, lowering arms laterally from shoulders or

overhead.

If after exercising, the breathing becomes labored and distressed, it

is an unmistakable sign that the work has been excessive. Such

excessiveness is not infrequently the cause of serious injury to the

heart and lungs or to both. In cases where exercise produces

palpitation, labored respiration, etc., it is advisable to recommend

absolute rest, or to order the execution of such exercises as will

relieve the oppressed and overtaxed organ. Leg exercises slowly

executed will afford great relief. By drawing the blood from the upper

to the lower extremities they equalize the circulation, thereby

lessening the heart's action and quieting the respiration.

_Never exercise immediately after a meal_; digestion is more important

at this time than extraneous exercise.

_Never eat or drink immediately after exercise_; allow the body to

recover its normal condition first, and the most beneficial results

will follow. If necessary, pure water, not too cold, may be taken in

small quantities, but the exercise should be continued, especially if

in a state of perspiration.

Never, if at all possible, allow the underclothing to dry on the body.

Muscular action produces an unusual amount of bodily heat; this should

be lost gradually, otherwise the body will be chilled; hence, after

exercise, never remove clothing to cool off, but, on the contrary,

wear some wrap in addition. In like manner, be well wrapped on leaving

the gymnasium.

Cold baths, especially when the body is heated, as in the case after

exercising violently, should be discouraged. In individual instances

such baths may appear apparently beneficial, or at least not

injurious; in a majority of cases, however, they can not be used with

impunity. Tepid baths are recommended. When impossible to bathe, the

flannels worn while exercising should be stripped off; the body

sponged with tepid water, and then rubbed thoroughly with coarse

towels. After such a sponge the body should be clothed in clean, warm

clothing.

Flannel is the best material to wear next to the body during physical

drill, as it absorbs the perspiration, protects the body against

drafts and, in a mild manner, excites the skin. When the conditions

permit it the men may be exercised in the ordinary athletic costume,

sleeveless shirt, flappers, socks, and gymnasium shoes.

COMMANDS--SETTING-UP EXERCISES

COMMANDS

=826.= There are two kinds of commands:

The preparatory indicates the movement to be executed.

The command of execution causes the execution.

In the command: =1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE=, the words =Arms forward=

constitute the preparatory command, and =RAISE= the command of

execution. Preparatory commands are printed in =bold face=, and those

of execution in =CAPITALS=.

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a loudness

proportioned to the number of men for whom it is intended.

The various movements comprising an exercise are executed by commands

and, unless otherwise indicated, the continuation of an exercise is

carried out by repeating the command, which usually takes the form of

numerals the numbers depending upon the number of movements, that an

exercise comprises. Thus, if an exercise consists of two movements,

the counts will be one, two; or if it consists of eight movements, the

counts will be correspondingly increased; thus every movement is

designated by a separate command.

Occasionally, especially in exercises that are to be executed slowly,

words rather than numerals are used, and these must be indicative of

the nature of the various movements.

In the continuation of an exercise the preparatory command is

explanatory, the command of execution causes the execution and the

_continuation is caused by a repetition of numerals_ denoting the

number of movements required, or of words describing the movements if

words are used. The numerals or words preceding the command =halt=

should always be given with a rising inflection on the first numeral

or word of command of the last repetition of the exercise in order to

prepare the men for the command =halt=.

For example:

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. Thrust arms upward, 4. EXERCISE, ONE,

TWO, ONE, TWO, ONE, HALT=; the rising inflection preparatory to the

command halt being placed on the "one" preceding the "=halt=."

Each command must indicate, by its tone, how that particular movement

is to be executed; thus, if an exercise consists of two movements, one

of which is to be energized, the command corresponding to that

movement must be emphasized.

Judgment must be used in giving commands, for rarely is the cadence of

two movements alike; and a command should not only indicate the

cadence of an exercise, but also the nature of its execution.

Thus, many of the arm exercises are short and snappy; hence the

command should be given in a smart tone of voice, and the interval

between the commands should be short.

The leg exercises can not be executed as quickly as those of the arms;

therefore, the commands should be slightly drawn out and follow one

another in slow succession.

The trunk exercises, owing to the deliberateness of execution, should

be considerably drawn out and follow one another in slow succession.

The antagonistic exercises, where one group of muscles is made to

antagonize another, tensing exercises, the commands are drawn still

more. In these exercises words are preferable to numerals. In fact it

should be the object of the instructor to convey to the men, by the

manner of his command, exactly the nature of the exercise.

All commands should be given in a clear and distinct tone of voice,

articulation should be distinct, and an effort should be made to

cultivate a voice which will inspire the men with enthusiasm and tend

to make them execute the exercises with willingness, snap, and

precision. It is not the volume, but the quality, of the voice which

is necessary to successful instruction.

THE POSITION OF ATTENTION

=827.= This is the position an unarmed dismounted soldier assumes when

in ranks. During the setting-up exercises, it is assumed whenever the

command attention is given by the instructor.

Having allowed his men to rest, the instructor commands: =1. Squad, 2.

ATTENTION.= Figs. A and B.

[Illustration: Fig. A]

[Illustration: Fig. B]

The words =class=, =section=, or =company= may be substituted for the

word "squad."

At the command =attention=, the men will quickly assume and retain the

following position:

Heels on same line and as near each other as the conformation of the

man permits.

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 degrees.

Knees straight without stiffness.

The body erect on the hips, the spine extended throughout its entire

length.

The shoulders falling naturally, are forced back until they are

square.

Chest arched and slightly raised.

The arms hang naturally; thumbs along seams of trousers; back of hands

out and elbows turned back.

Head erect, chin drawn in so that the axis of the head and neck is

vertical; eyes straight to the front and, when the nature of the

terrain permits it, fixed on an object at their own height.

Too much attention can not be given to this position, and instructors

are cautioned to insist that the men accustom themselves to it. As a

rule, it is so exaggerated that it not only becomes ridiculous, but

positively harmful. The men must be taught to assume a natural and

graceful position, one from which all rigidity is eliminated and from

which action is possible without first relaxing muscles that have been

constrained in an effort to maintain the position of attention. In

other words, cooerdination rather than strength should be depended

upon.

In the position described the weight rests principally upon the balls

of the feet, the heels resting lightly upon the ground.

The knees are extended easily, but never locked.

The body is now inclined forward until the front of the thighs is

directly over the point of the toes; the hips are square and the waist

is extended by the erection of the entire spine, but never to such a

degree that mobility of the waist is lost.

In extending the spine, the chest is naturally arched and the abdomen

is drawn in, but never to the extent where it interferes with

respiration.

In extending the spinal column, the shoulders must not be raised, but

held loosely in normal position and forced back until the points of

the shoulders are at right angles with an anterior-posterior plane

running through the shoulders.

The chin should be square; i. e., horizontal and forced back enough to

bring the neck in a vertical plane; the eyes fixed to the front and

the object on which they are fixed must be at their own height

whenever the nature of the terrain permits it.

When properly assumed, a vertical line drawn from the top of the head

should pass in front of the ear, just in front of the shoulder and of

the thigh, and find its base at the balls of the feet.

All muscles should be contracted only enough to maintain this

position, which at all times should be a lithesome one, that can be

maintained for a long period without fatigue--one that makes for

activity and that is based upon a correct anatomical and physiological

basis.

Instructors will correct the position of attention of every man

individually and they will ascertain, when the position has been

properly assumed, whether the men are "on their toes," i. e., carrying

the weight on the balls of the feet, whether they are able to respire

properly, and whether they find a strain across the small of the back,

which should be as flat as possible. This should be repeated until the

men are able to assume the position correctly without restraint or

rigidity.

At the command =rest= or =at ease= the men, while carrying out the

provisions of the drill regulations, should be cautioned to avoid

assuming any position that has a tendency to nullify the object of the

position of attention; standing on leg for instance; allowing the

shoulders to slope forward; drooping the head; folding arms across

chest, etc. The weight should always be distributed equally upon both

legs; the head, trunk, and shoulders remain erect and the arms held in

a position that does not restrict the chest or derange the shoulders.

The positions illustrated here have been found most efficacious. Figs.

C. and D.

[Illustration: Fig. C]

[Illustration: Fig. D]

FORMATIONS

=828.= The men form in a single or double rank, the tallest men on the

right.

The instructor commands: =1. Count off.=

At this command, all except the right file execute "=eyes right=" and,

beginning on the right, the men in each rank count 1, 2, 3, 4; each

man turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts.

The instructor then commands: =1. Take distance, 2. MARCH, 3. Squad,

4. HALT.=

At the command =march=, No. 1 of the front rank moves straight to the

front; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 of the front and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the

rear rank in the order named move straight to the front, each stepping

off, so as to follow the preceding man at four paces; the command halt

is given when all have their distances.

If it is desired that a less distance than four paces be taken, the

distance desired should be indicated in the preparatory command. The

men of the squad may be caused to cover No. 1 front rank by command

cover.

The instructor then commands: =1. Right (left), 2. FACE, 3. COVER.=

At these commands the men face in the direction indicated and cover in

file.

To assemble the squad the instructor commands: =1. Right (left), 2.

FACE, 3. Assemble, 4. MARCH.=

After facing and at command march, No. 1 of the front rank stands

fast, the other members of both ranks resuming their original

positions, or for convenience in the gymnasium they may be assembled

to the rear, in which case the assemblage is made on No. 4 of the rear

rank.

Unless otherwise indicated, the guide is =always right=.

SPECIAL TRAINING

=829.= In addition to the regular squad or class work instructors

should, when they notice a physical defect in any man, recommend some

exercise which will tend to correct it.

The most common physical defects and corresponding corrective

exercises are noted here.

DROOPING HEAD

=830.= Exercise the muscles of the neck by bending, turning, and

circling the head, muscles tense.

ROUND AND STOOPED SHOULDERS

=831.= Stretch arms sideward from front horizontal, turning palms

upward, muscles tense.

Swing arms forward and backward, muscles relaxed.

Circle arms forward and backward slowly, energize backward motion,

muscles tense; forward motion with muscles relaxed.

Circle shoulders backward, move them forward first, then raise them,

then move them backward as far as possible in the raised position,

muscles tense, and then lower to normal position, muscles relaxed.

WEAK BACK

=832.= Bend trunk forward as far as possible and erect it slowly.

Bend trunk forward, back arched and head thrown back.

Bend trunk sideward, without moving hips out of normal position, right

and left.

Lie on floor, face down, and raise head and shoulders.

WEAK ABDOMEN

=833.= Circle trunk right or left.

Bend trunk backward or obliquely backward.

Bend head and trunk backward without moving hips out of normal plane.

Lie on floor, face up, and raise head and shoulders slightly; or to

sitting position or raise legs slightly; or to a vertical position.

_To increase depth and width of chest_

Arm stretchings, sideward and upward, muscles tense.

Same, with deep inhalations.

Arm swings and arm circles outward, away from the body.

Raise extended arms over head laterally and cross them behind the

head.

Breathing exercises in connection with arm and shoulder exercises.

STARTING POSITIONS

=834.= In nearly all the arm exercises it is necessary to hold the

arms in some fixed position from which the exercises can be most

advantageously executed, and to which position the arms are again

returned upon completing the exercise. These positions are termed

=starting positions=; and though it may not be absolutely necessary to

assume one of them before or during the employment of any other

portion of the body, it is advisable to do so, since they give to the

exercise a finished, uniform, and graceful appearance.

In the following positions, at the command =down=, resume the

=attention=. Practice in assuming the starting position may be had by

repeating the commands of execution, such as =raise, down=.

=835.= While the exercises given below have been grouped for

convenient reference, into arm exercises, trunk exercises, leg

exercises, etc., one entire group _must not_ be given and then the

next and so on.

_Always bear in mind that the best results are obtained when those

exercises which affect the extensor muscles chiefly are followed by

those affecting the flexors; i. e., flexion should always be followed

by extension, or vice versa. It is also advisable that a movement

requiring a considerable amount of muscular exertion should be

followed by one in which this exertion is reduced to a minimum. As a

rule, especially in the setting-up exercises, one portion of the body

should not be exercised successively; thus, arm exercises should be

followed by a trunk exercise, and that in turn by a leg, shoulder, and

neck exercise._

ARM EXERCISES

=836.= Intervals having been taken and attention assumed, the

instructor commands:

=1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 1.

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

At the command =raise=, raise the arms to the front smartly, extended

to their full length, till the hands are in front of and at the height

of the shoulders, palms down, fingers extended and joined, thumbs

under forefingers. At =Arms, DOWN=, resume position of attention.

=1. Arms upward 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 2.

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

At the command =raise=, raise the arms from the sides, extended to

their full length, with the forward movement, until they are

vertically overhead, backs of hands turned outward, fingers as in 1.

This position may also be assumed by raising the arms laterally until

vertical. The instructor cautions which way he desires it done.

=1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 3.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

At the command =cross=, the arms are folded across the back; hands

grasping forearms.

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 4.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

At the command =raise=, raise the forearms to the front until

horizontal, elbow forced back, upper arms against the chest, hands

tightly closed, knuckles down.

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. Arms, 4. DOWN.= Fig. 5.

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

At the command =place=, place the hands on the hips, the finger tips

in line with trouser seams; fingers extended and joined, thumbs to the

rear, elbows pressed back.

_Combination of arm exercises_

=1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. THRUST ARMS FORWARD; SWING THEM

SIDEWARD, FORWARD, AND BACK TO POSITION.=

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times.

The arms are thrust forward, then relaxed and swung sideward, then

forward and finally brought back to position, pressing elbows well to

the rear; execute moderately fast; exhale on the first and third and

inhale on the second and fourth counts.

SETTING-UP EXERCISES

=837.= As has been stated previously, the setting-up exercises form

the basis upon which the entire system of physical training in the

service is founded. Therefore too much importance can not be attached

to them. Through the number and variety of movements they offer it is

possible to develop the body harmoniously with little if any danger of

injurious results. They develop the muscles and impart vigor and tone

to the vital organs and assist them in their functions; they develop

endurance and are important factors in the development of smartness,

grace, and precision. They should be assiduously practiced. The fact

that they require no apparatus of any description makes it possible to

do this out of doors or even in the most restricted room, proper

sanitary conditions being the only adjunct upon which their success is

dependent. No physical training drill is complete without them. They

should always precede the more strenuous forms of training, as they

prepare the body for the greater exertion these forms demand.

At the discretion of instructors these exercises may be substituted by

others of a similar character. Instructors are cautioned, however, to

employ all the parts of the body in every lesson and to suit the

exercise as far as practicable to the natural function of the

particular part of the body which they employ.

In these lessons only the preparatory command is given here; the

command of execution, which is invariably =Exercise=, and the commands

of continuance, as well as the command to discontinue, having been

explained are omitted.

Every preparatory command should convey a definite description of the

exercise required; by doing so long explanations are avoided and the

men will not be compelled to memorize the various movements.

RECRUIT INSTRUCTION

_First Series_

Position of attention, from =at ease= and =rest=.

Starting position, Figs. 1 to 5.

TRUNK EXERCISES

=838. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND TRUNK FORWARD.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 6.

[Illustration: Fig. 6]

The trunk is inclined forward at the waist about 45 deg. and then extended

again; the hips are as perpendicular as possible; execute slowly;

exhale on first and inhale and raise chest on second count.

By substituting the words _half_ or _full_ for the word quarter in

the command, the half bend, Fig. 7, and full bend exercise can be

given.

[Illustration: Fig. 7]

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK BACKWARD.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 8.

[Illustration: Fig. 8]

The trunk is bent backward as far as possible; head and shoulders

fixed; knees extended; feet firmly on the ground; hips as nearly

perpendicular as possible; in recovering care should be taken not to

sway forward; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale on second

count.

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. BEND TRUNK SIDEWARD, RIGHT OR LEFT.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 8 times, Fig. 9.

[Illustration: Fig. 9]

The trunk, stretched at the waist, is inclined sideward as far as

possible; head and shoulders fixed; knees extended and feet firmly on

the ground; execute slowly; inhale on first and exhale on second

count.

If an additional exercise is desired, by commanding: =CIRCLE TRUNK

RIGHT or LEFT= a combination of the above trunk exercises is obtained.

LEG EXERCISES

=839. 1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. QUARTER BEND KNEES.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 10.

[Illustration: Fig. 10]

The knees are flexed until the point of the knee is directly over the

toes; whole foot remains on ground; heels closed; head and body erect;

execute moderately fast, emphasizing the extension; breathe naturally.

By substituting the words _half_ or _full_ for the word quarter in the

command the half bend and full bend, Fig. 11, exercises can be given.

[Illustration: Fig. 11]

=1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE, 3. RAISE KNEE.=

Two counts; repeat 10 to 12 times. Fig. 12.

[Illustration: Fig. 12]

The thigh and knee are flexed until they are at right angles, thigh

horizontal: toes depressed; the right knee is raised at =one= and the

left at =two=; trunk and head erect; execute in cadence of quick time;

breathe naturally.

SHOULDER EXERCISE

=840. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. MOVE SHOULDERS FORWARD, UP,

BACK, AND DOWN.=

Four counts; repeat 8 to 10 times.

The shoulders are relaxed and brought forward; in that position they

are raised: then they are forced back without lowering them; and then

they are dropped back to position; execute slowly; exhale on the

first; inhale on the second and third and exhale on the last count.

NECK EXERCISE

=841. 1. Arms to thrust, 2. RAISE, 3. TURN HEAD RIGHT, OR LEFT.=

Two counts; repeat 6 to 10 times, Fig. 13.

[Illustration: Fig. 13]

The head, chin square, is turned to the right, or left as far as

possible, muscles of the neck being stretched; shoulders remain

square; execute slowly: breathe naturally.

To vary this exercise the head may be _bent forward and to the rear_

by substituting the proper commands.

BREATHING EXERCISE

=842. 1. Breathing exercise, 2. INHALE, 3. EXHALE.=

At =inhale= the arms are stretched forward overhead and the lungs are

inflated; at =exhale= the arms are lowered laterally and the lungs

deflated; execute slowly; repeat four times.

TOE EXERCISE

=843. 1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS, 3. RISE ON TOES.=

Two counts; repeat 8 to 10 times, Fig. 14.

[Illustration: Fig. 14]

The body is raised smartly until the toes and ankles are extended as

much as possible; heels closed; head and trunk erect; in recovering

position heels are lowered gently; breathe naturally.

COMBINATION EXERCISE

=844.= This exercise brings into play practically all of the muscles

that have been used in the preceding exercises.

=1. LEANING REST IN FOUR COUNTS.=

Repeat 6 to 8 times, Figs. 15, 16.

[Illustration: Fig. 15]

[Illustration: Fig. 16]

At =one= knees are bent to squatting position, hands on the ground

between knees; at =two= the legs are extended backward to the leaning

rest; at =three= the first position is resumed, and at =four= the

position of attention; hands should be directly under shoulders; back

arched; knees straight; head fixed; execute moderately fast; breathe

naturally.

WALKING AND MARCHING

=845.= The length of the full step in quick time is 30 inches,

measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120

steps per minute.

Proper posture and carriage have ever been considered very important

in the training of soldiers. In marching, the head and trunk should

remain immobile, but without stiffness; as the left foot is carried

forward the right forearm is swung forward and inward obliquely across

the body until the thumb, knuckles being turned out, reaches a point

about the height of the belt plate. The upper arm does not move beyond

the perpendicular plane while the forearm is swung forward, though the

arm hangs loosely from the shoulder joint. The forearm swing ends

precisely at the moment the left heel strikes the ground; the arm is

then relaxed and allowed to swing down and backward by its own weight

until it reaches a point where the thumb is about the breadth of a

hand to the rear of the buttocks. As the right arm swings back, the

left arm is swung forward with the right leg. The forward motion of

the arm assists the body in marching by throwing the weight forward

and inward upon the opposite foot as it is planted. The head is held

erect; body well stretched from the waist; chest arched; and there

should be no rotary motion of the body about the spine.

As the leg is thrown forward the knee is smartly extended, the heel

striking the ground first.

The instructor having explained the principles and illustrated the

step and arm swing, commands: =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=--and to halt the

squad he commands: =1. Squad, 2. HALT.=

In executing the setting-up exercises on the march the cadence should

at first be given slowly and gradually increased as the men become

more expert; some exercises require a slow and others a faster pace;

it is best in these cases to allow the cadence of the exercise to

determine the cadence of the step.

The men should march in a single file at proved intervals. The command

that causes and discontinues the execution should be given as the left

foot strikes the ground.

On the march, to discontinue the exercise, command: =1. Quick time, 2.

MARCH=, instead of =HALT=, as when at rest.

All of the arm, wrist, finger, and shoulder exercises, and some of the

trunk and neck, may be executed on the march by the same commands and

means as when at rest.

The following leg and foot exercises are executed at the command

march; the execution always beginning with the left leg or foot.

1. =1. On toes, 2. MARCH.=

2. =1. On heels, 2. MARCH.=

3. =1. On right heel and left toe, 2. MARCH.=

4. =1. On left heel and right toe, 2. MARCH.=

5. =1. On toes with knees stiff, 2. MARCH.=

6. =1. Swing extended leg forward, ankle high, 2. MARCH.=

7. =1. Swing extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH.=

8. =1. Swing extended leg forward, waist high, 2. MARCH.=

9. =1. Swing extended leg forward, shoulder high, 2. MARCH.=

10. =1. Raise heels, 2. MARCH.=

11. =1. Raise knees, thigh horizontal, 2. MARCH.=

12. =1. Raise knees, chest high, 2. MARCH.=

13. =1. Circle extended leg forward, ankle high, 2. MARCH.=

14. =1. Circle extended leg forward, knee high, 2. MARCH.=

15. =1. Circle extended leg forward, waist high, 2. MARCH.=

16. =1. Swing extended leg backward, 2. MARCH.=

17. =1. Swing extended leg sideward, 2. MARCH.=

18. =1. Raise knee and extend leg forward, 2. MARCH.=

19. =1. Raise heels and extend leg forward, 2. MARCH.=

DOUBLE TIMING

=846.= The length of the step in double time is 36 inches; the cadence

is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. To march in double time the

instructor commands: =1. Double time, 2. MARCH.=

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight of the body to the

right leg. At the command =march= raise the forearms, fingers closed;

to a horizontal position along the waist line; take up an easy run

with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural swinging

motion to the arms inward and upward in the direction of the opposite

shoulder.

In marching in quick time, at the command =march=, given as either

foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time, and then step

off in double time.

When marching in double time and in running the men breathe as much as

possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed.

A few minutes at the beginning of the setting-up exercises should be

devoted to double timing. From lasting only a few minutes at the start

it may be gradually increased, so that daily drills should enable the

men at the end of five or six months to double time 15 or 20 minutes

without becoming fatigued or distressed.

After the double time the men should be marched for several minutes at

quick time; after this the instructor should command:

=1. Route step, 2. MARCH.=

In marching at route step, the men are not required to preserve

silence nor keep the step; if marching at proved intervals, the latter

is preserved.

To resume the cadence step in quick time, the instructor commands: =1.

Squad, 2. ATTENTION.=

Great care must be exercised concerning the duration of the double

time and the speed and duration of the run. The demands made Upon the

men should be increased gradually.

When exercise rather than distance is desired, the running should be

done on the balls of the feet, heels raised from the ground.

DOUBLE TIMING EXERCISES

While the men are double timing the instructor may vary the position

of the arms by commanding:

1. =1. Arms forward, 2. RAISE.=

2. =1. Arms sideward, 2. RAISE.=

3. =1. Arms upward, 2. RAISE.=

4. =1. Hands on hips, 2. PLACE.=

5. =1. Hands on shoulders, 2. PLACE.=

6. =1. Arms forward, 2. CROSS.=

7. =1. Arms backward, 2. CROSS.=

At the command =down=, the double-time position for the arms and hands

is resumed.

RIFLE EXERCISES

=847.= The object of these exercises, which may also be performed with

wands or bar bells, is to develop the muscles of the arms, shoulders,

and back so that the men will become accustomed to the weight of the

piece and learn to wield it with that "handiness" so essential to its

successful use. When these exercises are combined with movements of

the various other parts of the body, they serve as a splendid, though

rather strenuous, method for the all-round development of the men. As

the weight of the piece is considerable, instructors are cautioned to

be reasonable in their demands. Far better results are obtained if

these exercises are performed at commands than when they are grouped

and performed for spectacular purposes.

All the exercises start from the starting position, which is the low

extended arm horizontal position in front of the body, arms straight;

the right hand grasping the small of the stock and the left hand the

barrel; the knuckles turned to the front and the distance between the

hands slightly greater than the width of the shoulders. Fig. 17.

[Illustration: Fig. 17]

This position is assumed at the command: =1. Starting, 2. POSITION=;

at the command =position= the piece is brought to the port and lowered

to the front horizontal snappily.

To recover the position of order, command: =1. Order, 2. Arms=; the

piece is first brought to the port and then to the order.

RIFLE DRILL COMBINATION

The following exercises consist of four movements, the third position

always corresponding to the first position and the fourth to the

starting position. When performed as a musical drill, the instructions

laid down in that lesson are applicable here.

All exercises begin and end with the first or starting position. Fig.

17.

The form of command is, for example:

(Being at the starting position)

=1. First group, 2. FIRST, EXERCISE=;

=1. Second group, 2. THIRD, EXERCISE=;

Etc., Etc.

FIRST GROUP

=848.= _First Exercise_

Counts

1-2. Raise piece to bent arm front horizontal, shoulder high, and

stride forward right, Fig. 18;

[Illustration: Fig. 18]

3-4. Face to the left on both heels and extend piece upward, Fig. 19;

[Illustration: Fig. 19]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=849.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to extended high horizontal, and stride sideward

right, Fig. 20;

[Illustration: Fig. 20]

3-4. Bend right knee and lower piece to left horizontal, Fig. 21;

[Illustration: Fig. 21]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=850.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high side perpendicular on the left, left hand up,

and stride backward right, Fig. 22;

[Illustration: Fig. 22]

3-4. Face about on heels and swing piece down and up to high side

perpendicular on the right, Fig. 23;

[Illustration: Fig. 23]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=851.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to extended high horizontal, and stride obliquely

forward right, Fig. 24;

[Illustration: Fig. 24]

3-4. Face about on heels and lower piece to horizontal on shoulders;

Fig. 25;

[Illustration: Fig. 25]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

SECOND GROUP

=852.= _First Exercise_

1-2. Lower piece to front extended horizontal and bend trunk forward,

Fig. 26;

[Illustration: Fig. 26]

3-4. Lunge obliquely forward right and raise piece to right oblique,

left hand at shoulder, Fig. 27;

[Illustration: Fig. 27]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=853.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high perpendicular on the left, left hand up, and

bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 28;

[Illustration: Fig. 28]

3-4. Lunge sideward right and swing piece down and up to right high

perpendicular, right hand up, Fig. 29;

[Illustration: Fig. 29]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=854.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high extended arm horizontal and bend trunk

backward, Fig. 30;

[Illustration: Fig. 30]

3-4. Lunge forward right, and swing piece to side horizontal, left

hand to the rear, Fig. 31;

[Illustration: Fig. 31]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=855.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to right high perpendicular and side step position

left, Fig. 32;

[Illustration: Fig. 32]

3-4. Lunge sideward left and swing piece to left high perpendicular,

Fig. 33;

[Illustration: Fig. 33]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

THIRD GROUP

=856.= _First Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to front bent horizontal, arms crossed, left over

right; lunge sideward right and bend trunk sideward right, Fig. 34;

[Illustration: Fig. 34]

3-4. Extend right knee and bend trunk to the left, bending left knee

and recrossing arms, left over right, Fig. 35;

[Illustration: Fig. 35]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=857.= _Second Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to bent arm horizontal; face right and lunge forward

right and bend trunk forward, Fig. 36;

[Illustration: Fig. 36]

3-4. Raise trunk and turn to the left on both heels and extend piece

overhead, Fig. 37;

[Illustration: Fig. 37]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=858.= _Third Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to left high horizontal; lunge forward right, Fig.

38;

[Illustration: Fig. 38]

3-4. Bend trunk forward and swing piece to extended low horizontal,

Fig. 39;

[Illustration: Fig. 39]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

=859.= _Fourth Exercise_

1-2. Raise piece to high extended horizontal and hop to side straddle

position, Fig. 40;

[Illustration: Fig. 40]

3-4. Bend trunk forward and swing piece to extended low horizontal,

left hand between legs, right hand forward, Fig. 41;

[Illustration: Fig. 41]

5-6. Resume first position;

7-8. Resume starting position.

Repeat left, right, left.

GYMNASTIC CONTESTS

=860.= These exercises are those in which the benefits are lost sight

of in the pleasure their attainment provides, which in the case of

these contests is the vanquishing of an opponent. The men are pitted

against each other in pairs; age, height, weight, and general physical

aptitude being the determining factors in the selection.

In the contests in which superiority is dependent upon skill and

agility no restrictions need be placed upon the efforts of the

contestants; but in those that are a test of strength and endurance it

is well to call a contest a "draw," when the men are equally matched

and the contest is likely to be drawn out to the point of exhaustion

of one or both contestants.

It is recommended that these contests be indulged in once or twice a

month and then at the conclusion of the regular drill.

Contests that require skill and agility should alternate with those

that depend upon force and endurance. In order to facilitate the

instruction a number of pairs should be engaged at the same time.

1. Cane wrestling: The cane to be about an inch in diameter and a yard

long, ends rounded. It is grasped with the right hand at the end,

knuckles down, and with the left hand, knuckles up, inside of and

close to the opponent's right hand. Endeavor is then made to wrest the

cane from the opponent. Loss of grip with either hand loses the bout.

2. Cane twisting. Same cane as in 1. Contestants grasp it as in 1,

only the knuckles of both hands are up, and the arms are extended

overhead. Object: The contestants endeavor to make the cane revolve in

their opponent's hand without allowing it to do so in their own. The

cane must be forced down.

3. Cane pulling: Contestants sit on the ground, facing each other,

legs straight and the soles of the feet in contact. The cane is

grasped as in 2 but close to the feet. Object: To pull the opponent to

his feet. The legs throughout the contest must be kept rigid.

4. "Bucked" contest: Contestants sit on the ground "bucked"; i. e.,

the cane is passed under the knees, which are drawn up, and the arms

passed under the cane with the fingers laced in front of the ankles.

Object: To get the toes under those of the opponent and roll him over.

5. Single pole pushing: Contestants grasp end of pole, 6 feet long and

2 inches thick, and brace themselves. Object: To push the opponent out

of position.

6. Double pole pushing: The poles are placed under the arms close to

the arm pits, ends projecting. Object: Same as in 5.

7. Double pole pulling: Position as in 6 but standing back to back.

Object: To pull the opponent out of position.

8. "Cock fight": Contestants hop on one leg with the arms folded

closely over the chest. Object: by butting with the fleshy part of the

shoulder without raising the arms, or by dodging to make the opponent

change his feet or touch the floor with his hand or other part of his

body.

9. One-legged tug of war: Contestants hop on one leg and grasp hands

firmly. Object: To pull the opponent forward or make him place the

raised foot on the floor.

10. The "siege": One contestant stands with one foot in a circle 14

inches in diameter, the other foot outside, and the arms folded as in

8. Two other contestants, each hopping on one leg, endeavor to

dislodge the one in the circle by butting him with the shoulder. The

besieged one is defeated in case he raises the foot in the circle, or

removes it entirely from the circle. The besiegers are defeated in

case they change feet or touch the floor as in 8. As soon as either of

the latter is defeated his place is immediately filled, so that there

are always two of them. The besieged should resort to volting,

ducking, etc., rather than to depend upon his strength.

11. One-armed tug: Contestants stand facing each other; right hands

grasped, feet apart. Object: Without moving feet, to pull the opponent

forward. Shifting the feet loses the bout.

12. "Tug royal": Three contestants stand facing inward and grasp each

other's wrists securely with their feet outside a circle about three

feet in diameter. Object: by pulling or pushing to make one of the

contestants step inside of the circle.

13. Indian wrestling: Contestants lie upon the ground face up, right

shoulders in close contact, right elbows locked; at one the right leg

is raised overhead and lowered, this is repeated at two, and at three

the leg is raised quickly and locked with the opponent's right leg.

Object: to roll him over by forcing his leg down.

14. Medicine ball race. Teams of five or six men are organized and a

track for each team is marked out. This track consists of marks on the

floor or ground at distances of 4 yards. On each of these marks stands

a man with legs apart, the team forming a column of files. At "ready,"

"get set," the contestants prepare for the race, and at "go," the

first man in the column rolls a medicine ball, which he has on the

floor in front of him, through his legs to No. 2, he in turn rolls it

to 3, etc., when it reaches the last man he picks it up and runs to

the starting place with it and, the others all having shifted back one

mark, the rolling is repeated. This continues until the first man

brings the ball back to the starting place and every man is in his

original position. The ball should be kept rolling: each man, as it

comes to him, pushing it on quickly. Any ball about 9 inches in

diameter will answer; it may be made of strong cloth and stuffed with

cotton waste.

CHAPTER IV

SIGNALING

Signals and Codes

_General Service Code. (International Morse Code.)_

=861.= Used for all visual and sound signaling, radiotelegraphy, and

on cables using siphon recorders, used in communicating with Navy.

A . -

B - . . .

C - . - .

D - . .

E .

F . . - .

G - - .

H . . . .

I . .

J . - - -

K - . -

L . - . .

M - -

N - .

O - - -

P . - - .

Q - - . -

R . - .

S . . .

T -

U . . -

V . . . -

W . - -

X - . . -

Y - . - -

Z - - . .

NUMERALS

1 . - - - -

2 . . - - -

3 . . . - -

4 . . . . -

5 . . . . .

6 - . . . .

7 - - . . .

8 - - - . .

9 - - - - .

0 - - - - -

PUNCTUATION

Period . . . . . .

Comma . - . - . - .

Interrogation . . - - . .

THE MORE IMPORTANT CONVENTIONAL FLAG SIGNALS

For communication between the firing line and the reserve or commander

in rear. In transmission, their concealment from the enemy's view

should be insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or

other substitute may be used.

(See par. 96 for the signals.)

Wigwag

_Signaling by flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight

(without shutter)_[6]

=862.= 1. There is one position and there are three motions. The position is

with flag or other appliance held vertically, the signalman facing

directly toward the station with which it is desired to communicate.

The first motion (the dot) is to the right of the sender, and will

embrace an arc of 90 deg., starting with the vertical and returning to it,

and will be made in a plane at right angles to the line connecting

the two stations. The second motion (the dash) is a similar motion to

the left of the sender. The third motion (front) is downward directly

in front of the sender and instantly returned upward to the first

position. This is used to indicate a pause or conclusion.

2. The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the

shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling,

when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the

flag or torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of

the beam 90 deg. to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar

movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically

for front.

3. To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed as a

point of reference to the motion. The lantern is more conveniently

swung out upward to the right of the footlight for a dot, to the left

for a dash, and raised vertically for front.

4. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at

intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the

call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In

using the searchlight without shutter throw the beam in a vertical

position and move it through an arc of 180 deg. in a plane at right angles

to the line connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To

acknowledge a call, signal "Acknowledgment (or) I understand

(----front)" followed by the call letter of the acknowledging station.

_Notes on Wig-wagging_

5. In order to avoid the flag wrapping itself about the staff, stand

facing the receiving station, with feet apart. Hold the staff with the

left hand at butt and right hand 24 inches from end. In moving flag to

the right, bring it down with an outward and inward sweep, and then

return it to the vertical. When the tip is farthest down the staff

inclines to the right front and as the flag is brought upward it is

swept inward and upwards and as it approaches the vertical position it

sweeps forward slightly. In moving to the left the motion is

similar,--at the lowest point the staff inclines to the left front. A

combination of right and left is made with a figure-of-eight motion.

In making "front" the flag is lowered and moved very slightly to the

left front and then swept slightly to the right front, making a

figure-of-eight.

The body should be twisted and bent at the waist in making the light

and left motions.

Care should be exercised in keeping the flag in front of the body in

making "front," the figure-of-eight is necessarily very flat.

Do not make letters in a careless slipshod manner.

The Two-arm Semaphore Code

(See Plates I and II)

=863.= Semaphore signaling may be done with or without flags. Without

flags it is rarely dependable beyond 600 yards.

In sending stand with feet apart, squarely facing the receiver.

In making letters which require the use of both arms on the same side

of body, twist the body to that side and bend at waist, so as to

throw both arms well away from body. But be careful to keep arms in

plane of original position of body.

When a letter repeats--bring both hands (if a two-armed letter) to

chest after first, then make second.

Do not try to send rapidly so as to exhibit your ability. Remember

that the receiver's ability determines the speed to be used. Anyone

can send faster than he himself can receive. If you want to display

your skill have some one send rapidly to you.

In receiving, if you miss a letter--let it go and get the others. If

you miss a word signal--"O" (waving flags or arms) and signal the last

word you have received.

_Rapidity_ is secondary to _accuracy_.

Take the positions for the various letters _accurately_. The

horizontal position should not incline upward nor downward. In making

an "L," for example, if the left arm is midway between its proper

position and the horizontal it is difficult to tell whether it is L or

In making D, J, K, P, T, and V, the arm in the vertical position

should be brought exactly in front of the body by carrying the

shoulder in almost under the chin, twisting the elbow in until it is

directly before the eyes, and the forearm held in the vertical

position with the palm to the rear. When so done there is no

possibility of this position being mistaken for any other.

"Manila Milkman" may be sent without changing the position of the

right hand. In making I, be sure to twist body well to the right in

order that the left arm may be seen in the upper slanting position to

the right. City and similar words may be so made.

D may be made with either hand.

Be sure how next letter is made before moving hands. Make no false

motions.

Acquire accuracy; then try for speed.

"CHOP-CHOP." The "chop-chop" signal is made by placing _both_ arms at

the right horizontal (that is, by bringing the _left_ arm up to the

position of the _right_ arm as in the figure for letter "B"), and then

moving each up and down, several times, in opposite direction, making

a cutting motion.

END OF WORD. After each word the "Interval" signal is made.

END OF SENTENCE. After each sentence the chop signal is made twice.

END OF MESSAGE. At the end of a message the chop signal is made three

times.

ERROR. Signal "A" several times quickly, followed by interval; then

repeat the word.

TO BREAK IN. Signal "Attention."

NUMERALS. Numbers are always preceded by the signal, "Numerals." After

"Numerals" has been signaled, everything that follows will be numbers

until "Interval" is signaled, after which what follows will be

letters.

[Illustration: The Two-arm Semaphore Code

Plate I]

[Illustration: The Two-arm Semaphore Code

Plate II]

_Signaling with heliograph, flash lantern, and searchlight (with

shutter)_[7]

=864.= 1. The first position is to turn a steady flash on the

receiving station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use

a short flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements

of a letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals.

2. To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at

intervals the call or signal of the calling station.

3. If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal a series of dots

rapidly made until acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a

steady flash and adjust. When the adjustment is satisfactory to the

called station, it will cut off its flash, and the calling station

will proceed with its message.

4. If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror needs adjustment, he

will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady flash. When the

adjustment is satisfactory, the receiver will cut off his flash and

the sender will resume his message.

5. To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a steady

flash.

_Sound Signals_[7]

=865.= 1. Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet,

and drum may be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. They

may be used with the dot and dash code.

2. In applying the code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or trumpet, one

short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash. With the drum,

one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid succession a dash.

Although these signals can be used with a dot and dash code, they

should be so used in connection with a preconcerted or conventional

code.

_Morse Code. (American Morse Code)_[7]

=866.= Used only by the army on telegraph lines, on short cables, and

on field lines, and on all commercial lines in the United States.

A . -

B - . . .

C . . .

D - . .

E .

F . - .

G - - .

H . . . .

I . .

J - . - .

K - . -

L --

M - -

N - .

O . .

P . . . . .

Q . . - .

R . . .

S . . .

T -

U . . -

V . . . -

W . - -

X . - . .

Y . . . .

Z . . . .

& . . . .

NUMERALS

1 . - - .

2 . . - . .

3 . . . - .

4 . . . . -

5 - - -

6 . . . . . .

7 - - . .

8 - . . . .

9 - . . -

0 ---

PUNCTUATION

Period . . - - . .

Comma . - . -

Interrogation - . . - .

FOOTNOTES:

[6] Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army.

[7] Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army.

PART II

COMPANY COMMAND

CHAPTER I

THE GOVERNMENT AND ADMINISTRATION OF A COMPANY

=867. The proper performance of the duty of COMPANY COMMANDER, like

the proper performance of any other duty, requires work and attention

to business.=

The command of a company divides itself into two kinds of duty:

government and administration.

The government includes the instruction, discipline, contentment, and

harmony of the organization, involving, as it does, esprit de corps,

rewards, privileges, and punishments.

The administration includes the providing of clothing, arms,

ammunition, equipage, and subsistence; the keeping of records,

including the rendition of reports and returns; and the care and

accountability of Government and company property, and the

disbursement of the company fund.

System and care are prerequisites of good administration.

The efficient administration of a company greatly facilitates its

government.

THE CAPTAIN

=868.= With regard to his company the captain stands in the same light

as a father to a large family of children. It is his duty to provide

for their comfort, sustenance, and pleasure; enforce strict rules of

obedience, punish the refractory and reward the deserving.

He should be considerate and just to his officers and men and should

know every soldier personally and make him feel that he so knows him.

He should by word and act make every man in the company feel that the

captain is his protector.

The captain should not be indifferent to the personal welfare of his

men, and when solicited, being a man of greater experience, education,

and information, he should aid and counsel them in such a way as to

show he takes an interest in their joys and sorrows.

When any men are sick he should do everything possible for them until

they can be taken care of by the surgeon. He can add much to the

comfort and pleasure of men in the hospital by visiting them from time

to time and otherwise showing an interest in their condition.

In fact, one of the officer's most important duties is to look after

the welfare of his men--to see that they are well fed, well clothed

and properly cared for in every other way--to see that they are happy

and contented. The officer who does not look after the welfare of his

men to the best of his ability, giving the matter his earnest personal

attention, neglects one of the principal things that the Government

pays him to do.

The soldier usually has a decided feeling for his captain, even though

it be one of hatred. With regard to the higher grade of officers, he

has respect for them according to regulations; otherwise, for the most

part, he is indifferent. At the very most, he knows whether his post

or regimental commander keeps him long at drill, and particularly

whether he has any peculiar habits. The average soldier looks upon his

captain as by far the most important personage in the command.

There is no other position in the Army that will give as much

satisfaction in return for an honest, capable and conscientious

discharge of duty, as that of captain. There is a reward in having

done his full duty to his company that no disappointment of

distinction, no failure, can deprive him of; his seniors may overlook

him in giving credits, unfortunate circumstances may defeat his

fondest hopes, and the crown of laurel may never rest upon his brow,

but the reward that follows upon the faithful discharge of his duty to

his company he can not be deprived of by any disaster, neglect or

injustice.

He is a small sovereign, powerful and great, within his little domain.

=869. Devolution of Work and Responsibility.= The company commander

should not attempt to do all the work--to look after all the details

in person--he should not try to command directly every squad and every

platoon. The successful company commander is the one who distributes

work among his subordinates and organizes the help they are supposed

to give him. By War Department orders, Army Regulations and customs of

the service, the lieutenants and noncommissioned officers are charged

with certain duties and responsibilities. Let every one of them carry

the full load of their responsibility. The company commander should

not usurp the functions of his subordinates--he should not relieve

them of any of their prescribed or logical work and responsibility. On

the contrary, he should give them more, and he should see that they

"deliver the goods." Skill in distributing work among subordinates is

one of the first essentials of leadership, as is the ability to get

work out of them so that they will fill their functions to the full

within the limits of their responsibility. Not only does devolution of

work and responsibility cause subordinates to take more interest in

their work (it makes them feel less like mere figure-heads), but it

also teaches them initiative and gives them valuable experience in the

art of training and handling men. Furthermore, it enables the company

commander to devote more time to the larger and more important matters

connected with the discipline, welfare, training, instruction and

administration of the company.

The captain who allows his lieutenants to do practically nothing makes

a mistake--he is doing something that will rob his lieutenants of all

initiative, cause them to lose interest in the company, and make them

feel like nonentities--like a kind of "fifth wheel"--it will make them

feel they are not, in reality, a part of the company--it will prevent

them from getting a practical, working knowledge of the government and

administration of a company.

By allowing his lieutenants to participate to the greatest extent

possible in the government and administration of the company, and by

not hampering and pestering them with unnecessary instructions about

details, the captain will get out of his lieutenants the very best

that there is in them.

The captain should require RESULTS from his lieutenants, and the mere

fact that a lieutenant is considered inefficient and unable to do

things properly, is no reason why he should not be required to do

them. The captain is by Army Regulations responsible for the

efficiency and instruction of his lieutenants regarding all matters

pertaining to the company, and he should require them to perform all

their duties properly, resorting to such disciplinary measures as may

be considered necessary. The lieutenant who can not, or who will not,

perform his duties properly is a drag on the company, and such a man

has no business in the Army, or in the Organized Militia.

THE LIEUTENANT

=870.= To be able to perform well the duties of captain when the

responsibility falls upon him, should be the constant study and

ambition of the lieutenant.

He is the assistant of the captain and should be required by the

captain to assist in the performance of all company duties, including

the keeping of records and the preparation of the necessary reports,

returns, estimates and requisitions. The captain should give him lots

to do, and should throw him on his own responsibility just as much as

possible. He should be required to drill the company, attend the daily

inspection of the company quarters, instruct the noncommissioned

officers, brief communications, enter letters in the Correspondence

Book, make out ration returns, reports, muster and pay rolls, etc.,

until he shows perfect familiarity therewith.

Whenever told to do a thing by your captain, do it yourself or see

personally that it is done. Do not turn it over to some

noncommissioned officer and let it go at that. If your captain wants

some noncommissioned officer to do the thing, he himself will tell him

to do it--he will not ask you to do it.

It is customary in the Army to regard the company as the property of

the captain. Should the lieutenant, therefore, be in temporary command

of the company he should not make any changes, especially in the

reduction or promotion of noncommissioned officers without first

having consulted the captain's wishes in the matter.

It is somewhat difficult to explain definitely the authority a

lieutenant exercises over the men in the company when the captain is

present. In general terms, however, it may be stated the lieutenant

can not make any changes around the barracks, inflict any punishment

or put men on, or relieve them from, any duty without the consent of

the captain. It is always better if there be a definite understanding

between the captain and his lieutenants as to what he expects of them,

how he wishes to have certain things done and to what extent he will

sustain them.

If the lieutenant wants anything from the company in the way of

working parties, the services of the company artificer or company

clerk, the use of ordnance stores or quartermaster articles, he should

always speak to the captain about the matter.

THE CAPTAIN AND THE LIEUTENANTS

=871.= The company officers should set an example to their men in

dress, military bearing, system, punctuality and other soldierly

qualities. It should be remembered that the negligence of superiors is

the cue for juniors to be negligent.

If the men of a company are careless and indifferent about saluting

and if they are shabby and lax in their dress, the company commander

is to blame for it--company officers can always correct defects of

this kind, if they will only try.

The character and efficiency of officers and the manner in which they

perform their duties are reflected in the conduct and deportment of

their men.

Of course, courage is a prerequisite quality for a good officer, and

every officer should seek to impress his men that he would direct them

to do nothing involving danger that he would not himself be willing to

do under similar circumstances.

If a company officer be ignorant of his duties, his men will soon find

it out, and when they do they will have neither respect for, nor

confidence in, him.

Company officers should take an active interest in everything that

affects the amusement, recreation, happiness and welfare of their men.

An officer just joining a company should learn without delay the names

of all the men. A roll of the organization should be gotten and

studied.

While an officer can gruffly order a soldier to do a thing and have

his orders obeyed, it should be remembered that, as a rule, human

nature, especially American human nature, responds best to an appeal

to pride, fairness, justice, reason, and the other nobler instincts of

man. It is only in rare instances that the average man will give the

best there is in him under coercion or pressure of authority.

There are but few men who have not some good in them, and this good

can generally be gotten at, if one only goes about it in the right

way. Study your men and try to arouse in them pride and interest in

their work.

The soldier first learns to respect, then to honor and finally to love

the officer who is strict but just; firm but kind--and this is the

officer who will draw out of his men the very best there is in them.

=872.= Treat your men like men, and remember there is nothing that

will so completely take the spirit out of a man as to find fault with

him when he is doing his best.

Young officers sometimes run to one of two extremes in the treatment

of their men--they either, by undue familiarity, or otherwise,

cultivate popularity with the men; or they do not treat them with

sufficient consideration--the former course will forfeit their esteem;

the latter, ensure their dislike, neither of which result is

conducive to commanding their respect.

Treat your soldiers with proper consideration, dignity, and

justice--remember they are members of your profession, the difference

being one of education, rank, command, and pay--but they are men, like

yourself, and should be treated as such.

Under no circumstances should you ever swear at a soldier--not only is

this taking a mean, unfair advantage of your position, but it is also

undignified, ungentlemanly, and unmilitary. It is even more improper

for you to swear at a soldier than it is for a superior to swear at

you--in the latter case the insult can be properly resented; in the

former, it must be borne in humiliating silence.

Remember, that if by harsh or unfair treatment you destroy a man's

self-respect, you at the same time destroy his usefulness.

Familiarity is, of course, most subversive of discipline, but you can

treat your men with sympathetic consideration without being familiar

with them.

In dealing with enlisted men, do not use the same standard of

intellect and morals that apply in the case of officers. And remember,

too, that a thing that may appear small and trivial to an officer may

mean a great deal to an enlisted man--study your men, learn their

desires, their habits, their way of thinking, and then in your

dealings with them try to look at things from their standpoint also.

In other words in your treatment of your men be just as human as

possible.

The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and under no

circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused.

Reproof and punishment must be administered with discretion and

judgment, and without passion; for the officer who loses his temper

and flies into a tantrum has failed to obtain his first triumph in

discipline. He who can not control himself can not control others.

Every officer should study himself carefully, he should analyze

himself, he should place himself under a microscopic glass, so as to

discover his weak points--and he should then try with his whole might

and soul to make these weak points strong points. If, for instance,

you realize that you are weak in applied minor tactics, or that you

have no "bump of locality," or that you have a poor memory, or that

you have a weak will, do what you can to correct these defects in your

make-up. Remember "Stonewall" Jackson's motto: "A man can do anything

he makes up his mind to do."

The Progress Company, Chicago, Ill., publishes "Mind Power," "Memory,"

"The Will," "The Art of Logical Thinking" (all by W. W. Atkinson), and

several other books of a similar nature, that are both interesting and

instructive. "The Power of the Will," by Haddock, for sale by Albert

Lewis Pelton, Meriden, Conn., is an excellent book of its kind.

THE FIRST SERGEANT

=873.= It has been said the captain is the proprietor of the company

and the first sergeant is the foreman.

Under supervision of the captain, he has immediate charge of all

routine matters pertaining to the company.

In some companies in the Regular Army, it is customary for soldiers,

except in cases of emergency, to get permission from the first

sergeant to speak to the company commander at any time. In other

organizations soldiers who wish to speak to the company commander away

from the company quarters must first obtain the first sergeant's

permission, but it is not necessary to get this permission to speak to

the company commander when he is at the barracks.

The first sergeant is sometimes authorized to place noncommissioned

officers in arrest in quarters and privates in confinement in the

guardhouse, assuming such action to be by order of the captain, to

whom he at once reports the facts. However, with regard to the

confinement of soldiers by noncommissioned officers, attention is

invited to the Army Regulations on the subject.

THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS

=(The status, duties, etc., of noncommissioned officers are covered in

greater detail in Noncommissioned Officers' Manual, by the author.

General agents: George Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.)=

=874.= The efficiency and discipline of a company depend to such an

extent on the noncommissioned officers that the greatest care and

judgment should be exercised in their selection. They should be men

possessing such soldierly qualities as a high sense of duty, cheerful

obedience to orders, force of character, honesty, sobriety and

steadiness, together with an intelligent knowledge of drills,

regulations, and orders.

They should exact prompt obedience from those to whom they give

orders, and should see that all soldiers under them perform their

military duties properly. They must not hesitate to reprove them when

necessary, but such reproof must not be any more severe than the

occasion demands.

The company officers must sustain the noncommissioned officers in the

exercise of their authority, except, of course, when such authority is

improperly or unjustly exercised. If they do wrong, they should be

punished the same as the privates, but if it be simply an error of

judgment they should merely be admonished. A noncommissioned officer

should never be admonished in the presence of privates.

Judicious praising of noncommissioned officers in the presence of

privates is not only gratifying to the noncommissioned officer, but it

also tends to enhance the respect and esteem of the privates for him.

In addition to dividing the company into squads, each squad being

under a noncommissioned officer as required by the Army Regulations,

the company should also be divided into sections, each section being

in charge of a sergeant. The squads and sections should, as far as

possible, be quartered together in barracks, and the chiefs of squads

and the chiefs of sections should be held strictly responsible for the

conduct, dress, cleanliness, and the care of arms of the members of

their respective squads and sections. Not only does this throw the

corporals and the sergeants upon their own responsibility to a certain

extent, but it also impresses upon them the importance of their

position, and gets the privates in the habit of realizing and

appreciating the authority exercised by noncommissioned officers.

When practicable, the noncommissioned officers should have separate

rooms or tents, and should mess together at tables separate from the

privates; for, everything that conduces to familiarity with inferiors

tends to lower the dignity of the noncommissioned officers' position.

Throw your noncommissioned officers upon their own

responsibility--throw them into deep water, so to speak, where they

will either have to swim or sink. You can never tell what a man can

really do until you have given him a chance to show you--until you

have put him on his mettle--until you have tried him out. And very

often men who seem to have nothing in them, men who have never before

been thrown upon their own responsibility, will surprise you.

Do all you can to make your noncommissioned officers realize and

appreciate the importance of their position. Consult them about

different matters--get their opinions about various things. When going

through the barracks at Saturday morning inspection, for instance, as

you come to the different squads, have the squad leaders step to the

front and follow you while you are inspecting their respective squads.

If you find anything wrong with a man's bunk, speak to the squad

leader about it. Also ask the squad leaders various questions about

their squads.

Not only does such treatment of noncommissioned officers make them

appreciate the importance, responsibility and dignity of their

position, but it also gives them more confidence in themselves and

raises them in the eyes of the privates.

Noncommissioned officers should always be addressed by their titles,

by both officers and soldiers.

Noncommissioned officers are forbidden by regulations to act as

barbers, or as agents for laundries, or in any other position of a

similar character.

Everything possible should be done by the company officers to instruct

the noncommissioned officers properly in their duties.[8]

So far as the company is concerned, the noncommissioned officers are

expected to assist the company commander in carrying out his own

orders and those of his superiors--they should see that all company

orders are obeyed and that the known wishes of the captain are carried

out. If, for instance, the captain should tell the first sergeant that

the men in the company may play cards among themselves, but that

noncommissioned officers are not to play with privates and that men

from other companies are not allowed to take part in, or to be present

at the games, then it is the duty of the first sergeant to see that

these instructions are carried out--it is his duty to make frequent

inspections of the tables at which the men may be playing to see that

no noncommissioned officers are playing and that no outsiders are

present. The first sergeant who confined himself to publishing the

order to the company and then doing nothing more, would be neglectful

of his proper duty.

Noncommissioned officers clothed in the proper uniform of their grade

are on duty at all times and places for the suppression of disorderly

conduct on the part of members of the company in public places. Men

creating disorder will be sent to their quarters in arrest and the

facts reported to the company commander without delay.

Noncommissioned officers can do much to prevent the commission of

offenses by members of their commands, both when on and when off duty,

and such prevention is as much their duty as reporting offenses after

they are committed; in fact, it is much better to prevent the offense

than to bring the offender to trial.

Company commanders should drill their noncommissioned officers

thoroughly in the principles of discipline.

=875. Noncommissioned Officers Authorized to Confine Enlisted Men.= A

company or detachment commander may delegate to his noncommissioned

officers the authority to confine enlisted men in the guardhouse and

to place them in arrest in quarters, provided the case is immediately

reported to the company or detachment commander, who confirms the act

of the noncommissioned officer and adopts it as his own.--W. D.

decision, December, 1905.

=876. Reduction and Resignation.= A noncommissioned officer should

never be reduced to ranks, except for grave and sufficient reasons.

Nothing demoralizes the noncommissioned officers of a company so much

and upsets discipline to such an extent as the feeling that upon the

slightest pretext or fancy one is to be sent back to the ranks, to

associate with the privates he has been required to discipline.

In some regiments noncommissioned officers are permitted to send in

formal resignations, while in other regiments they are not, but, with

the approval of the company commander, they may ask for reduction,

giving proper, satisfactory and specific reasons. Of course,

resignations submitted in a spirit of accepted insubordination or

pique should not be considered, nor should they ever be in

substitution for deserved disciplinary punishment. If a

noncommissioned officer has good reasons for requesting reduction and

the granting of the request would not result in detriment to the

company, there is no reason why his application should not be

favorably considered. However, in such a case, the noncommissioned

officer should consult his company commander before submitting his

request in writing. It is thought the preponderance of custom is

against considering formal resignations.

Contentment and Harmony

=877.= The officers of the company should do everything possible to

make the organization contented and harmonious. Contentment and

harmony are not only conducive to good discipline and efficiency, but

they also make the government of the company easy and reduce

desertions to a minimum.

The showing of favoritism on the part of the captain is always a cause

of great dissatisfaction amongst the soldiers in the company. Soldiers

do not care how strict the captain is, just so he is fair and

impartial, treating all men alike.

=878. The Mess.= The captain should give the mess his constant

personal attention, making frequent visits to the kitchen and

dining-room while the soldiers are at meals so as to see for himself

what they are getting, how it is served, etc.

It is not saying too much to state that, in time of peace, a good mess

is the real basis of the contentment of a company.

Ascertain what the soldiers like to eat and then gratify their

appetites as far as practicable.

Be careful that the cook or the mess sergeant doesn't fall into a rut

and satiate the soldiers day after day with the same dishes.

Give the ration your personal attention--know yourself what the

company is entitled to, how much it is actually getting, what the

savings amount to, etc.

=879. Library and Amusement Room.= A library and an amusement room,

supplied with good books, magazines, papers, a billiard or pool table,

and a phonograph, are a source of much pleasure and contentment.

=880. Athletic Apparatus.= A judicious investment of the company fund

in baseballs, bats, dumb bells, Indian clubs, boxing gloves and other

athletic goods, and the encouragement of baseball, basketball, quoits,

etc., are in the interest of harmony and happiness.

Rewards and Privileges

=881.= 1. Deny all passes and requests for privileges of men whose

conduct is not good, and on the other hand grant to men whose conduct

is good, as many indulgences as is consistent with discipline.

2. Judicious praise in the presence of the first sergeant, a few

noncommissioned officers, or the entire company, depending upon

circumstances, very often accomplishes a great deal. After the

according of such praise, let your action toward the man show that his

good conduct is appreciated and that it has raised him in your

estimation, and make him feel you are keeping your eye on him to see

whether he will continue in his well doing.

3. Publication of commendatory orders, desirable special duty details,

etc.

4. Promotion, and extra duty details which carry extra pay.

5. Meritorious conduct of importance should be noted in the soldier's

military record and also on his discharge.

6. At the weekly company inspection, each chief of squad picks out the

neatest and cleanest man in his squad--the captain then inspects the

men so selected, the neatest and cleanest one being excused from one

or two tours of kitchen police, or some other disagreeable duty; or

given a two days' pass.

NOTE: Some officers do not think that good conduct should be

especially rewarded, but that if all soldiers be held strictly

accountable for their actions by a system of strict discipline,

good conduct attains its own reward in the immunities it enjoys.

=882. Company punishment.= It is neither necessary nor desirable to

bring every dereliction of duty before a court-martial for trial. In

fact, the invariable preferring of charges for minor[9] offenses will,

as a rule, injure rather than help the discipline of a command. The

104th Article of War states, "The commanding officer of any

detachment, company, or higher command may, for minor offenses not

denied by the accused, impose disciplinary punishments upon persons of

his command without the intervention of a court-martial, unless the

accused demands trial by court-martial." The disciplinary punishments

authorized may include admonition, reprimand, withholding of

privileges, extra fatigue, and restriction to certain specified

limits, but shall not include forfeiture of pay or confinement under

guard. (Par. 333, Manual for Courts-Martial.)

Some Efficacious Forms of Company Punishment

=883.= 1. Extra fatigue under the Company Supply Sergeant or the

noncommissioned officer in charge of quarters, cleaning up around and

in the company quarters, scrubbing pots, scouring tin pans, polishing

stoves, cutting wood, policing the rears, cutting grass, pulling

weeds, polishing the brass and nickel parts in the water closets and

bath rooms, washing and greasing leather, cleaning guns, boiling

greasy haversacks, and in camp, digging drains and working around slop

holes.

If the work be done well the offender may be let off sooner--if the

work be not done well, he may be tried for it.

2. Men may not be allowed to leave the immediate vicinity of the

barracks for periods ranging from one to ten days, during which time

they are subject to all kinds of disagreeable fatigue, and required to

report to the N. C. O. in charge of quarters at stated hours.

3. Breaking rocks for a given number of days. For every man so

punished, a private of the same company is detailed as a sentinel and

for every four men a corporal is detailed in addition--the idea being

to cause every man in each organization to take an interest in

preventing his own comrades from violating rules and regulations.

4. When two soldiers get into a row that is not of a serious nature, a

good plan is to set them at work scrubbing the barrack windows--one on

the outside and one on the inside, making them clean the same pane at

the same time. They are thus constantly looking in each other's faces

and before the second window is cleaned they will probably be laughing

at each other and part friends rather than nursing their wrath.

5. Confinement to barracks, reporting to the noncommissioned officer

in charge of quarters once every hour, from reveille to, say, 9 P. M.

NOTE: Some company commanders follow, for moral effect, the

practice of publishing to their companies all summary court

convictions of soldiers belonging to the organization.

Withholding of Privileges

1. Withholding of passes and of credit at the post exchange.

2. Withholding of furloughs.

=884. Control of Drunken and Obscene Men.= In order to control drunken

and obscene men, they have been bucked and gagged until sufficiently

sober to regain self-control and quiet down. The use of a cold water

hose in such cases has been known to accomplish good results. Great

care and judgment, however, should be exercised and no more force used

than is absolutely necessary.

It may also be said that persistently filthy men have been washed and

scrubbed.

=885.= Saturday morning and other company inspections are intended to

show the condition of the organization regarding its equipment,

military appearance and general fitness for service, and the

condition of the quarters as regards cleanliness, order, etc. Usually

everyone except the guard, one cook, and others whose presence

elsewhere can not be spared, are required to attend inspections,

appearing in their best clothes, their arms and accouterments being

shipshape and spick and span in every respect.

A man appearing at inspection with arms and equipments not in proper

shape, especially if he be a recruit or if it be his first offense,

may be turned out again several hours later, fully armed and equipped,

for another inspection, instead of being tried by summary court.

Property Responsibility

=886.= Special attention should be given to the care and

accountability of all company property.

1. All property (tents, axes, spades, chairs, hatchets, etc.) should

be plainly marked with the letter of the company.

2. Keep a duplicate copy of every memorandum receipt given for

property, and when such property is turned in or another officer's

memorandum receipt is given covering the property, don't fail to get

your original memorandum from the quartermaster.

3. See that the quartermaster gives you credit for all articles turned

in, or property accounted for on statement of charges, proceedings of

a surveying officer or otherwise.

4. Have a settlement with the quartermaster at the end of every

quarter as required by Army Regulations, taking an inventory of all

property held on memorandum receipt and submitting to the

quartermaster a statement of charges and a certified list of the china

and glassware unavoidably broken during the quarter.

5. Keep an account of all articles issued to the men, turned in to the

quartermaster, condemned, expended, lost, stolen or destroyed.

6. Worn out and unserviceable, property that is beyond repair in the

company should be submitted to the action of a surveying officer, the

Survey Reports (Form No. 196, A. G. O.) being prepared in triplicate,

and submitted to the commanding officer, who will appoint a surveying

officer. No property that can be repaired in the company should ever

be submitted to the action of a surveying officer or inspector. In

this connection company commanders and supply sergeants should be

thoroughly familiar with Ordnance Department pamphlet No. 1965 and G.

O. 26, 1917, the two covering the care, repair and disposition of

unserviceable Ordnance equipment.

7. Property that is to be submitted to the action of a surveying

officer or an inspector should always first be carefully examined by

the responsible officer in person, who should be prepared to give all

necessary information in regard to it.

The property should be arranged in the order of enumeration in the

survey or the inventory report, and should be arranged in rows of

five, ten, or some other number, so that the numbers of the various

articles can be counted at a glance.

The Army Regulations require that the responsible officer shall be

present at the inspection of property by a regular inspector. He

should also be present when property is acted on by a surveying

officer.

8. All company property (Ordnance, Quartermaster, Signal and Engineer)

except the litter (Medical Department) is gotten from the unit supply

officer on memorandum receipt. The litter is gotten from the surgeon

on memorandum receipt. Settlements are required to be made quarterly

with the officers concerned, and also when relinquishing command.

Company Paperwork

=887. Scope of subject.= To cover in full the subject of company

paperwork would require more space than it is practicable to spare in

a manual of this nature, and consequently only brief reference is made

herein to the principal books, records and papers connected with the

administration of a company.

The subject of company paperwork, as well as Army administration in

general, is covered in full in _Army Paperwork_, published by Geo.

Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis. Price $2.00, postpaid.

In connection with company paperwork, it may be remarked that

now-a-days no company office is complete without a typewriter. For

all-around field and garrison work the CORONA, which is used

throughout the Army, is recommended. Not only is it less bulky and

lighter than other machines, but it is simpler of construction and

will stand harder usage. The Corona Folding Stand adds very much to

the convenience of the machine for field use.

=888. Morning Report.= Which shows, at the hour the report is

submitted, the exact condition of the company as to the number of

officers and men present for duty, sick, absent, etc. All changes

since the last report (the day before) are shown by name, under

"Remarks," on the right-hand page, and by number on the left-hand

page. In case of no change since last report, note, "No change,"

under, "Remarks," and also on the left-hand page. (See model given

below.)

[Illustration: Fig. 1]

[Illustration: Fig. 2]

NOTE. The numbers 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, etc., entered by hand on the left in

model, and which show the number of days from each printed number

(date) to the end of the month, are entered the beginning of each

month, and are a convenience in showing at once the number of rations

to be added or deducted in the case of men joining or leaving the

company.

=889. Daily Sick Report.= On which are entered the names of all

enlisted men requiring medical attention and such of the company

officers as may be excused from duty because of illness. The report is

signed each day by the surgeon and the company commander, and shows

whether or not the sickness was incurred in line of duty.

[Illustration: Fig. 3]

=890. Duty Roster.= On which is kept a record of all details for guard

duty, kitchen police, and other details for service in garrison and in

the field, except the authorized special and extra duty details. For

instructions regarding the keeping of roster, see, "Details and

Rosters," Manual of Interior Guard Duty and the Model and instructions

on the form itself.

=891. Files of Orders.= A file will be kept of all orders issued by

the company commander. Files will also be kept of all orders and

instructions received from higher authority.

=892. Company Fund Book.= In which are entered all receipts to, and

expenditures from, the company fund, together with the monthly

proceeding of the Company Council of Administration, and a list of

property, with cost thereof, purchased from the company fund. The

model in the front of the book shows how the account is to be kept.

=893. Correspondence Book, with index.= In which is entered a brief of

each item of correspondence in respect to which a record is necessary,

and a notation of the action taken thereon.

=894. Document File=, being the original documents or communications

when these are retained, and carbon, letter press, or other copies of

letters, indorsements, or telegrams sent in regard to the same, all of

which are filed according to serial numbers.

=895. Delinquency Record=, in which are noted the disciplinary

punishments awarded by the company commander in compliance with the

provisions of Army Regulations.

=896. Property Responsibility.= Two loose-leaf books in which are

listed, in one all articles of quartermaster property, and in the

other, all articles of ordnance property, issued each soldier for his

personal use.

=897. Service Record.= (Formerly known as "Descriptive List.") One for

each member of the company, in which is kept a full description of

him, including date of enlistment, personnel description, record of

deposits, trial by court-martial, record of vaccination, clothing

account, etc.

=898. Descriptive Card of Public Animals.= To be kept in organizations

supplied with public animals.

=899. Retained Copies of Rolls, Returns, etc.= Retained copies of the

various rolls, reports, and returns (property and other) that are

required by orders and regulations.

=900. Memorandum Receipts=, showing all articles of ordnance

quartermaster, and other property that may be held on memorandum

receipt, with date of receipt, from whom received, etc. The company

commander has a quarterly settlement with the staff officers

concerned.

=901. Abstract Record of Memorandum Receipts.= For keeping a record of

property issued on memorandum receipt, in connection with the unit

accountability equipment.

=902. Record of Rifles=, showing the number of the rifle, the Arsenal

where made, date of receipt, to whom issued, and number of shots fired

each target season. (Note. Geo. Banta Publishing Co., Menasha, Wis.,

print an excellent card for this purpose.)

=903. Summary Court Records.= Commanding officers are required to

furnish organization commanders with true copies of all summary court

records relating to men of their organizations, which papers form a

part of the records of the organization.

=904. Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted Men.= When clothing is

drawn individually from the quartermaster, the Individual Clothing

Slips are entered on the Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted

Men, which is filed with the requisition to which it pertains.

=905. Abstract of Clothing.= All individual clothing slips are entered

on this abstract as the issues are made, the total quantities and

money values being determined and the abstract completed at the end of

month or when the organization leaves the vicinity of the issuing

quartermaster for an extended period. At the close of period covered,

the organization commander compares his copy of the abstract with the

quartermaster's copy, and it is then filed with the Individual

Clothing Slips and Statement of Clothing Charged to Enlisted men.

=906. Record of Size of Clothing.= A record of the sizes of clothing

of every man in the company as ascertained by measurement.

=907. Company Target Records.= An individual record is kept for each

man of the company and for every officer firing, on which are entered

the record rifle practice and the qualification for each target

season. A similar record is kept in the case of those required to fire

with the pistol. Records are also kept of the company combat firing

and the proficiency test, and of the combat practice. The combat

practice records are kept until the close of the following target

season, when they may be destroyed.

=908. Company Return.= On the first day of each month a Company Return

for the preceding month is submitted to regimental headquarters. The

return gives by name all changes since rendition of last return in the

case of officers, and by number all changes in the case of enlisted

men, and shows the condition of the company at midnight of the last

day of the month for which rendered. All officers, present and absent,

are accounted for by name, and under "Record of Events," is given a

brief statement of the duties performed by the company during the

month, including marches made, actions in which engaged, etc. See next

page for a "Model" Company Return.

[Illustration: Fig. 4]

[Illustration: Fig. 5]

=909. Ration return.= In addition to rations, on this form are

obtained soap, candles, matches, toilet paper, rock salt, vinegar for

animals, flour for paste in target practice, towels, and ice, the

allowances of which are prescribed in the Army Regulations.

The best way to show how a ration return is prepared is to give a

"model" and then explain how the figures thereon were obtained.

The figures in the above "model" were obtained as follows:

(a) The enlisted strength of Co. "H," 50th Inf., present

and absent according to the morning report of Feb. 29/16,

was 97

(b) Deduct from the above the number of men absent

according to the morning report of Feb. 29/16, and for

whom rations will not, therefore, be drawn for any part

or for the whole of the month of March, the number of men

absent being (assumed) as follows:

On furlough 3

On detached service 2

Absent sick 2

Absent in confinement 1

Present sick in hospital 4

Attached to and rationed with the band 2 14

---------

Balance 83

rations, which (it is assumed) consists of two general

prisoners 2

---------

TOTAL 85

That is to say, we have 85 men for whom one ration per

day must be drawn for the month of March, that is to

say, 31 days.

Hence, the total number of rations will be,

85 x 31 = 2635 rations.

(d) Additions and deductions must be made as follows:

_Additions_

For the men who were attached to the company for

rations and who joined during the month of February,

from absent sick, furlough, detached service, etc., and

which (let us assume) the "Plus" column of "Rations" on

the company morning report for February shows to be 150

_Deductions_

For the men who left the company during the month of

February, on account of being sent to the hospital sick,

going on furlough, etc., and which (let us assume) the

"Minus" column of "Rations" on the company morning

report for February shows to be 200

Leaving us (a "Net correction") to be _added_ of 50

---------

And making the total number due the company for the

month of March 2585

EXTRA ISSUES

The Army Regulations fixes the maximum allowance of soap, toilet

paper, matches, etc., the commanding officer being authorized, if he

so desires, to determine the allowances, with the prescribed maximum.

The allowances are based either on so much per ration, per so many

rations, or per organization. In the case of candles and matches the

allowance is left entirely to the commanding officer.

[Illustration: Fig. 6: "Model" Ration Return]

_Example_

(See "model" ration return above)

_Soap._ Allowance is 0.64 for each ration or 4 lbs. to 100

rations. 25.85 x 4 = 103.40, i. e., the company is entitled to 103

lbs. of soap for the month of March.

_Toilet paper._ Allowance is 1000 sheets for every 60 rations,

2585 / 60 = 43+, that is, the company is entitled to 43 packages

of toilet paper.

_Matches._ Allowance of matches for lighting fires and lights, for

which fuel and the illumination supplies are issued, is such as

the commanding officer may order as necessary.

_Flour._ Allowance of flour for paste used in target practice is

50 lbs. for each troop or company for the practice season.

FOOTNOTES:

[8] Silicate Roll Blackboards, which are perfectly flexible and can be

rolled tightly, like a map, without injury, may be obtained from the

New York Silicate Book Slate Co., 20 Vesey St., New York. They are

made in various sizes, about the most convenient for use in

noncommissioned officers' schools is No. 3, three by four feet--price

$2.

[9] For example, noisy or disorderly conduct in quarters, failure to

salute officers, slovenly dressed at formations, rifle equipments not

properly cleaned at inspection or other formations, overstaying pass,

short absences without leave and absences from formations (especially

for first offense).

CHAPTER II

DISCIPLINE

=910. Definition.= Discipline is not merely preservation of order,

faithful performance of duty, and prevention of offenses--in other

words, discipline is not merely compliance with a set of rules and

regulations drawn up for the purpose of preserving order in an

organization. This is only one phase of discipline. In its deeper and

more important sense discipline may be defined as the habit of

instantaneous and instinctive obedience under any and all

circumstances--it is the habit whereby the very muscles of the soldier

instinctively obey the word of command, so that under whatever

circumstances of danger or death the soldier may hear that word of

command, even though his mind be too confused to work, his muscles

will obey. It is toward this ultimate object that all rules of

discipline tend. In war, the value of this habit of instantaneous and

instinctive obedience is invaluable, and during the time of peace

everything possible should be done to ingrain into the very blood of

the soldier this spirit, this habit, of instantaneous, instinctive

obedience to the word of command.

=911. Methods of Attaining Good Discipline.= Experience shows that

drill, routine, military courtesy, attention to details, proper

rewards for good conduct, and invariable admonition or punishment of

all derelictions of duty, are the best methods of attaining good

discipline--that they are the most effective means to that end.

=912. Importance.= History shows that the chief factor of success in

war is discipline, and that without discipline no body of troops can

hold their own against a well-directed, well-disciplined force.

=913. Sound System.= We must bear in mind that what may be considered

a sound system of discipline at one epoch or for one nation, may be

inapplicable at another epoch or for another nation. In other words,

sound discipline depends upon the existing state of civilization and

education, the political institutions of the country, the national

trait and the national military system. For example, the system of

discipline that existed in the days of Frederick the Great, and which,

in modified form, exists today in certain European armies, whereby the

soldier was so inured to a habit of subjection that he became a sort

of machine--a kind of automaton. Such a system of discipline, while

answering admirably well its purpose at that time and for those

nations, would not do at all in this day and generation, and with a

people like ours, in whom the spirit of personal freedom and

individual initiative are born. Of course, the discipline that will

insure obedience under any and all conditions--the discipline that

will insure prompt and unhesitating obedience to march, to attack, to

charge--is just as important today as it was a thousand years ago, but

we can not attain it by the machine-making methods of former times.

The system we use must be in keeping with the national

characteristics of our people and the tactical necessities of the day,

the latter requiring individual initiative. According to the old

system, the company commander imposed his will upon a body of

submissive units; under the new system the company commander, backed

by authority and greater knowledge, leads obedient, willing units,

exacting ready obedience and loyal cooeperation. The company commander

used to drive; now he leads.

=914. Means of attaining and maintaining such discipline.=

1. Explain to the men the importance of discipline and its value on

the field of battle, and give the reasons that makes it necessary to

subject soldiers to restrictions that they were not subjected to in

civil life.

2. Do not impose unnecessary restrictions or hardships on your men,

nor issue orders that have no bearing on their efficiency, health,

cleanliness, orderliness, etc.

3. Demand a high standard of excellence in the performance of all

duties whatsoever, and exact the utmost display of energy.

A system of discipline based on the above principles develops habits

of self-control, self-reliance, neatness, order, and punctuality, and

creates respect for authority and confidence in superiors.

=915. Punishment.= In maintaining discipline, it must be remembered

the object of punishment should be two-fold: (a) To prevent the

commission of offenses, and (b) to reform the offender. Punishment

should, therefore, in degree and character depend upon the nature of

the offense. Punishment should not be debasing or illegal, and the

penalty should be proportionate to the nature of the offense. If too

great, it tends to arouse sympathy, and foster friends for the

offender, thus encouraging a repetition of the offense. A distinction,

therefore, should be made between the deliberate disregard of orders

and regulations, and offenses which are the result of ignorance or

thoughtlessness. In the latter case the punishment should be for the

purpose of instruction and should not go to the extent of inflicting

unnecessary humiliation and discouragement upon the offender.

General Principles

=916.= In the administration of discipline the following principles

should be observed.

1. Everyone, officers and soldiers, should be required and made to

perform their full duty. If the post commander, for instance, requires

the company commanders to do their full duty, they will require their

noncommissioned officers to do their full duty, and the

noncommissioned officers will in turn require the men to do the same.

2. Subordinates should be held strictly responsible for the proper

government and administration of their respective commands, and all

changes or corrections should be made through them.

3. Subordinates should have exclusive control of their respective

commands, and all orders, instructions and directions affecting their

commands should be given through them.

4. If, in case of emergency, it be not practicable to make certain

changes or corrections, or to give certain orders, instructions or

directions, through the subordinates, they should be notified at once

of what has been done.

5. After a subordinate has been placed in charge of a certain duty,

all instructions pertaining thereto should be given through him, and

all meddling and interfering should be avoided. Interference by

superiors relieves the subordinate of responsibility, and causes him

to lose interest, become indifferent, and do no more than he is

obliged to do.

6. The certainty of reward for, and appreciation of, meritorious

conduct, should equal the certainty of punishment for dereliction of

duty.

7. It is the duty of an officer or noncommissioned officer who gives

an order to see that it is obeyed; carrying out orders received by him

does not end with their perfunctory transmission to subordinates--this

is only a small part of his duty. He must personally see that the

orders so transmitted are made effective.

8. The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and under no

circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused.

Reproof and punishment must be administered with discretion and

judgment, and without passion; for an officer or noncommissioned

officer who loses his temper and flies into a tantrum has failed to

obtain his first triumph in discipline. He who can not control himself

can not control others.

9. Punishment should invariably follow dereliction of duty, for the

frequency of offenses depends, as a general rule, on the degree of

certainty with which their commission is attended with punishment.

When men know that their derelictions and neglects will be observed

and reproved, they will be much more careful than they would be

otherwise--that's human nature.

A strict adherence to the above general principles will instill into

the minds of those concerned, respect for authority and a spirit of

obedience.

PART III

MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS PERTAINING TO COMPANY TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION

CHAPTER I

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF COMPANY TRAINING AND INSTRUCTION[10]

=917. Object of Training and Instruction.= The object of training and

instructing a company is to thoroughly knit together its different

parts, its various elements (individuals, squads and platoons), into a

complete, homogeneous mass, a cohesive unit, that will under any and

all conditions and circumstances respond to the will of the captain--a

cohesive unit that knows how to march, that knows how to live properly

in camp, that knows how to fight and that can be readily handled

tactically on the field of battle. In short, the object of training

and instruction is to make out of the company an efficient, wieldy

fighting weapon, to be manipulated by the captain. There is but one

way this object can be obtained, and that is by work, work, work--and

then more work--by constant care, attention and pains--by cooeperation,

by team work, among the officers, the noncommissioned officers and the

privates.

=918. Method and Progression.= Arrangement is an essential of sound

teaching. Training and instruction in order to be easily understood

and readily assimilated--in order to give the greatest results in the

shortest time--must be carried on according to a methodical and

progressive plan. Each subject or subjects upon a knowledge of which

depend the proper understanding and mastering of another, should be

studied and mastered before taking up the other subject, and the

elementary and simpler aspects of a given subject must be mastered

before taking up the higher and more difficult phases of the subject,

which means that individual training and instruction must precede, and

provide a sound foundation for, collective training and

instruction--that is to say, for the higher tactical training and

instruction of the company as a unit. These basic, fundamental

principles of successful training and instruction apply to practical

as well as theoretical training. For instance, in the subject of

entrenchments we would first instruct the men individually in the use

of the tools and in the construction and use of the trenches, after

which we would pass on to the tactical use of entrenchments by the

company. Also, in training and instructing the company in fire

discipline, we would first explain to the men the power and tactical

value of the rifle, and instruct them in their duties on the firing

line as regards adjustment of sights, attention to commands, economy

of ammunition, etc.; we would explain to the platoon commanders and

guides their duties as regards control of fire, enforcement of fire

discipline, etc., after which we would practice the company as a unit

in fire action, and fire control, ending up with an exercise showing

the tactical application of the rules and principles explained. And

again, in the training and instruction of the company in the attack,

we would first train and instruct the company in all the formations

and operations that naturally precede an attack (patrolling, outposts,

advance guard, rear guard), and also in those that form an inherent

part of an attack (extended order, field firing, use of cover, etc.).

=919. Program.= The training and instruction of a company, whether

practical or theoretical, should be carried on in accordance with a

fixed, definite program, in which the subjects are arranged in a

natural, progressive order.

=920. Simultaneous Instruction and Training.= The next question that

presents itself is: Should instruction and training in each branch be

completed before proceeding to the next, or should instruction and

training be carried on simultaneously in two or more different

subjects, as one, for example, are taught mathematics, French and

history at the same time, a different hour of the day being devoted to

each subject? In other words, should we, for instance, devote one hour

of the day to attack, one hour to defense, and one hour to the service

of security, thus preventing the soldier from getting weary of doing

the same thing that whole day? Our answer is:

1st. If the instruction and training is being given on the ground

where the application of the principles of any given subject is varied

so much by the type of the ground and the nature of the situation,

each type of ground affording a different solution of the problem, it

is thought the best results can be obtained by finishing each subject

before proceeding to the next, thus not losing the "atmosphere" of one

subject by switching to the next, and also confusing the minds of the

men with different principles.

2nd. However, if the instruction and training be theoretical and the

time available each day be several hours, better results can be

obtained by studying two or more subjects simultaneously. This would

also be the case if the work be practical, but if it be such that the

type of the ground and the nature of the situation will not of

themselves afford variety in the application of the same principles.

=921. Responsibility.= The Army Regulations and War Department orders

hold the company commander responsible for the training and

instruction of the company. The subject is a most important one and

should receive serious thought and study. Before admonishing one of

your men for not knowing a subject, always ask yourself, "Have I made

an effort to teach it to him?"

=922. Interest.= Special effort should be made to make the training

and instruction of the company interesting, so that the work will not

become monotonous and irksome, and thus cause the men to lose interest

and get stale. To accomplish this, these points should be borne in

mind:

_Variety._ Inject variety into the work. Do not keep the men too long

at one thing.

_Clearness._ Every exercise, lesson or lecture should have in view a

well-defined object, the meaning and importance of which must be

explained to, and understood by, the men at the beginning of the

exercise, lesson or lecture. In other words, at the beginning, explain

the main, governing idea of the subject, and then take pains to

explain in a simple, conversational way each phase as you come to it.

Give the reasons for everything. You can not expect men to take an

interest in things the meaning of which they do not understand and the

reason for which they do not see. Make sure by asking questions of

different ones as you go along that your explanations are understood.

_Thoroughness._ Every lecture, talk, drill or exercise should be

carefully planned and arranged beforehand. Remember, that the men who

are going to listen to your talk--the men who are going to go through

the exercise--have the right to expect this of you, and you have no

right to compel them to listen to lots of disconnected, half-baked

statements, or make them go through a disjointed exercise or drill. In

the case of tactical exercises always, if practicable, visit and

examine the terrain beforehand. Of course, all this will mean

work--additional work--but remember the government pays you to work.

_Reality._ Make all practical work as real as possible--do not permit

the commission of absurdities--do not let men do things which

manifestly they would not be able to do in actual practice--and you

yourself be sure to make your exercises and tactical scheme as like

real conditions of warfare as possible.

=923. Individual Initiative.= The effective range and great power of

modern firearms cause troops in battle to be spread out over large

areas, thus decentralizing control over men and operations, and

consequently increasing the value and importance of individual

initiative. The company commander should, therefore, practice,

accustom and encourage the privates, noncommissioned officers and

lieutenants in the development and exercise of individual initiative

and responsibility. This should be borne in mind in all training and

instruction.

Officers, noncommissioned officers and privates must not "lay down"

just because they have no specific orders. Remember, the one thing

above all others that counts in war, is =action, initiative=. Indeed,

'tis better to have acted and lost than never to have acted at all.

Listen to what the Chief of Staff of the Army has to say about this in

the preface to the Field Service Regulations: "Officers and men of all

ranks and grades are given a certain independence in the execution of

the tasks to which they are assigned and are expected to show

initiative in meeting the different situations as they arise. Every

individual, from the highest commander to the lowest private, must

always remember that inaction and neglect of opportunities will

warrant more severe censure than an error in the choice of means."

=924. Determination and Individual Intelligence.= While the value of

discipline can hardly be overestimated, there are two other factors in

battle that are fully as important, if not more so, and they are,

=determination= to win, and =individual intelligence=, which, in war,

as in all other human undertakings, almost invariably spell success.

Therefore, make these two factors one of the basic principles of the

instruction and training of the company, and do all you can to instill

into your men a spirit of determination, and to develop in them

individual intelligence. Every human being has in his soul a certain

amount of determination, even though it be only enough to determine

upon the small things of life. Some people are born with more

determination than others, but it is a mistake to suppose that a man

must remain through life with the same amount of determination that he

brought into it. The attributes of the human mind, such as

determination, bravery, ambition, energy, etc., are all capable of

improvement and also of deterioration. It is essential therefore, for

us to endeavor by all means in our power to improve our strength of

character--our determination. It is, of course, useless for us to

learn the art of war if we have not sufficient determination, when we

meet the enemy, to apply the principles we have studied. There is no

reason, however, why every officer, noncommissioned officer and

private should not improve his determination of character by careful

training in peace. It can only be done by facing the difficulties,

thoroughly understanding the dangers, and asking ourselves repeatedly

whether we are prepared to face the ordeal in war. Let us not think,

in a vague sort of a way, that in war we shall be all right and do as

well as most people. We know that we are not gifted with tremendous

personal courage, and we know that, whatever happens, we shall not run

away. But that is not enough. We must train ourselves to understand

that in the hour of trial we can harden our hearts, that we can assume

the initiative, and retain it by constant advance and constant attack;

unless we can fill our hearts with the determination to win, we can

not hope to do our full duty on the field of battle and acquit

ourselves with credit.

=925. The Human Element.= No system of training and instruction that

does not take into account human nature, can be thoroughly effective.

The human element probably enters into war more than it does into any

other pursuit. The old idea of turning a human being into a machine,

by means of discipline, and making him dread his captain more than the

enemy, died long ago, especially with the American people. In modern

war success depends to a great extent upon the initiative, the

individual action of the soldier and this action is greatly influenced

by the soldier's state of mind at the moment, by the power that can be

exercised over his mind by his comrades and those leading him. The

company commander should, therefore, study the characteristics of the

human mind with the object of ascertaining how he can influence the

men under his command, so that in battle those human attributes which

are favorable to success, may be strengthened and those which are

favorable to defeat may be weakened. Of the former, courage,

determination, initiative, respect, cheerfulness, comradeship,

emulation and esprit de corps, are the principal ones; of the latter,

fear, surprise, disrespect, and dejection, are the leading ones. By

means of good, sound discipline, we can create, improve and foster the

qualities mentioned that are favorable to success, and we can

eliminate to a considerable extent, if not entirely, those that are

detrimental to success.

=926. Fear.= The emotion of fear acts more powerfully upon the

feelings of the individual soldier than any other emotion, and it is

also probably the most infectious. Fear in a mild form is present in

every human being. Nature wisely put it there, and society could not

very well get along without it. For example, we stop and look up and

down a crowded street before starting to cross, for fear of being run

over; in going out in the cold we put on our overcoats, for fear of

catching cold. In fact, we hardly do anything in life without taking

a precaution of some kind. These are all examples of reasonable fear,

which, within bounds is a perfectly legitimate attribute of a soldier

in common with other human beings. For example, we teach the men to

take advantage of cover when attacking, and we dig trenches when on

the defense, in both cases for fear of being shot by the enemy. It is

the unreasoning type of fear that plays havoc in war, and the most

deadly and common form of it is a vague, indefinite, nameless dread of

the enemy. If the average man was to analyze his feelings in war and

was to ask himself if he were actually afraid of being killed, he

would probably find that he was not. The ordinary soldier is prepared

to take his chance, with a comfortable feeling inside him, that,

although no doubt a number of people will be killed and wounded, he

will escape. If, then, a man is not unreasonably afraid of being

killed or wounded, is it not possible by proper training and

instruction to overcome this vague fear of the enemy? Experience shows

that it is. If a soldier is suffering from this vague fear of the

enemy, it will at least be a consolation to him to know that a great

many other soldiers, including those belonging to the enemy, are

suffering in a similar manner, and that they are simply experiencing

one of the ordinary characteristics of the human mind. If the soldier

in battle will only realize that the enemy is just as much afraid of

him as he is of the enemy, reason is likely to assert itself and to a

great extent overcome the unpleasant feelings inside him. General

Grant, in his Memoirs, relates a story to the effect that in one of

his early campaigns he was seized with an unreasonable fear of his

enemy, and was very much worried as to what the enemy was doing, when,

all at once, it dawned upon him that his enemy was probably worrying

equally as much about what he, Grant, was doing, and was probably as

afraid as he was, if not even more so, and the realization of this

promptly dispelled all of his, Grant's, fear. Confidence in one's

ability to fight well will also do much to neutralize fear, and if a

soldier knows that he can shoot better, march better, and attack

better, than his opponent, the confidence of success that he will, as

a result, feel will do much to dispel physical fear. By sound and

careful training and instruction make your men efficient and this

efficiency will give them confidence in themselves, confidence in

their rifles, confidence in their bayonets, confidence in their

comrades and confidence in their officers.

The physical methods of overcoming fear in battle are simply to direct

the men's minds to other thoughts by giving them something for their

bodies and limbs to do. It is a well-known saying that a man in battle

frequently regains his lost courage by repeatedly firing off his

rifle, which simply means that his thoughts are diverted by physical

movements. This is no doubt one of the reasons why the attack is so

much more successful in war than the defense, because in the attack

the men are generally moving forward and having their minds diverted

by physical motion from this vague dread of the enemy.

=927. Courage.= Courage, like all other human characteristics, is very

infectious, and a brave leader who has no fear of the enemy will

always get more out of his men than one who is not so well equipped in

that respect. However, it is a well-known fact that a man may be

brave far above his fellows in one calling or occupation, and

extremely nervous in another. For example, a man may have greatly

distinguished himself in the capture of a fort, who would not get on a

horse for fear of being kicked off. Courage of this kind is induced

chiefly by habit or experience--the man knows the dangers and how to

overcome them, he has been through similar experiences before and he

has come out of them with a whole skin. This type of courage can be

developed by careful training during peace, and it can be increased by

self-confidence--by so training the soldier that he knows and feels he

will know what to do in any emergency which may arise, and how to do

it; he will not be surprised by the unexpected event, which invariably

occurs, and he will understand others besides himself are being

troubled by unpleasant feelings, which it is his duty as a man and a

soldier to overcome.

=928. Surprise.= Surprise may be said to be the mother of a panic,

which is the worst form of fear. In such a case unreasoning fear

sometimes turns into temporary insanity. Panic is most infectious,

but, on the other hand, a panic can often be averted or stayed by the

courageous action of one or more individuals, who can thus impose

their will on the mass and bring the people to a reasonable state of

mind. =Teach every man in the company that when surprised the only

hope of success is to obey at once and implicitly the orders of his

immediate commander.=

Surprises in war are not limited to the ordinary acceptance of the

term, such as a sudden attack from an unexpected direction. The

soldier who goes into battle, for instance, and hears the whiz of a

bullet, or sees a shell burst in front of him, is surprised if he has

not been taught in peace that these things have to be faced, and that

for one bullet that hurts anyone thousands have to be fired.

Similarly, a man sees a comrade knocked over; the horrors of war are

immediately brought to him, and his courage begins to ebb--he has been

surprised, because he has not realized in peace that men are bound to

be killed in war. The whole atmosphere of the battlefield is a

surprise to the average soldier with no previous experience--the enemy

is everywhere, behind every bush, and lurking in every bit of cover,

the air is full of bullets, and any advance towards the

formidable-looking position held by the enemy is suicidal. However, if

the soldier is properly trained and instructed in peace, he will not

be greatly surprised at his novel surroundings; he will know that the

enemy is not everywhere, and that one bullet sounds much more

dangerous than it really is. A bullet sounds quite close when it is

fifty yards away, and there is a popular saying that a man's weight in

lead is fired for every man that is killed in war.

=929. Respect.= It is a mistake to imagine that all that is required

from a soldier is respect to his officers and noncommissioned

officers. Self-respect is fully as important. A soldier is a human

being; if he possesses self-respect he will respect all that is good

in his comrades, and they will respect all that is good in him. A man

who respects himself knows how to respect other people. These are the

men that form the backbone of the company, and are the best material

on which to work in order to raise the general standard of courage in

Battle. From a purely military point of view, it is absolutely

necessary for an officer, noncommissioned officer, or private to

possess some marked military qualifications in order to gain respect

from others.

This respect engenders confidence in others. Self-respect in the

individual can be encouraged, not by fulsome praise, but by a quiet

appreciation of the good military qualities displayed by him, and by

making use of those qualities whenever an opportunity occurs. For

example, if a soldier is seen to do a good piece of scouting or

patrolling, the first opportunity should be taken to give him a

similar task, if possible in a more responsible position or on a more

important occasion. Knowledge is a powerful factor in creating

respect, and is probably second only to determination of character. It

is essential, therefore, that all officers and noncommissioned

officers should have a thorough knowledge of their duties--that they

should be "on to their jobs."

=930. Cheerfulness.= Cheerfulness is a valuable military asset in war,

and like all other characteristics of the human being, is very

infectious, and in times of depression, such as during a long siege,

or after the failure of an attack, it does more than anything else to

restore the fighting power of the men.

=931. Contentment.= Contentment amongst troops in war is dependent

upon these main factors: good leading, good food, and sufficient

shelter and sleep. Of these, good leading is by far the most

important, because it has been proved time and again that badly fed

and badly quartered troops, who have suffered great hardships, will

still be content and will fight in the most gallant and vigorous

manner, provided they are well led. Although good leading emanates in

the first instance from the highest military authorities, a great deal

depends upon the company officers and noncommissioned officers. A good

leader as a rule is careful of the comforts of his men; he obtains the

best food and best shelter available, he does not wear out the men by

unnecessary movements or unnecessary work, either in the field or in

camp, and consequently when he does order them to do anything they

know at once that it is necessary and they do it cheerfully.

=932. Comradeship.= Comradeship is a very valuable military

characteristic. What a world of meaning there is in the words, "Me and

my bunkie." A soldier may have many acquaintances and a number of

friends, but he has but one "bunkie." In times of great danger two men

who are "bunkies" will not shirk so easily as two independent men. The

best in one man comes out to the surface and dominates any bad

military points in the other. They can help each other in countless

ways in war, and if one is unfortunately killed or wounded, the other

will probably do his best to get even with the enemy at the earliest

possible opportunity. This spirit may not be very Christianlike, but

it is very human and practical, and helps to win battles, and to win

battles is the only reason why soldiers go to war.

ART OF INSTRUCTION ON THE GROUND

=933. Advantages.= Whenever practicable, training and instruction

should, in whole or in part, be imparted on the ground, as this gives

the instruction a practical aspect that is most valuable, and enables

the soldier to grasp and apply principles that he would not otherwise

understand. Knowledge that a man can not apply has no value.

=934. Different Methods.= Instruction on the ground may be given

according to one of these three methods:

_1st Method._ By means of a talk or lecture prepare the minds of the

men for the reception and retention of the subject to be explained

later on the ground. In other words, first explain the principles of

the subject and then put a "clincher" on the information thus imparted

by taking the men to some suitable ground, assuming certain situations

and then by quizzing different men see how they would apply the

principles just explained in the talk or lecture. For example, after a

lecture on the selection of fire-positions take the men to some

suitable nearby place and explain to them that the company is

attacking toward that house and is being fired upon from that

direction. Then continue:

=Captain:= Remember what I told you about the selection of good

fire-positions during the advance. We want to use our rifles with

effect, so we must be able to see the position of the enemy. On the

other hand, we want to avoid being hit ourselves, if possible; so, we

would like to get as much cover as possible. Now, Smith, do you think

where we are at present standing is a good place for a fire-position?

=Smith:= No, sir.

=Captain:= Why not?

=Smith:= We can see the enemy from here, but he can see us better than

we can see him, and can hit us easier than we can hit him.

=Captain:= Jones, can you choose a better place, either to the front

or rear of where we are now standing?

=Jones:= I would choose a position along that row of bushes, about

fifty yards to the front.

=Captain:= Why?

=Jones:= Because, etc., etc.

Twenty minutes' instruction in this manner, after a lecture, will

firmly fix in the brains of the men the principles explained in the

lecture.

It is a good plan to repeat the salient points of the lecture in the

questions, as was done in the first question asked above, or to do so

in some other way.

If a man can not give an answer, or choose a suitable place, explain

the requirements again and help him to use his common sense.

_2d Method._ By practicing the men on the ground in the subject about

which the talk or lecture was delivered.

_3d Method._ This may be called the ocular demonstration method, which

consists in having a part of the company go through the exercise or

drill, while the rest of the company observes what is being done. This

method is illustrated by the following example:

=935. Attack.= The company commander has just delivered a talk to the

company on the second stage of the attack, and has marched the company

to a piece of ground suitable for practicing this particular

operation, and which the company commander has himself visited

beforehand (The ground should always be visited beforehand by the

company commander, who should be thoroughly familiar with it. If

possible, ground suitable for practicing the operation in question

should always be selected.) The operation should begin about 1200

yards from the enemy's position. After pointing out the enemy's

position to the company, the particular part of his line it is

intended to assault and the direction the company is to advance, the

company commander would then proceed something like this: "We are part

of a battalion taking part in a battle, and there are companies to our

right and left, with a support and reserve in our rear. So far we have

been advancing over ground that is exposed to hostile artillery fire

(or not exposed to hostile artillery fire, according to the actual

country). We have just come under the enemy's infantry fire also, and

consequently we must change our method of advancing. Our immediate

object is to get forward, without expending more ammunition than is

absolutely necessary, to a position close enough to the enemy to

enable us to use our rifles with such deadly effect that we will be

able to gain a superiority of fire. Now, is this place sufficiently

close for the purpose? No, it is not--it's entirely too far away. Is

that next ridge just in front of us close enough? No, it is not; it is

at least 1,000 yards from the enemy's position. As a rule, we must get

from eight to six hundred yards from the enemy's position before the

real struggle for superiority of fire begins.

"The following are the main points to which attention must be paid

during this part of the advance:

"1. We must halt in good fire position from which we can see and fire

at the enemy, and from which we can not be seen very clearly.

"2. We must advance very rapidly over any open ground that is exposed

to the enemy's artillery or rifle fire.

"3. We must find halting places, if possible under cover, or under the

best cover available, so as to avoid making our forward rushes so long

that the men will get worn out, and begin to straggle long before they

get close enough to the enemy to use their rifles with deadly effect.

"4. Whenever possible, company scouts should be sent on ahead to

select fire-positions."

Of course, the above points will have been explained already in the

lecture, but this short summary is given in order to focus the minds

of the men upon the action that must be taken by the privates, and

squad leaders and the platoon commanders.

We now take one platoon and the remainder of the company looks on. The

platoon commander is reminded that he is under artillery and infantry

fire, and is then directed to advance, in proper formation, to the

first fire-position available.

We will suppose there is a gentle slope up to the next ridge or

undulation of the ground, and that there are no obstructions to the

view except those afforded by the ground itself. The platoon now

advances, the captain remaining with the rest of the company, pointing

out mistakes as well as good points, and asking the men questions,

such as:

=Captain:= Corporal Smith, should the whole platoon have gone forward

together, or would it have been better to advance by squads?

=Corporal Smith:= I think it should have advanced by squads.

=Captain:= No, it was all right to advance as they did. At this

distance the enemy's infantry fire would not be very deadly, the

platoon is well extended as skirmishers, it would take considerably

longer to go forward to the next position by successive squads and we

want to advance at this stage as rapidly as possible; for, the longer

we took, the longer would the men be exposed to fire, and consequently

the greater would be the number of casualties.

=Captain:= Sergeant Jones, why did the platoon advance at a run when

moving down the slope, and begin to walk just before reaching the foot

of the slope?

=Sergeant Jones:= Because the slope is exposed and it was necessary to

get over it as quickly as possible. They began to walk just before

reaching the foot of the slope, because they struck dead ground and

were covered from the enemy's fire by the ridge in front.

=Captain:= Corporal Adams, shouldn't the platoon have halted when it

reached cover, so as to give the men a rest?

=Corporal Adams:= No, sir; the men had not run very far and walking

gave them sufficient rest. It would have been an unnecessary loss of

time to halt.

=Captain:= Harris, why did that man run on ahead as soon as the

platoon halted?

=Pvt. Harris:= So he could creep up the crest of the ridge and lie

down in exactly the spot that is the best fire-position--that is,

where he can just see to fire over the crest and where the enemy can

not see him.

=Captain:= Yes, that's right. All the men in the platoon might not

stop at the best fire-position and in the hurry and excitement of the

moment the platoon commander might also fail to do so, but if a man

goes forward and lies down, the whole platoon knows that they must not

go beyond him. Individual men who, owing to slight undulations of

ground, may not be able to fire when they halt in line with this man,

can creep up until they can see. Others who, for the same reason as

regards the ground, find that if they get up on a line with the man

they will be unduly exposed, will halt before that time.

=Captain:= Sergeant Roberts, is it necessary for another platoon to

provide covering fire during the advance of the platoon?

=Sergeant Roberts:= No sir. At this range the enemy's infantry fire

would not be very effective, and it is important to husband our

ammunition for the later stages of the attack.

Having asked any other questions suggested by the situation or the

ground, the captain will then take the rest of the company forward

over the ground covered by the platoon, halting at the place where the

platoon changed its pace from a rush to a walk, so that the men can

see for themselves that cover from fire has been reached. He will then

move the rest of the company forward and tell them to halt and lie

down in what each man considers to be the best fire-position, not

necessarily adopting the same position as that chosen by the leading

platoon. The platoon commanders will then go along their platoons and

point out any mistakes.

The leading platoon will now join the company and another platoon will

be deployed in the fire position, the platoon commander being directed

to advance to the next fire-position.

As we are now about 1,000 yards from the enemy's position the question

will again arise as to whether covering fire is necessary.

If the enemy's rifle fire were heavy and accurate it might be

necessary, but it should be avoided if possible, on account of the

expenditure of ammunition.

We will suppose that the ground falls gently towards the enemy and is

very exposed to view for about 300 yards, and half this distance away

there is a low bank running parallel to the front of the attack and

with a small clump of three or four trees on the bank directly in

front of the platoon. Four hundred yards away is the bottom of the

valley covered with bushes and shrubs. On the far side the ground

rises with small undulations and low foot hills to the high ground

occupied by the enemy.

There appears to be no marked fire-position which will afford any

cover except the bank 150 yards away. The second platoon advances in

the same manner as did the first and the captain with the commanders

of the remaining platoons will continue to ask questions and point out

what has been done right or wrong by the leading platoon. The first

question which will arise is whether the platoon can reach the fire

position offered by the bank in one rush, and secondly, whether the

bank is a good fire-position. A former question will again crop up as

to whether the whole platoon should go forward at once or whether the

advance should be made by squads.

A hundred and fifty yards is a long way to advance without a halt, and

if a halt is made on such exposed ground fire must be opened. Probably

three advances, each of about fifty yards, would be made, covering

fire being provided by the other platoons, which will be occupying the

fire-position which the leading platoon has just left. This covering

fire would not endanger the leading platoon as it would be delivered

from just behind the crest and the leading platoon would be over the

crest and out of sight and therefore out of fire from the platoon in

rear.

The selection of a fire-position during this advance would depend upon

very minute folds of the ground, or very low bushes, grass, etc.,

which might give a certain amount of cover from view, and therefore

make it difficult for the enemy to aim or range accurately. We will

suppose that the leading platoon has halted to fire about fifty yards

in front, the remaining platoons, in turn, should then be taken

forward, examining the ground very carefully as they go, and each

platoon commander asked to halt his platoon in what he considers to be

the best place.

The possibility of using a scout to select a fire-position would be

considered, and a fire-position selected by one platoon would be

compared with that selected by another.

The third platoon would then lead during the advance to the next

fire-position, and so on with the fourth platoon, if necessary, until

the bank was reached. The bank will afford a good deal of material for

discussion. Is it a good fire-position or is it not, should it be

occupied as such or should it be avoided altogether?

If we ask an artillery officer his opinion about the matter, he will

tell us that by means of the clump of trees the defenders' artillery

will be able to range with absolute accuracy on that bank. The

direction of the bank is parallel to their front, and therefore they

can fire at any part of it for some distance right and left of the

clump without materially altering their range, and if any infantry

occupy the bank they can bring a very deadly fire to bear against

them.

There appears to be no doubt, from an artillery point of view, that

our platoon should avoid occupying it and get out of its neighborhood

as rapidly as possible.

There is another drawback as regards the bank: it is some 850 yards

from the enemy's position and may be expected to be under an effective

rifle fire. It is no doubt a good mark for the enemy, and, now we come

to the crux of the whole matter; his artillery and infantry fire might

not do us much damage so long as we remain behind the bank, but they

might make it very unpleasant for us directly we try to leave this

cover and advance further.

Before finally deciding what to do we must consider human nature,

which is entirely in favor of halting behind the bank, and if allowed

to remain there long, will be opposed to leaving it. We cannot hope to

gain superiority of fire over the enemy at a range of 850 yards, so

that a long halt at the bank is out of the question. But it appears to

be an extraordinary thing, when we are searching everywhere for cover,

that we should be doubtful about occupying such good cover when we

find it.

If we decide not to occupy it, the logical conclusion is that, when

preparing a position for defense, we should construct a good

fire-position for the attack some 850 yards away, which is the last

thing we should think of doing.

There is no doubt about it, that with badly-trained troops such a

fire-position would be liable to become a snare, and that if they once

occupied it, there would be great difficulty in getting them forward

again, and probably the attack would be brought to a standstill at a

critical time.

The answer appears to be found in the simple solution of good

training. We must teach our men that when they get into such positions

they must use the cover afforded, but for no longer than any other

fire-position, and that they must get into the habit in peace of

looking upon such localities with suspicion, and with the knowledge

that they are not suitable for lengthy occupation in war, if the

battle is to be won.

We now come to a still more difficult question of training, namely,

how far can the company get forward from the bank without being

compelled to stop in order to gain superiority of fire over the

defense? In war we want to get as close as possible; the moral effect

on the defense is greater, our fire is more effective, and we are

likely to gain our object more rapidly. In peace there is no fire to

stop us, and we move forward to ridiculous positions which we could

not possibly reach in war without first gaining superiority of fire.

The result of this is that we try to do the same thing when first we

go to war, and we are stopped, probably much further back than we

should have been if we had studied the question in peace.

Even on the most open ground we must get to within 600 yards of the

enemy, and if the ground affords any cover in front, the exposed space

must be rushed and the more forward position gained. Having pointed

out this difficulty to the company during the previous lecture, and

reminded them of it on the ground, we can now extend the whole company

and move forward from the bank, using covering fire and letting each

platoon commander decide how far he can get to the front after a

series of rushes, the company acting as a whole.

The captain can then go down the line and discuss with each platoon

the position it has reached. Whilst he is doing this, the remaining

platoons can be trained in fire direction and control, which should be

carefully watched and criticized by the platoon commanders. One

platoon, owing to the nature of the ground in front of it, can get

forward further than other platoons, and this should be brought home

to each platoon, so as to avoid the possibility of playing the game of

follow your leader, and one platoon halting merely because another has

halted.

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the

company can be moved to a flank to choose a similar fire-position

where the ground is more favorable to an advance, and where the

company could get within 300 yards of the enemy, or even less, before

it would be absolutely necessary to stop in order to gain superiority

of fire.

If there is still time available, and the ground is suitable, the

whole operation can be carried out in the opposite direction or in

some other direction, and the platoons can thus be trained to

appreciate that fire-positions which are good in one place are bad in

another.

=936. Defense.= Demonstrations in defense can be carried out in a

similar manner, the captain explaining to the company the general line

of defense to be taken up, the portion allotted to the company, and

the probable direction of the enemy's attack.

The cooeperation of the artillery and infantry will have been pointed

out in the previous lecture: how some part of the enemy's advance will

be dealt with by artillery alone, some part by both artillery and

infantry, and some part by infantry alone.

This can now be pointed out to the men on the ground. Having

considered the assistance provided by the artillery, the next point to

decide upon is the exact position of the fire trench. The best way to

proceed is to allot a certain portion of the front occupied by the

company to each platoon and to let the platoon commanders take charge

of the operations. The platoon commander can direct one of his squads

to select a position for the trench, and that squad can lie down

there. The remaining squads will then select a position in turn. If

two squads select the same they can lie down together. The platoon

commander will then fall in his platoon, and make them lie down in the

most retired position chosen; he will ask the squad leader why the

squad chose that locality in preference to any other, why they did not

go ten yards further forward or ten yards further back; and he will

explain to the whole platoon the advantages and disadvantages of

selecting this locality. He will then move the whole platoon forward

to the next position chosen by another squad and deal with that

locality. Finally, he will select the position he thinks the best,

giving his reasons why he has decided upon it, and place the whole

platoon on it. When all the platoons have decided upon their line of

defense, the captain will move the whole company in turn from the

ground occupied by one platoon to that occupied by another, asking the

platoon commander in each case to explain why the position was chosen

in preference to any other.

He will give his decision as regards each platoon, and he will finally

arrange for the position to be occupied by the whole company. One

platoon, for some good reason, may have chosen a place which it would

not be safe to occupy, owing to the fire of another platoon on the

flank. Another platoon may have chosen a place which was very good as

regards the field of fire in a direction which was already adequately

defended by another platoon, but which had a bad field of fire over

ground which no other platoon could fire upon. The company commander

would adjust all these matters, and in the end one or more platoons

might not be placed in the best position as regards their own

particular front, but in the best as regards the whole company.

Having decided upon the exact site of the trenches and the general

distribution of fire, the next matter to consider is the amount of

clearing that is necessary, and the position and nature of any

obstacles which may be required. Each platoon commander having been

allotted a definite fire zone, can point out to his platoon what

clearance is necessary; he can then ask each squad, as before, to

choose the position for the obstacle. The company commander can then

take the whole company to the position occupied by each platoon and

tell the platoon commander to explain what ground they propose to

clear, where they propose to place their obstacle, the material

available for its construction, and in every case the reason why the

decision has been arrived at. If digging is permitted, the trenches

will now be constructed, and care will be taken that they are actually

finished. It is far better to work overtime than to construct trenches

which would be of little use in war and could not be properly

defended. It is the exception rather than the rule to see trenches

properly finished, fit for occupation, and capable of resisting a

heavy attack. If the trenches cannot be dug the company can be taken

to another part of the same position, where the ground in front is

totally different, and the exercise can be repeated, the platoon and

company commanders pointing out why a fire trench which was well sited

in the first case would be badly sited if a similar position was

selected in the second case.

=937. Outpost.= We can now turn to the method of training the company

in outpost duty, making use of the same system of demonstration.

Having pointed out to the company the locality where the main body is

bivouacked, the fighting position which the main body will occupy in

case a heavy attack is made against the outposts, and the general line

of the outposts, the company commander will indicate on the ground the

extent of front which is to be guarded by his company, stating whether

imaginary companies continue the position on one or both flanks. He

will point out the possible avenues of approach from the direction of

the enemy to that portion of the position to be occupied by the

company, and state from which direction the enemy is most likely to

advance and why.

The first point to decide is the number of outguards and their exact

position. In war this would always be done by the company commander,

but if it is desired to give the junior officers of the company some

instruction in this important detail, they should be sent out before

the company arrives on the ground to reconnoiter the position and make

their decisions. The exact siting of the trenches for the outguards,

the construction of obstacles, and the clearance of the foreground

having been decided upon and the positions selected for each outguard

discussed, and a definite site selected, the next question to decide

is the number and position of the sentries.

The platoon commander would then take each scheme in turn, visit with

the whole platoon each position selected for the sentry, and decide

finally what it would be best to do, giving, as usual, his reasons.

Having decided upon the positions of the sentries, and their line of

retreat, so as not to mask the fire of the outguard, the next matter

to consider would be the number of patrols that are required, and the

particular areas of ground that must be examined by them periodically.

The necessary trenches, obstacles, etc., would then be constructed.

Finally, the whole company should be assembled, marched to the

position chosen for each outguard and the reasons for selecting the

position explained by the company commander. The company should then

be told off as an outpost company, and divided into outguards,

supports, if any, and the necessary sentries over arms, patrols, etc.,

and marched to their respective posts.

If there is still time available each platoon commander can

reconnoiter the ground for suitable positions for his outguards by

night, take the outguards there, explain why the change of position is

desirable, and direct the outguard commanders with their outguards to

select positions for the sentries, following the same procedure as by

day.

Although it is quite correct to select positions for night outposts

during daylight, when possible, they should never be definitely

occupied by the company before dark, when the forward movement could

not be observed by the enemy. To practice night outposts by day is bad

instruction, outguards and sentries are placed in positions which

appear ridiculous to the ordinary mind, and the men get confused ideas

on the subject. When it is desired to practice day and night outposts

as an advanced exercise it is advisable to commence work in the

afternoon, establish the day outposts, reconnoiter for the night

outposts, make the change after dark and construct the necessary

trenches, obstacles, etc., after dark.

It is, however, extremely important that the patrols should get to

know their way about the country in front during the daylight, when

possible, so that they will have some practice in recognizing land

marks by night.

It frequently occurs, when training the company in outpost duties,

that periods elapse during which the outguards are doing nothing.

These opportunities should be taken to instruct the men in their

duties when ordered to patrol to the front, the same system of

demonstration being employed. For instance, the officer or

noncommissioned officer commanding a piquet can select three men,

point out certain ground in front which the sentries cannot see and

which must be examined by a patrol, and proceed to instruct the whole

picket in the best manner of carrying out this work. We will suppose

that the patrol is working by day and that the ground to be visited is

behind a small hill some 500 yards in front of the sentry. The

commander of the picket will then explain to the men that the first

object of the patrol is to reach the ground to be examined without

being seen by any hostile patrols which may be moving about in front.

Before proceeding further it is necessary for the patrol to decide

upon the best line of advance. The various lines of advance will be

discussed and the patrol asked to decide which they would select.

Three other men can then be asked to give their opinion, and so on

until all the men of the picket have expressed their views. The

commander of the picket will then state which he considers the best

line and give his reasons.

The next matter to decide is the method of advance to be adopted by

the patrol. Are the three men to march past the sentry in one body and

walk straight over the hill in front? If they do this there may be a

hostile patrol hiding just behind the crest, watching the movements of

our patrol, and directly the latter reach the hill they will be

covered by the rifles of the hostile patrol at a few yards' range and

will be captured or shot.

If the patrol is not to advance in one body how is it to act? There is

plenty of time available, so that there are no objections to

deliberate methods. The patrol should advance from cover to cover with

one man always going forward protected by the rifles of the remaining

two men who have halted in a good position to fire on any enemy that

can fire on the leading man. The leading man having readied the cover

in front will signal back all clear, and the two men in the rear will

join him. They will then make their next advance in a similar manner.

By looking at the hill the patrol can make a good guess at the

locality which a hostile patrol would select if it was on the hill. It

would be a place where it could get a good view towards our outpost

line, and where the patrol could not be seen itself from the outpost

line. If the hill was quite bare with nothing but grass on it and flat

round top, the best place for the enemy's patrol would be exactly on

the top just behind the crest. In such a position he could not be seen

by any sentry to the right or left of our picket. For example, if the

hostile patrol chose a place on the side of the bare slope of the hill

and looked over the crest line it would not be seen by our sentry, but

it might be seen by another one on the flank.

The object of our patrol would be to approach the hill, not direct

from the outguard, but either from the left or right of the hill and

thus come on the flank of the enemy's patrol if he was there.

The whole picket can then be taken out to the front and follow the

movements of the patrol from cover to cover until the hill is reached.

The next step will be to ascertain if there is any one on the top of

the hill. If the hill is perfectly bare with a somewhat convex slope,

it would be best for the three men to extend to about twenty yards

interval and move forward together, prepared to drop on the first sign

of the enemy, so that they can creep up and open fire on him without

exposing themselves. Three men with magazine rifles extended in this

manner, opposed to a hostile patrol collected in one party, should be

able to deal with the latter without much difficulty. Their fire would

be converging, and coming from different directions would confuse the

hostile patrol, especially if the advance was made from a flank. The

men of the patrol when creeping up the hill should avoid exposing

themselves in the direction of the ground behind the hill, if

possible, because they want to examine that ground later on, and if

seen by the enemy they might fall into an ambuscade. If it is

impossible to avoid being seen from the ground beyond, it would be

best for the patrol to retire as though they were going back to the

outposts, and then move round the flank of the hill and advance to the

ground beyond from an unexpected direction. All this would be

considered by the officer or noncommissioned officer commanding the

picket, together with many other points.

Sufficient has been said to explain how this system of demonstration

can be worked in connection with any class of operation in the field.

It is certainly slow, and takes a long time, but no one is ever idle

and every one is constantly learning something fresh, for the simple

reason that, although one may know every detail of the subject, the

ground constantly differs and requires to be dealt with in a common

sense and skillful manner. The men are interested throughout, and one

morning spent on this kind of work is worth several days of practice

in the ordinary manner.

It should be remembered that this system of demonstration is only

required to teach the men their work; when they have once learned it

and thoroughly understand the necessary details they must be practiced

in it, the company or platoon commander indicating what has been well

done, what has been badly done, and what requires improvement. (See

"Outposts," Par. 1051.)

OTHER EXAMPLES OF THE OCULAR DEMONSTRATION METHOD

=938.= The following illustrations will suggest other examples of the

employment of the ocular demonstration method of instruction:

=The advantages and disadvantages of close and extended order.= Send a

lieutenant or a noncommissioned officer with two or three squads of

the older soldiers some distance to the front of the company, and have

them advance toward the company, first in close order and then in

extended order.

By =ocular demonstration= show the men who are watching the approach

of the company how easy it would be even for the poorest shots to land

bullets in the thick of a closed body, but how much of a less distinct

target the extended order offers and how many spaces there are in the

skirmish line for the bullets to pass through; also, how much more

easily cover can be employed and the rifle used in the extended order.

Let them see also how much more difficult it is for the officers and

noncommissioned officers to maintain control over the movements of

troops in extended order, and the consequent necessity and duty of

every soldier, when in extended order, doing all he can, by attention

and exertion, to keep order and help his officers and noncommissioned

officers to gain success.

=939. The Use of Cover.= Send a lieutenant or noncommissioned officer

with a couple of squads of old soldiers a few hundred yards to the

front and have them advance on the company as if attacking, first

without taking advantage of cover and then taking advantage of all

available cover, the part of the company that is supposed to be

attacked lying down and aiming and snapping at the approaching

soldiers. Then reverse the operation--send the defenders out and have

them advance on the former attackers. Explain that the requisites of

good cover are: Ability to see the enemy; concealment of your own

body; ability to use the rifle readily. Then have a number of men take

cover and snap at an enemy in position, represented by a few old

soldiers. Point out the defects and the good points in each case.

=940. Practice in Commanding Mixed Squads.= In order to practice

noncommissioned officers in commanding mixed firing squads, and in

order to drill the privates in banding themselves together and obeying

the orders of anyone who may assume command, it is good training for

two or more companies to practice reenforcing each other by one

company assuming a given fire-position and the other sending up

reenforcements by squads, the men being instructed to take positions

anywhere on the firing line where they may find an opening. However,

explain to the men that whenever possible units should take their

positions on the firing line as a whole, but that in practice it is

very often impossible to do this, and that the drill is being given so

as to practice the noncommissioned officers in commanding mixed units

on the firing line and also to give the privates practice in banding

themselves into groups and obeying the command of any noncommissioned

officer who may be over them.

=941. Operating Against Other Troops.= There is no better way of

arousing interest, enthusiasm, and pride in training troops than by

creating a feeling of friendly rivalry and competition amongst the

men, and the best way to do this is to have one part of the company

operate against the other in all such practical work as scouting,

patrolling, attacking, etc. Whenever practicable, blank ammunition

should be used. One of the sides should wear a white handkerchief

around the hat or some other distinguishing mark. =The troops that are

sent out must be given full and explicit instructions as to just

exactly what they are to do, so that the principles it is intended to

illustrate may be properly brought out.=

FOOTNOTES:

[10] This chapter is based on "Company Training," by General Haking,

British Army, which is the best book the author has ever seen on the

subject of company training. "Field Training of a Company of

Infantry," by Major Craufurd, British Army, an excellent little book,

was also consulted.